Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi
 
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi

· Home / Introduction

CURRENT AFFAIRS

· Current Events & Breaking News

· Cabal / Illuminati / NWO Watch

· Mainstream Media Manipulation

· Banking Crimes & Criminals

· Political Crimes & Criminals

· Feature Articles

· Positive Developments

ILLUMINATI / NWO

· NWO Globalist Agenda

· Secret Societies & The Illuminati

· Conspiracy To Rule The World

· What / Who Is "The Crown"?

· Agenda 21/2030 In New Zealand

· Surveillance Society/Police State

· 'Terrorism' & Engineered Wars

· Eugenics / Depopulation Agenda

· Religion As A Tool For Control

· Common Law Vs Statute Law

SCIENCE / TECHNOLOGY

· The Climate Change Scam

· Chemtrails & Geoengineering

· Suppressed Science

· Positive New Technologies

· Cures, Health & Wellbeing

· Dangerous & Dirty Technology

· Spiritual Aspects & Metaphysics

· The Extra-Terrestrial Presence

HISTORY

· Suppressed / Hidden History

· Real New Zealand History

· The Opal File: NZ / AUS History

· 150+ NWO Globalist Quotes

MISCELLANEOUS

· Political Commentary

· Positive Resources

· Resistance, Resources & Links

· Contact



Newsletter archive - click here

Site Search:































Wake Up Kiwi
Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
News Archives



 

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"
January 11 2024 | From: UNZ / ActivistPost / Various

With the sudden, bizarre rise of the “Fake News” accusations throughout the entire Corporate Media megaphone and the equally bizarre and totally unsubstantiated CIA allegations that the Russians had stolen the election for Donald Trump, this topic is highly pertinent.



A year or two ago, I saw the much-touted science fiction film Interstellar, and although the plot wasn’t any good, one early scene was quite amusing. For various reasons, the American government of the future claimed that our Moon Landings of the late 1960s had been faked, a trick aimed at winning the Cold War by bankrupting Russia into fruitless space efforts of its own.

Related: How Conspiracy Theorising May Soon Get You Labelled A ‘Domestic Terrorist’

This inversion of historical reality was accepted as true by nearly everyone, and those few people who claimed that Neil Armstrong had indeed set foot on the Moon were universally ridiculed as “crazy conspiracy theorists.” This seems a realistic portrayal of human nature to me.

Obviously, a large fraction of everything described by our government leaders or presented in the pages of our most respectable newspapers - from the 9/11 attacks to the most insignificant local case of petty urban corruption - could objectively be categorized as a “conspiracy theory” but such words are never applied.

Instead, use of that highly loaded phrase is reserved for those theories, whether plausible or fanciful, that do not possess the endorsement stamp of establishmentarian approval.



Related: The 70 Greatest Conspiracy Theories in Pop-Culture History

Put another way, there are good “conspiracy theories” and bad “conspiracy theories,” with the former being the ones promoted by pundits on mainstream television shows and hence never described as such.

I’ve sometimes joked with people that if ownership and control of our television stations and other major media outlets suddenly changed, the new information regime would require only a few weeks of concerted effort to totally invert all of our most famous “conspiracy theories” in the minds of the gullible American public.

The notion that nineteen Arabs armed with box-cutters hijacked several jetliners, easily evaded our NORAD air defenses, and reduced several landmark buildings to rubble would soon be universally ridiculed as the most preposterous “conspiracy theory” ever to have gone straight from the comic books into the minds of the mentally ill, easily surpassing the absurd “lone gunman” theory of the JFK assassination.

Even without such changes in media control, huge shifts in American public beliefs have frequently occurred in the recent past, merely on the basis of implied association.

In the initial weeks and months following the 2001 attacks, every American media organ was enlisted to denounce and vilify Osama Bin Laden, the purported Islamicist master-mind, as our greatest national enemy, with his bearded visage endlessly appearing on television and in print, soon becoming one of the most recognizable faces in the world.



Related: Federal Grand Jury To Hear Evidence That 9/11 Was A Controlled Demolition + President Donald Trump Implies 9/11 Was A Controlled Demolition

But as the Bush Administration and its key media allies prepared a war against Iraq, the images of the Burning Towers were instead regularly juxtaposed with mustachioed photos of dictator Saddam Hussein, Bin Laden’s arch-enemy.

As a consequence, by the time we attacked Iraq in 2003, polls revealed that some 70% of the American public believed that Saddam was personally involved in the destruction of our World Trade Center.

By that date I don’t doubt that many millions of patriotic but low-information Americans would have angrily denounced and vilified as a “crazy conspiracy theorist” anyone with the temerity to suggest that Saddam had not been behind 9/11, despite almost no one in authority having ever explicitly made such a fallacious claim.

These factors of media manipulation were very much in my mind a couple of years ago when I stumbled across a short but fascinating book published by the University of Texas academic press.

The author of Conspiracy Theory in America was Prof. Lance deHaven-Smith, a former president of the Florida Political Science Association.



Related: Nine Indisputable Truths About “Conspiracy Theorists”

Based on an important FOIA disclosure, the book’s headline revelation was that the CIA was very likely responsible for the widespread introduction of “conspiracy theory” as a term of political abuse, having orchestrated that development as a deliberate means of influencing public opinion.

During the mid-1960s there had been increasing public skepticism about the Warren Commission findings that a lone gunman, Lee Harvey Oswald, had been solely responsible for President Kennedy’s assassination, and growing suspicions that top-ranking American leaders had also been involved.

So as a means of damage control, the CIA distributed a secret memo to all its field offices requesting that they enlist their media assets in efforts to ridicule and attack such critics as irrational supporters of “conspiracy theories.”

Soon afterward, there suddenly appeared statements in the media making those exact points, with some of the wording, arguments, and patterns of usage closely matching those CIA guidelines.

The result was a huge spike in the pejorative use of the phrase, which spread throughout the American media, with the residual impact continueing right down to the present day. Thus, there is considerable evidence in support of this particular “conspiracy theory” explaining the widespread appearance of attacks on “conspiracy theories” in the public media.



But although the CIA appears to have effectively manipulated public opinion in order to transform the phrase “conspiracy theory” into a powerful weapon of ideological combat, the author also describes how the necessary philosophical ground had actually been prepared a couple of decades earlier.

Around the time of the Second World War, an important shift in political theory caused a huge decline in the respectability of any “conspiratorial” explanation of historical events.

For decades prior to that conflict, one of our most prominent scholars and public intellectuals had been historian Charles Beard, whose influential writings had heavily focused on the harmful role of various elite conspiracies in shaping American policy for the benefit of the few at the expense of the many, with his examples ranging from the earliest history of the United States down to the nation’s entry into WWI.

Obviously, researchers never claimed that all major historical events had hidden causes, but it was widely accepted that some of them did, and attempting to investigate those possibilities was deemed a perfectly acceptable academic enterprise.

However, Beard was a strong opponent of American entry into the Second World War, and he was marginalized in the years that followed, even prior to his death in 1948. Many younger public intellectuals of a similar bent also suffered the same fate, or were even purged from respectability and denied any access to the mainstream media.

At the same time, the totally contrary perspectives of two European political philosophers, Karl Popper and Leo Strauss, gradually gained ascendancy in American intellectual circles, and their ideas became dominant in public life.

Popper, the more widely influential, presented broad, largely theoretical objections to the very possibility of important conspiracies ever existing, suggesting that these would be implausibly difficult to implement given the fallibility of human agents; what might appear a conspiracy actually amounted to individual actors pursuing their narrow aims.

Even more importantly, he regarded “conspiratorial beliefs” as an extremely dangerous social malady, a major contributing factor to the rise of Nazism and other deadly totalitarian ideologies.

His own background as an individual of Jewish ancestry who had fled Austria in 1937 surely contributed to the depth of his feelings on these philosophical matters.



Related: A Nazi In The (Pocket) Is Worth Four In The Bush (Family)

Meanwhile, Strauss, a founding figure in modern neo-conservative thought, was equally harsh in his attacks upon conspiracy analysis, but for polar-opposite reasons.

In his mind, elite conspiracies were absolutely necessary and beneficial, a crucial social defense against anarchy or totalitarianism, but their effectiveness obviously depended upon keeping them hidden from the prying eyes of the ignorant masses.

His main problem with “conspiracy theories” was not that they were always false, but they might often be true, and therefore their spread was potentially disruptive to the smooth functioning of society.

So as a matter of self-defense, elites needed to actively suppress or otherwise undercut the unauthorized investigation of suspected conspiracies
.

Even for most educated Americans, theorists such as Beard, Popper, and Strauss are probably no more than vague names mentioned in textbooks, and that was certainly true in my own case. But while the influence of Beard seems to have largely disappeared in elite circles, the same is hardly true of his rivals.

Popper probably ranks as one of the founders of modern liberal thought, with an individual as politically influential as left-liberal financier George Soros claiming to be his intellectual disciple.



Related: George Soros’ World is Falling Apart, Blames Everyone but Himself

Meanwhile, the neo-conservative thinkers who have totally dominated the Republican Party and the Conservative Movement for the last couple of decades often proudly trace their ideas back to Strauss.

So, through a mixture of Popperian and Straussian thinking, the traditional American tendency to regard elite conspiracies as a real but harmful aspect of our society was gradually stigmatized as either paranoid or politically dangerous, laying the conditions for its exclusion from respectable discourse.

By 1964, this intellectual revolution had largely been completed, as indicated by the overwhelmingly positive reaction to the famous article by political scientist Richard Hofstadter critiquing the so-called “paranoid style” in American politics, which he denounced as the underlying cause of widespread popular belief in implausible conspiracy theories.

To a considerable extent, he seemed to be attacking straw men, recounting and ridiculing the most outlandish conspiratorial beliefs, while seeming to ignore the ones that had been proven correct.



Related: FBI Document Adds “Fringe” Conspiracy Theories As Next Big Domestic Terror Threat & CIA, Climate And Conspiracy: More Notes From The Edge Of The Narrative Matrix

For example, he described how some of the more hysterical anti-Communists claimed that tens of thousands of Red Chinese troops were hidden in Mexico, preparing an attack on San Diego, while he failed to even acknowledge that for years Communist spies had indeed served near the very top of the U.S. government.

Not even the most conspiratorially minded individual suggests that all alleged conspiracies are true, merely that some of them might be.

Most of these shifts in public sentiment occurred before I was born or when I was a very young child, and my own views were shaped by the rather conventional media narratives that I absorbed. Hence, for nearly my entire life, I always automatically dismissed all of the so-called “conspiracy theories” as ridiculous, never once even considering that any of them might possibly be true.

To the extent that I ever thought about the matter, my reasoning was simple and based on what seemed like good, solid common sense. Any conspiracy responsible for some important public event must surely have many separate “moving parts” to it, whether actors or actions taken, let us say numbering at least 100 or more.

Now given the imperfect nature of all attempts at concealment, it would surely be impossible for all of these to be kept entirely hidden. So even if a conspiracy were initially 95% successful in remaining undetected, five major clues would still be left in plain sight for investigators to find.



Related: JFK Jr. Told The World Who Murdered His Father - But Nobody Was Paying Attention

And once the buzzing cloud of journalists noticed these, such blatant evidence of conspiracy would certainly attract an additional swarm of energetic investigators, tracing those items back to their origins, with more pieces gradually being uncovered until the entire cover-up likely collapsed.

Even if not all the crucial facts were ever determined, at least the simple conclusion that there had indeed been some sort of conspiracy would quickly become established.

However, there was a tacit assumption in my reasoning, one that I have since decided was entirely false. Obviously, many potential conspiracies either involve powerful governmental officials or situations in which their disclosure would represent a source of considerable embarrassment to such individuals.

But I had always assumed that even if government failed in its investigatory role, the dedicated bloodhounds of the Fourth Estate would invariably come through, tirelessly seeking truth, ratings, and Pulitzers. However, once I gradually began realizing that the media was merely “Our American Pravda” and perhaps had been so for decades, I suddenly recognized the flaw in my logic.



Related: Degeneracy And Fundamentalism Of Western Media Control & Truth In Media

If those five - or ten or twenty or fifty - initial clues were simply ignored by the media, whether through laziness, incompetence, or much less venial sins, then there would be absolutely nothing to prevent successful conspiracies from taking place and remaining undetected, perhaps even the most blatant and careless ones.

In fact, I would extend this notion to a general principle. Substantial control of the media is almost always an absolute prerequisite for any successful conspiracy, the greater the degree of control the better.

So when weighing the plausibility of any conspiracy, the first matter to investigate is who controls the local media and to what extent.

Let us consider a simple thought-experiment. For various reasons these days, the entire American media is extraordinarily hostile to Russia, certainly much more so than it ever was toward the Communist Soviet Union during the 1970s and 1980s.

Hence I would argue that the likelihood of any large-scale Russian conspiracy taking place within the operative zone of those media organs is virtually nil.



Indeed, we are constantly bombarded with stories of alleged Russian conspiracies that appear to be “false positives,” dire allegations seemingly having little factual basis or actually being totally ridiculous.

Meanwhile, even the crudest sort of anti-Russian conspiracy might easily occur without receiving any serious mainstream media notice or investigation.

This argument may be more than purely hypothetical. A crucial turning point in America’s renewed Cold War against Russia was the passage of the 2012 Magnitsky Act by Congress, punitively targeting various supposedly corrupt Russian officials for their alleged involvement in the illegal persecution and death of an employee of Bill Browder, an American hedge-fund manager with large Russian holdings.

However, there’s actually quite a bit of evidence that it was Browder himself who was actually the mastermind and beneficiary of the gigantic corruption scheme, while his employee was planning to testify against him and was therefore fearful of his life for that reason.



Related: Ten Current Trends Of Operation Coronavirus As Of August 2021 & Vaccine Mandates And The "Great Reset"

Naturally, the American media has provided scarcely a single mention of these remarkable revelations regarding what might amount to a gigantic Magnitsky Hoax of geopolitical significance.

To some extent the creation of the Internet and the vast proliferation of alternative media outlets, including my own small webzine, have somewhat altered this depressing picture.

So it is hardly surprising that a very substantial fraction of the discussion dominating these Samizdat-like publications concerns exactly those subjects regularly condemned as “crazy conspiracy theories” by our mainstream media organs.

Such unfiltered speculation must surely be a source of considerable irritation and worry to government officials who have long relied upon the complicity of their tame media organs to allow their serious misdeeds to pass unnoticed and unpunished.

Indeed, several years ago a senior Obama Administration official argued that the free discussion of various “conspiracy theories” on the Internet was so potentially harmful that government agents should be recruited to “cognitively infiltrate” and disrupt them, essentially proposing a high-tech version of the highly controversial Cointelpro operations undertaken by J. Edgar Hoover’s FBI.



Related: FBI Allegedly Obtained Hunter Biden Computer, Data On Ukraine Dealings, Report Claims & Obama, Clinton, Biden And Brennan Will “Hang For Treason” When This Evidence Comes Out… BOMBSHELL recordings prove they had Seal Team Six EXECUTED to cover up deep state crimes

Until just a few years ago I’d scarcely even heard of Charles Beard, once ranked among the towering figures of 20th century American intellectual life.

But the more I’ve discovered the number of serious crimes and disasters that have completely escaped substantial media scrutiny, the more I wonder what other matters may still remain hidden.

So perhaps Beard was correct all along in recognizing the respectability of “conspiracy theories,” and we should return to his traditional American way of thinking, notwithstanding endless conspiratorial propaganda campaigns by the CIA and others to persuade us that we should dismiss such notions without any serious consideration.


Related Articles:

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

How To Get Rid Of Paranoid Conspiracy Theorists

Mainstream Media Is Trying Hard To Convince Us That “Plandemic” Is A “Conspiracy Theory” + The New Normal

Obamagate Is Not A Conspiracy Theory & Disinformation From Schiff, Media Damaged America

People’s Skepticism About Covid-19 Is The Fault Of The Lying Mass Media & A Personal Take On Covid-19 “Conspiracy Theories”

A Country Without An Honest Media Is Lost: The Largest Conspiracy Theory Peddlers Are Mainstream Media And The US State Department

Medical Destruction: It’s Not Just A Conspiracy Theory


Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

The New mRNA COVID Vaccines Inject An Operating System Into Your Body - Not A Conspiracy Theory, Moderna Admits It & Open Letter to NZ MPs - Lockdown Is A Disastrous Error



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Have You Been Seeing 11:11 Everywhere? What Is The Significance Of 11:11?
January 10 2024 | From: CollectiveEvolution / In5D

11:11 make a wish! I’m sure you remember this saying, and maybe you still say it today. It is the only time of the day (using the 12 hour clock) that all the numbers on the clock are the same.



Where does this saying come from? Should you even bother to make a wish? What makes this time so important and what is the significance of 11:11?

Related: The Zen of 11:11


The Phenomenon

It seems everyone today is talking about seeing 11:11 everywhere. In fact, in the popular movie I Origins, the concept comes up yet again.

A highly scientific guy begins seeing 11:11 in many places and is guided to follow the numbers until he eventually meets a highly spiritual girl and there personalities collide. It’s a fascinating film about reincarnation and it truly makes the view think. But back to 11:11!

Why are so many of us seeing this right now. Is it a biological thing where our bodies get in the habit of looking at a clock during this time? If so, what about when we randomly keep seeing it even on clocks that are out of sync with other clocks?



Related: Spirit Led Activism - The True Power Of The People + Rites Of Passage - Encountering Spiritual “Initiations”
On The Path


For me personally, as I started to awaken, I began to see this number all the time.  After a while I started to notice that there was some sort of spiritual connotation that went a long with the numbers 11:11.

I sometimes go through phases in my life where for a month I see this number on the clock twice a day, and sometimes there are periods where I hardly see it at all.  What does it all mean?

Am I more enlightened during the times when I see it? Is my soul or the universe trying to express something important?


Theories Behind 11:11

There are many different theories out there to express exactly what this apparent phenomenon of seeing the numbers 1111 is all about.

The most common theory is that when you see these numbers you should simply make a wish, and it is believed that it will come true.

Some people claim that when this number is seen it means that there is some kind of window opening up in your life and you should ask for the guidance of your ‘angels’ to find out what it is. Other theories state that there is something significant happening in the moment that you are in and you should pay attention to what is going on in your surroundings.

One of my favorite ideas that I read was that when you see 11:11 you should simply stop, and recognize the significance of the moment.



Related: This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening

In my opinion and what resonates with me, is that when you see ‘11:11’ whether on a clock, a license plate, your bank statement or wherever you happen to see it, is like a friendly little sign from your soul, source, higher-self, or the entire Universe, whatever you choose to call it, God, if you will, that everything is in alignment and you are exactly where you need to be, right here, right now.

According to numerology the number 11 possesses the qualities of patience, honesty, spirituality, sensitivity, intuition and is idealistic.

I have read on a website that seeing 11:11 can be viewed as a glitch in the matrix, it is a very real way for the spirit world to communicate with us.



Related: Society Is Made Of Narrative – Realizing This Is Awakening From The Matrix

I don’t know if we will ever find out exactly what it means, I think you can decide for yourself what it means to you. I know I always get a smile on my face when I see it, it definitely makes me feel good and I love to share with others, ‘Hey look! It’s 11:11!’



What is the Meaning of 11 11?

There is a global 11 11 phenomenon that is perplexing many individuals in regard to numerical synchronicities and in particular, the number and the meaning behind 11:11. From teenagers to senior citizens, these synchronistic numbers seem to appear on a daily basis. What does 1111 mean?

For example, you might be putting gas in your car and when you’re done, you’ll notice that you put exactly 11.11 gallons in your car. Or you might be at the checkout line in a store and the cashier gives you $11.11 in change. 

As you’re going home, you might notice a license plate with the numbers 1111 on it.



Related: The Human Aura And DNA: How You Choose Your Genes

This happens most often when looking at the clock.

We’ve all seemingly had this experience: You just happen to look at the clock and it’s 11:11 am or pm.  It’s not like you are constantly waiting for this magical number to appear, it just does.

From an esoteric standpoint, 11:11 appears to be something that is genetically coded within our “junk” DNA as a cue to spiritually awaken.

Related: 11:11 And Other Repetitive, Synchronistic Numbers


What does 11:11 mean? 16 Meanings for 11:11

11:11 is subjective to the interpreter and to the interpretation.  In other words, YOUR interpretation is the only interpretation that matters!  Here are the many interpretations of 11:11.

11:11 Awareness: The first thing you should pay attention to when you see a synchronistic number is what you’re either doing or thinking at that particular moment.  You should also be cognizant of your surroundings, such as the song that you’re currently listening to or even something as simple as the rays of sunshine coming in through your window.



The actual word synchronicity was coined by psychologist Carl Jung, who described it as events that have “meaningful coincidences” if they occur with no apparent causal relationship, yet seem to be meaningfully related

Related: 11:11 And Synchronicity – What Does It Really Mean?

11:11 Gateway or Portal:  11:11 is the doorway between two worlds – between the 3rd dimensional and the 5th dimensional worlds.

Angelic Humans:  According to George Barnard, 11:11 is “the calling card for beings that are half angels and half humans”.

Angels and Spirit Guides: Your guardian angel or spirit guide is trying to connect with you.

Balance:  Your life is either gaining or becoming more in balance when you see 11:11.  This might also be an affirmation that your life is in complete balance as well.

Binary DNA Code: The brain is like a computer, which relies on binary codes (1’s and 0’s).  In this premise, 11:11 is the binary code that awakens your dormant (junk) DNA.

Digital Time Code: This theory encapsulates several theories within the same premise.  11:11 unlocks your DNA and opens the subconscious mind through physically seeing these digital numbers and re-remembering why your brain was coded to remember the importance of 11:11.

DNA Activation: The number 11 represents twin strands of DNA, so for some people, this is a sign of a DNA activation or upgrade.

Edgar Cayce: As I mentioned in a previous article, Edgar Cayce was quoted as saying, “The first lesson for six months should be One-One-One- One; Oneness of God, oneness of man’s relation, oneness of force, oneness of time, oneness of purpose, Oneness in every effort-Oneness- Oneness!”  Edgar may have meant, “The first lesson for six months should be 11:11.”



Related: Neuroscience Says Listening To This Song Reduces Anxiety By Up To 65 Percent + The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers

Fibonacci Sequence:  The first two numbers of the Fibonacci Sequence are 1,1.  The Fibonacci Sequence is basically tied into Sacred Geometry and the Golden Ratio of Creation, so this number would represent an end to physical reality as we know it.

Global Consciousness: When you see 11:11, you feel connected with the Universe and everyone else who is currently experiencing this phenomenon. You completely understand what “we are all one” means.

Make a Wish: Many teens are playing the 11:11pm game without really even knowing the significance behind 11:11.  If they notice that it’s 11:11pm, they make a wish.  Is it possible that these children are indigos and 11:11 represents an awakening code for them?

Numerology: The number 11 is a Master Number and represents impractical idealism, visionary, refinement of ideals, intuition, revelation, artistic and inventive genius, avant-garde, androgynous, film, fame, refinement fulfilled when working with a practical partner.

Spiritual Purpose
: 11:11 presents you an opportunity to reflect on your spiritual purpose for being here.

Synchronicity: Your life has become total balance and the lesson you need to learn will appear before you.  “When the pupil is ready, the master appears”.

Wake Up Call:  11:11 signifies your spiritual awakening, as this number seems to be predominantly noticed by those who have begun their spiritual journeys. It may also be seen as a code to unlock your subconscious mind.

Also see: 11:11 Synchronicity - Repetitive Numbers and Their Meaning





Also see: 11:11 Glitch In Time Anomaly

Most likely, you are reading this article because you have also experienced the 11:11 phenomena.  If you haven’t experienced 11:11, then chances are, you will in the near future.

What is it really about? “Time “ will tell.


Related Articles:

 Number Sequences From Our Spirit Guides


The Fibonacci Sequence: What Is The Golden Ratio?

In Harmony with All Life: The Open Source Way + Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality

Why ‘Conspiracy Theories’ & Spirituality Are Intimately Connected



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Crown Of England Is Owned And Operated By The Vatican
January 9 2024 | From: OmniThought / Various

The Vatican is one of the most powerful corporations in the world. It is powerful because it controls the Crown of England and nearly every church in the world, especially Catholic churches.



Furthermore, the Vatican operates under Roman law and controls most of the Western courts and some Eastern courts.

Related: What / Who Is "The Crown"?

In the USA today, nearly every U.S. court is controlled by the Crown Temple, a corporation controlled by the Vatican. This is why there is always a Crown agent in the courtroom during a trial. Any country that has Crown agents running its legal system is controlled by the Vatican / Rome to a large degree.

This means that the United States, Canada, United Kingdom, Australia, New Zealand, and “countries” that are operating under the Western legal system are all Roman “colonies”.

The Vatican is a religious corporation run by religious leaders who are loyal to the Roman Empire. In other words, Rome still rules the world! It rules the world through the Crown of England, the Roman Catholic Church and the Vatican.



Related: Pope Francis: Is He Obsessed With The Devil?

They did not call it the ROMAN Catholic Church for no reason. It is right in your face and hidden in plain sight!

According to an article published by BBC.com, there are an estimated 1.2 billion Roman Catholics in the world. This means that the Vatican/Rome has about 1.2 billion “citizens”, or more accurately slaves.

Because nearly every Christian church is controlled by the Vatican to a certain degree, the Vatican/Rome has more than 1.2 billion slaves to exploit and sell. Do you innerstand now why Rome still rules the world?



Related: The Top Of The Pyramid: The Rothschilds, The Vatican And The British Crown Rule World


The Crown is Owned and Operated by the Roman Cult, and Has Been Since 1213

The Definitive Treaty of Peace of 1783 says that King George was the Arch Treasurer and Prince Elector of the Holy Roman Empire and the United States of America.

This video goes through how the Roman Cult orchestrated the slave trade, then the War of Independence, then the War of 1812, then the Civil War, then WW1, WW2, and now they are building up to WW3 [which will not take place].

All warfare is commerce, and all commerce is warfare. All fictitious entities operate under Roman Law.

www.sovereigntyinternational.fyi | www.sovereigntyinternational.wordpress.com

Comment: As is often the case, these Christian researchers are very good at research - but you'll need to excuse the religious ranting...







Related: Articles:

Timeline of the Great Fraud, by Judge Anna Von Reitz

Notre Dame Cathedral Burning False Flag, Complicity Of Pope, Organized By Macron, Merkel, & May, Goal Of Saving EU & Central Banks

Subjects and Serfs of the Lesser Gods (Part I)

Coronavirus Traced To The British Crown & World-Famous Celebrity Makes Shocking Statement About The Flu

The Vatican Is A Criminal Hornets’ Nest

The Occult Symbolism Of The Vatican’s 2020 Nativity Scene

The Luciferian Vatican Empire Is Imploding & As Many As 8 Million Children Are Kidnapped And Trafficked Into Sex Slavery Every Year By Global Pedophile Networks – Of Which Many Politicians Are Members

The Vatican Has Paid Nearly $4 Billion To Settle For Children Harmed By Sexual Abuse


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Neuroscience Says Listening To This Song Reduces Anxiety By Up To 65 Percent + The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers
January 8 2024 | From: Inc / Various

Sure to both stir your soul and calm your nervous system.



Everyone knows they need to manage their stress. When things get difficult at work, school, or in your personal life, you can use as many tips, tricks, and techniques as you can get to calm your nerves.


Related: The A=432 Hz Frequency: DNA Tuning And The Bastardisation Of Music

So here's a science-backed one: make a playlist of the 10 songs found to be the most relaxing on earth.

Sound therapies have long been popular as a way of relaxing and restoring one's health. For centuries, indigenous cultures have used music to enhance well-being and improve health conditions.

Neuroscientists out of the UK have specified which tunes give you the most bang for your musical buck.

The study was conducted on participants who attempted to solve difficult puzzles as quickly as possible while connected to sensors. The puzzles induced a certain level of stress, and participants listened to different songs while researchers measured brain activity as well as physiological states that included heart rate, blood pressure, and rate of breathing.

According to Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson of Mindlab International, which conducted the research, the top song produced a greater state of relaxation than any other music tested to date.

In fact, listening to that one song - "Weightless" - resulted in a striking 65 percent reduction in participants' overall anxiety, and a 35 percent reduction in their usual physiological resting rates.





Related: Are There Patents To Manipulate The Human Nervous System Using Electromagnetic Frequencies?


That is remarkable.

Equally remarkable is the fact the song was actually constructed to do so. The group that created "Weightless", Marconi Union, did so in collaboration with sound therapists. Its carefully arranged harmonies, rhythms, and bass lines help slow a listener's heart rate, reduce blood pressure and lower levels of the stress hormone cortisol.

When it comes to lowering anxiety, the stakes couldn't be higher. Stress either exacerbates or increases the risk of health issues like heart disease, obesity, depression, gastrointestinal problems, asthma, and more.

More troubling still, a paper out of Harvard and Stanford found health issues from job stress alone cause more deaths than diabetes, Alzheimer's, or influenza.

In this age of constant bombardment, the science is clear: if you want your mind and body to last, you've got to prioritize giving them a rest. Music is an easy way to take some of the pressure off of all the pings, dings, apps, tags, texts, emails, appointments, meetings, and deadlines that can easily spike your stress level and leave you feeling drained and anxious.

Of the top track, Dr. David Lewis-Hodgson said, "'Weightless' was so effective, many women became drowsy and I would advise against driving while listening to the song because it could be dangerous."

So don't drive while listening to these, but do take advantage of them:

10. "We Can Fly," by Rue du Soleil (Café Del Mar)

09. "Canzonetta Sull'aria," by Mozart

08. "Someone Like You," by Adele

07. "Pure Shores," by All Saints

06. "Please Don't Go," by Barcelona

05. "Strawberry Swing," by Coldplay

04. "Watermark," by Enya

03. "Mellomaniac (Chill Out Mix)," by DJ Shah

02. "Electra," by Airstream

01. "Weightless," by Marconi Union


Just beware of this: Social Engineering - The War On The Higher Mind Of Humans: Here’s Why You Should Consider Converting Your Music To A=432 Hz

I made a public playlist of all of them on Spotify that runs about 50 minutes (it's also downloadable).


“Where words fail, music speaks." -- Hans Christian Andersen

Related: Devil Music: A History Of The Occult In Rock & Roll




The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers






Related Articles:


The Fibonacci Sequence: What Is The Golden Ratio?

Research Shows We Can Heal With Vibration, Frequency & Sound + Which Is Worse: The NSA Or The FDA?

The Secret Meeting That Changed Rap Music And Destroyed A Generation & The Troubling Case Of Paz de la Huerta And Her (Now Deleted) Instagram Account

Devil Music: A History Of The Occult In Rock & Roll

What Happened To Prince?

"Linkin Park's Chester Bennington Was Murdered" - And Soundgarden's Chris Cornell Was Also Likely To Have Been 'Suicided' In Illuminati Ritual Killings

Death By Hanging From A Doorknob - The Signature Of Pedophilia-Related Assassinations? Eleven People So Far - Who Knew Doorknobs Could Be So Deadly? & Pedophilia Is More Common Than You Think

Paul Has Been Dead For 50 Years

Demons Behind The Music Industry (Ex Illuminati Explains) & Illuminati - The Music Industry Exposed

The Most Relaxing Ambient Sound Sites On The Internet

ASoftMurmur

New Study: 528Hz Sound "Miraculously" Cleaned Oil Polluted Water In The Gulf Of Mexico



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Unschooling: Radical Education That Produces Free Human Beings Instead Of Slaves
January 7 2024 | From: DaisyLuther / Various

Let’s talk about the “education system,” that cornerstone of civilized societies everywhere.




We all know that the future lies in the hands of our children. That’s why parents want to do everything they can to give their kids a good start in life. We make careful choices about the food they eat, the friends they hang out with, and the education they receive.


Related: Education Programming 101: Destroy Logic

Unfortunately, over the past decades, the education system in America has been churning out kids who are less interested in the world around them, more dependent on others for safety, and programmed to accept whatever information they’re provided without question.

Our education system is actually dumbing kids down instead of making them smarter. It’s killing natural curiosity, independent decision-making, and critical thinking. We all rant about Generation Snowflake, but these kids have grown up to be exactly what they’ve been taught to be.

The “education system” is working exactly as it was designed.  This curriculum is a social experiment, designed to reduce critical thinking and increase obedience. How else will children learn to be the type of citizens that governments want?


At school, you learn important things like the following:

How to respond to bells

How to reign in your attention span into 50-minute increments

How to multitask and “learn” 6 different subjects at the same time, while mastering none of them

How to follow the instructions of authority figures without question

How to recite things off by memory

How to feel about politically correct topics

How to squelch your individuality

How to respond to questions to get the best grades

When the appropriate time is to visit the restroom, and how to ask permission to do so if the urge strikes at an inopportune time

How you must show up to serve your sentence on the required days, regardless of whether you feel like it or whether another opportunity has arisen

How to sleep and awaken at the times that are most convenient to your masters teachers, as opposed to the ones that work with your personal circadian rhythms

How you will completely fail at life if you don’t continue your “education” after high school

How to dive so deeply into debt that you must take any job you can get in order to pay off the student loans that were supposed to help you get a “good” job


Basically, you learn to become a better slave. You learn to spend all day doing things you might hate, might find boring, or might not understand.



Related: Undoing The Dis-Education Of Millennials


But it isn’t Just School that is the Problem

The problem runs far deeper than just the classroom. It’s the system of learning itself. Even most homeschool curriculums focus on a broad range of subjects directed by the parent. While many parents do a fantastic job engaging their children in the lessons, there are children who just don’t respond to a format in which they must learn about 5 different subjects each day.

If you can awaken in a child the desire to know more... more about bugs and how they live... more about microclimates... more about geology... more about the past... then you can teach a child how to learn.

In my opinion, the utter failure of the education system is that they don’t create curious children. We moved quite a few times, and rarely did I see children challenged, piqued, and tempted with knowledge. Instead, I observed drudgery, boredom, and conveyor belt education.

If a child slips behind, they don’t stop the belt, take the kid off, and help them catch up. They say, “No child left behind” and they shove them along that belt, forcing them to try to learn the next installment of the lesson plan on top of the complete lack of foundational information that they didn’t understand in the first place.

A few years ago, I pulled my youngest child out of the public school system after a (cough) disagreement with the principal there. For a couple of years, we slogged away using a state-approved curriculum for homeschool.



Related: Study Shows Kids Are Born Creative Geniuses But The Education System Destroys Imagination

Not only did it bore the daylights out of her, I found it pretty torturous too. The whole time we did the standard curriculum, I watched the curiosity that is the necessary spark to kindle the flame of learning, slowly die.

And that is the saddest death imaginable, because with it dies the future.

If you don’t love learning new things, if you aren’t curious about the how and the why and the when and the where, how will you ever jump into life with both feet, ready to explore new places, climb new mountains, and have new adventures?

Don’t get me wrong - you need to learn to read and to write and to do math - but you also need to embrace the very idea of learning something new and different, too.

So, we pulled out of all things school. I decided to trust my daughter. I will indulge her sharp wit, her natural curiosity, and her love for photography.

I want to undo the damage done by the school system, with their laborious texts, their Common Core, and their politically correct death-by-boredom.

If I don’t want her to grow up to be a slave to the state, I decided, it was time to stop raising her in the same way the other slaves are raised.

So, we’re unschooling.


What is Unschooling?

John Holt, widely known as the “father of unschooling” wrote:


“This is also known as interest driven, child-led, natural, organic, eclectic, or self-directed learning. Lately, the term “unschooling” has come to be associated with the type of homeschooling that doesn’t use a fixed curriculum…

This is the way we learn before going to school and the way we learn when we leave school and enter the world of work…

Unschooling, for lack of a better term (until people start to accept living as part and parcel of learning), is the natural way to learn. However, this does not mean unschoolers do not take traditional classes or use curricular materials when the student, or parents and children together, decide that this is how they want to do it.

Learning to read or do quadratic equations are not “natural” processes, but unschoolers nonetheless learn them when it makes sense to them to do so, not because they have reached a certain age or are compelled to do so by arbitrary authority."

Can you really think of anything in the world that makes more sense than that?

Unschooling can be as simple as letting your child exhaustively indulge his or her curiosity about a subject by getting books about it, attending a class on it, and going on field trips that are related to it. Alternatively, it can become a family affair of travel, knowledge-seeking, and adventure.

The details are up to your and your child. The only rule is that the student directs it through his or her own interests.

It’s real life, lived with passion, and therein lies an education more priceless than anything you could get behind the ivy-covered walls of the fanciest school around. (In fact, my daughter and I are leaving soon on an epic road trip of more than 10,00 miles (If you want to follow along on our Great American Unschooling Tour, I wrote about the details here).



Related: Why You And Your Kids Should Detox Your Mind By “Deschooling”

This is how people used to learn - they were free to develop their interests, to pursue their passions, and to investigate, experiment, and think. Initially, education was a way for kids to have the world at their fingertips, especially if their parents were illiterate and not able to expose them to things beyond their own farm.

But then, it became an indoctrination system that separates children from their families, forces them to conform, and stamps out individual learning styles.


Let your Child Learn to be Free

When you no longer live by the school bell, the most beautiful thing can happen. You become free.


By learning when and what you want, you gain a true understanding of freedom, and who doesn’t want that for their children?

You can sleep when you’re sleepy.

You can find out more about the things that make you curious.\

You can focus on one thing at a time if that is how you learn best.

You can make art when you want to make art, not when you finally finish all of the boring stuff you’re forced to do.

You can eat when you’re hungry.

You can become the master of your own future.

You can take what makes you the happiest and completely immerse yourself in it.

You can travel when the spirit moves you, not when you get a scheduled break from school.

You can learn about real life, not just get dumped into it when you graduate.

You can start a business of your own.

You can take a class that fascinates you just for the joy of taking the class

You can take field trips to learn from experts and personal experiences.

 

Best of all, when you unschool, your child lives a kind of freedom that will set them on the course for an adulthood of freedom.



Related: The Inherent Problem With Mainstream Education And How It Keeps The World Stuck

Is there any better gift than that? Is there any educational goal greater than teaching your child to be a free human being, unfettered by bells, whistles, and authority figures?


Common Core Possibly Coming To A School Near You

After reading this bill it seems that Americas Common core is spreading like wild fire across the world under different guises.

I read the bill and honestly alarm bells rang which makes the education reform a one size fits all, seems quite coincidental parata decides to resign after this bill has passed: New Zealand Education Legislation Bill


Related Articles:


The Science And Pseudoscience Of Children’s Mental Health + Creating ADHD Is The New Education

UN Adopts Global Common Core Education To Ensure Their Vision Of Global Totalitarianism


How The Frankfurt School Changed American / Western Culture

Emotional Intelligence: The Social Skills You Weren't Taught In School

Finally Parents Begin Removing Their Children From Public Indoctrination Center Over Teaching Transgenderism

Cot Deaths Linked To Vaccinations + Harvard Medical School Doctor: Vaccine Science Is Not Settled

How To Become A Freethinker: A Practical Guide + 7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life

Why Mandatory Vaccination Is Unethical And Immoral + California Medical Doctor Explains How Doctors Receive No Medical Training on Vaccines – Indoctrination On Belief In Vaccines & First-Ever Peer-Reviewed Study Of Vaccinated Vs Unvaccinated Children Shows Vaccinated Kids Have A Higher Rate Of Sickness, 470% Increase In Autism

Meet Naomi Seibt - The 19-Year-Old, Blond Antidote To Greta Thunberg & NZ Government Begins National Climate Indoctrination Of Children

Everything Is Rigged: Medicine, Science, Elections, The Media, Money, Education, Search Engines, Social Media... You Are Living In A Fabricated Fairy Tale

Renowned Doctor Slams Medical Education & Says We Have “An Epidemic Of Misinformed Doctors”


Is Psychiatry Bullshit? + Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Fourteen Eyebrow-Raising Things Google Knows About You
January 6 2024 | From: NetworkWorld / Various

Some are fascinating, others are frightening - but here's how to find out what Google has on you. Google may know more about me than I know about myself.



I'm not just saying that, either: I recently started poking around in Google's personal data repositories and realized that, between my wide-reaching use of the company's services and my own brain's inability to remember anything for more than seven seconds, Google may actually have the upper hand when it comes to knowledge about my life.

Related:
Will Google’s Social Credit System Determine Your Future?

From face-tagged photos of my past adventures (what year did I go to Nashville, again - and who went with me to that Eddie Vedder show?) to the minute-by-minute play-by-play of my not-so-adventuresome days (wait, you mean I really only left the house once last Wednesday - and just to get a freakin' sandwich?!), Google's got all sorts of goods on me.

Heck, even my hopes and dreams (which may or may not involve sandwiches) are probably catalogued somewhere in its systems. And the data itself is only half the story: Google also compiles oodles of stats - stats that, for better and for worse, shed light onto the tech-connected habits of our modern lives. And don't doubt Apple does the exact same things either.


How many emails have you actually sent over the years, for instance, and how many thousands of web pages have you pulled up in your browser? It really is enlightening, among other things, to see your actions broken down so precisely.

Before you freak out, though, remember: The only way anyone else could get at any of this info would be if they were to gain access to your Google account - something two-factor authentication and good mobile security hygiene make highly unlikely.

And remember, too, that all this data collection is completely optional - and very much a tradeoff: By agreeing to let Google store and use your data, you're getting access to an ever-expanding array of futuristic features at no monetary cost.



Related: Titanpointe: The NSA’s Spy Hub in New York, Hidden in Plain Sight

But the decision is ultimately in your hands. To learn more about how Google uses specific types of data and how you can opt out of any or all areas of collection, see the "Opting out and taking control" section at the end of this story.

All of that being said, here are some of the more amusing - and maybe slightly surprising - things you might find about yourself by prodding the right parts of Google's noggin. How many of these items actually apply to you depends on which Google services you use and how exactly you use them.

To wit: Android users who take advantage of built-in features such as voice commands, location history and photo backups will almost certainly have more data tracked by Google than non-Android users.

But anyone who regularly uses Gmail, Google search, Google Maps, YouTube, Chrome and/or other Google services from any mobile device or computer will likely find at least some interesting nuggets from the following list.



1. A Full History of Your Voice Commands With Any Google Product - Including Actual Audio Recordings

Everything you've ever said to Google, in one convenient place. OK, Google: Remind me how silly I sound when talking to my phone (you know, when it seems like no one else is listening). If you use voice commands on Android or any other Google product (for instance, voice searches in the Google iOS app when you're logged in with your Google account), head to the "Voice & Audio" section of Google's My Activity site to see and hear a comprehensive list of everything you've ever said to that inanimate object in your pocket.

And yes, your voice really does sound like that.


2. An Objective Breakdown of Your Real BFFs (According to Google)

Data doesn't lie. Discover whom among your Google contacts you interact with the most by clicking the "Contacts" header on Google's account dashboard. Just be prepared to make up excuses if your significant other doesn't make the "Frequently contacted" list.


3. How Much Stuff Chrome Has Saved About You

Your browsing habits, broken down into indisputable numbers.



Related: Google Operating Like A News Publisher, Project Veritas Leaks Reveal & Mother Of All Google Whistleblowers Exposes Global Criminal Plan To Control All Information

If you use the Chrome browser and typically stay signed into it, check out your account's Chrome Sync settings page to see all sorts of brag- and/or shame-worthy stats about your personal browsing habits - things like how many bookmarks you've saved, how many tabs you have open across different devices and how many websites you've typed into Chrome's address bar (since last resetting your browser's history).

Free cookie* if you guess within five points of any of your values. * A free browser cookie, that is. C'mon - what did you expect?


4. How Many Gmail Conversations You've Had

Provided you use Gmail's archiving system instead of permanently deleting messages, you may be in for a shock: Click the aptly named "Gmail" header in Google's account dashboard, and get ready to see why your days always seem so short.

Case in point: I have 145,810 message threads in my Gmail account -- with just over 28,000 sent messages. Let me repeat that: Twenty-eight thousand sent messages. No wonder I never get anything accomplished.


5. A Full History of Everywhere You've Ever Been

File this one under "Cool Yet Creepy": Google Maps' Timeline feature contains a detailed diary of your every move -- down to the minute.

No exaggeration: If you carry an Android phone and have opted into location history, the site will show you where you were every moment of every day. And if you really want to weird yourself out, open Timeline from a desktop and click the year tab in the upper-left corner of the screen. Select "All Time," then click the red box in the lower-left corner to see an ordered list of your most visited places.



Related: Harvard Professor Exposes Google And Facebook & NZ Police Trialled Facial Recognition Tech Without Clearance

(My top four are currently my house, Target, the grocery and Barnes & Noble. What can I say? It's a wild and crazy life I lead.)


6. A Full List of Everything You've Done From any Android Device

Your smartphone is a fantastic tool for productivity-enhancing tasks like word processing, spreadsheet creation, and... oh, who the hell are we kidding? You're using the thing for mindless web browsing and meaningless game-playing, just like everyone else.You can see a detailed log of activity on your Android devices at Google's My Activity site.

Find out for sure what you're doing on your Android devices - or what someone else is doing on them, if colleagues or kiddos ever get their hands on your phone - by opening Google's My Activity site. Select the option to "Filter by date & product," then select "Android" and click the blue search icon.

Just don't let your boss see that you spent all of Tuesday's meeting "working" on Words With Friends.


7. A Comprehensive Collection of Every Site You've Visited in Chrome - On Any Device

These days, Chrome isn't just a desktop browser - and if you're using the program from a phone or tablet as well as a regular computer, you're bound to have quite the collective history.

See where you've been on the web (while signed in to Chrome) by opening Google's My Activity page and checking "Chrome" in the filter list. You can search for specific keywords and even filter further by date -- a useful tool if you ever need to find a site you pulled up somewhere but can't quite remember.



Related: Responding To The “Nothing To Hide” Argument In Support Of Mass Surveillance + We Are All Targeted Individuals Now with Dr. Katherine Horton

If you're not seeing your Chrome history on the My Activity page, go to the Activity controls and make sure the Web & App Activity toggle is on and the "Include Chrome browsing history and activity from websites and apps that use Google services" box is checked. (Also make sure that you're signed into Chrome on your various devices.) Your Chrome activity will be tracked from this point forward.

As for the sites you'd rather not have recorded - well, amigos, let's just say that Incognito mode is your friend.


8. Exactly How Many Google Searches You've Made this Month

First and foremost, Google is a search engine -- so how much are you Googling? Get the skinny by scrolling down to the "Search History" header in Google's account dashboard.

Click the header to see precisely how many times you've called upon Google's knowledge from any device while signed into your Google account in the past month -- along with a breakdown of your most common search types and some of your most frequently used queries. (Again: Incognito mode. Never forget.)


9. A Running Count of How Many Android Devices You've Had Connected to Your Account Over the Years

Think you've been through a lot of phones and mobile devices? Calculate your official Android Geek Quotient score by pulling up Google's account dashboard and looking for the "Android" header. The big green number beneath it will tell you how many Android products have ever been associated with your account. (Hopefully yours isn't as high as my almost-silly-seeming score of 78.)



Related: The Surveillance State: How To Disappear & It’s Why Big Tech Is Watching You: How You Spend Your Money Reveals Parts Of Your Personality, And Vice Versa

You can get more detailed info on all the devices, too -- including when each product was last used and a list of all the apps it has backed up to Google's servers -- by clicking the header. And a quick tip: If you want to get old, inactive devices out of your hair, head to the Play Store settings page and uncheck the "Show in menus" option next to any phones or tablets that are no longer relevant.


10. A Running Count of How Many Android Apps You've Ever Installed

Your Android app stats can be both enlightening and alarming. Trying out new apps is a great way to keep your mobile tech feeling fresh -- to a certain point, anyway. See if you've crossed the line from adventurous to ridiculous by finding the "Play Store" header on Google's account dashboard.

If you manage to top my current total of 1,191 apps, seek immediate help.


11. Some Stats on Your Invite-Accepting Habits

Are you a person who tends to accept event invitations? Or do you say "no" more often than "yes"? If you're a Google Calendar user who frequently interacts with other Google Calendar users, you can find out by clicking the "Calendar" header at Google's account dashboard. That'll give you a breakdown of your accepting-vs.-rejecting activity over the past month, including a handy pie chart to illustrate your temperament in visual form. Hey, at least there's no line graph on the lameness of your excuses.

Related: Consumer watchdogs say popular toys are secretly spying on your children


12. How Many Images You've Stored with Google Photos

I don't know about you, but I tend to take way too many pictures -- mostly of my 22-month-old daughter (and occasionally of those damn squirrels that always run through my backyard and taunt me with their superior short-term memories).

Thankfully, Google Photos makes it simple for me to store all these images and access them anywhere -- and also to see at a glance just how absurdly large my personal photo collection has gotten. To get the lowdown on your own virtual photo box, mosey down to the "Photos" header in Google's account dashboard. And be sure to take a mental snapshot of the result.


13. A Full List of All Your Activity in the Google Play Store

Everything you've ever searched for in the Play Store, in one centralized place.


Related: We Are Surrounded By Masonic Symbols: How Modern Logos Are Linked To Secret Societies

Have you ever looked at or searched for something in the Play Store -- then tried to find it again later, only to realize your memory was worse than your friendly neighborhood squirrel's? I know I have.

So use my trick: The next time you find yourself wishing for a time machine, just scamper over to Google's My Activity page. Filter the results to "Play," and voila: You'll find a full list of every item you've viewed and every Play Store search you've made while signed into your Google account. Now if only this thing had a way to tell me where I buried my acorn the other day...


14. How Many YouTube Videos You've Watched this Month

We've all been there: You're in the middle of something extremely productive (naturally) when a single YouTube link happens to catch your eye. Watching one video seems harmless enough, right?

But then the inevitable happens: One video turns to two. Wait, what's that in the "Related" section - a clip of a bird whistling the melody to Guns N' Roses' "Patience"? Click. Watch. Repeat. Before you know it, you're 19 videos in, and the afternoon is over.



Related: Why We’re Calling For The Regulation Of Google, Facebook, YouTube And Twitter To Halt Malicious Censorship And Create A Fair Platform For Public Debate

Discover just how much YouTube time-whittlin' you've done in the last month (while logged into your Google account) by visiting Google's account dashboard and clicking the "YouTube" header. And for the love of Goog, if your monthly tally is over 200, think long and hard before clicking that next cat-dancing clip.


Opting Out and Taking Control

Want to turn off specific types of data collection or delete existing info from your Google account history? The Google privacy site is the best place to start; there, Google provides detailed information about how each type of data is used along with links to opt out of any specific areas. You can also visit Google's Activity controls page for a simple single-page list of on-off toggles.

If you're looking to clean up your history for anything that Google has been tracking, head to the My Activity site.

You can delete any individual item right then and there by clicking the three-dot icon in its upper-right corner and choosing Delete, or click the "Delete activity by" link in the left column for an easy way to erase info based on date and/or product.

Data collection controls can be also found on an Android device by opening the main system settings and selecting Google (or, if you're on an older device, looking for the standalone Google Settings app) and then tapping "Personal info & privacy."


Related Articles:

The Terrifying Cost of "Free” Websites

Here’s What The Big Tech Companies Know About You & Sundar Pichai Lies To Congress About Google Tracking Location Of Users

Boycott Facebook, Twitter, And Google. Here’s Why

Google's Digital Book Burn: Alternative Medicine Content Now Vanishingly Rare, Despite One Billion Health Searches A Day

It’s Not That We’ve Failed To Rein In Facebook And Google. We’ve Not Even Tried

Spygate: Trump Holds All the Cards In This Game + Insider Exposes Google’s Efforts To Influence 2020 Election Against Trump

Google, YouTube, Twitter, Facebook, Comcast, Instagram Suffer Devastating Outages As Trump Goes To War With Big Tech’s Malicious Censorship And Fraud & "Wikipedia Is Broken," Controlled By Special Interests & Bad Actors Says Co-Founder

Google Whistleblowers: Search Engine Penalizing All Sites That Don’t Conform To Political Correctness & Everything You Need To Know About Net Neutrality

Google Will Help Diagnose Your Clinical Depression: It’s Wonderful

Mainstream Media Assaults On Freedom Of Speech: “The Truth” Is No Longer “Important” & Google: Time To Kill Free Speech

Elizabeth Holmes’ “Theranos” Fraud Was Actually A Plot To Surveil The Blood And DNA Of Everyone


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Birth And Death Of Privacy: 3,000 Years Of History Told Through 46 Images
January 5 2024 | From: Medium / Various

Privacy, as we understand it, is only about 150 years old.



Humans do have an instinctual desire for privacy. However, for 3,000 years, cultures have nearly always prioritized convenience and wealth over privacy.

Related: Delusions About Private Property And The Fantasy Of Equality


A 2-Minute Summary



Section II will show how cutting edge health technology will force people to choose between an early, costly death and a world without any semblance of privacy. Given historical trends, the most likely outcome is that we will forgo privacy and return to our traditional, transparent existence.

*This post is part of an online book about Silicon Valley’s Political endgame. See all available chapters here.


Section I: How Privacy Was Invented Slowly Over 3,000 years


“Privacy may actually be an anomaly.”

- Vinton Cerf, Co-creator of the military’s early Internet prototype and Google executive.

Cerf suffered a torrent of criticism in the media for suggesting that privacy is unnatural. Though he was simply opining on what he believed was an under-the-radar gathering at the Federal Trade Commission in 2013, historically speaking, Cerf is right.

Privacy, as it is conventionally understood, is only about 150 years old. Most humans living throughout history had little concept of privacy in their tiny communities. Sex, breastfeeding, and bathing were shamelessly performed in front of friends and family.

The lesson from 3,000 years of history is that privacy has almost always been a back-burner priority. Humans invariably choose money, prestige or convenience when it has conflicted with a desire for solitude.

This chapter takes a look at how technology shaped desires for privacy over the major epochs of human history.


Tribal Life (~200,000 B.C. to 6,000 B.C)


“Because hunter-gatherer children sleep with their parents, either in the same bed or in the same hut, there is no privacy. Children see their parents having sex. In the Trobriand Islands, Malinowski was told that parents took no special precautions to prevent their children from watching them having sex: they just scolded the child and told it to cover its head with a mat”

- UCLA Anthropologist, Jared Diamond

While extremely rare in tribal societies, privacy may, in fact, be instinctive. Evidence from tribal societies suggests that humans prefer to make love in solitude (In 9 of 12 societies where homes have separate bedrooms for parents, people prefer to have sex indoors. In those cultures without homes with separate rooms, sex is more often preferred outdoors).



However, in practice, the need for survival often eclipses the desire for privacy. For instance, among the modern North American Utku’s, a desire for solitude can seem profoundly rude:


“It dawned on me how forlorn I would be in the wildness if they forsook me. Far, far better to suffer loss of privacy”


- Anthropologist Jean Briggs, on being ostracized by her host Utku family, after daring to explore the wilderness alone for a day.

The big question: if privacy isn’t the norm, where did it start? Let’s start from the first cities:

Ancient Cities (6th Century B.C. - 4th Century AD)

Roman citizens engaged in conversation in a public restroom. Credit: A Day In The Life Of Ancient Rome

Like their tribal ancestors, the Greeks displayed some preference for privacy. And, unlike their primitive ancestors, the Greeks had the means to do something about it. University of Leicester’ Samantha Burke found that the Greeks used their sophisticated understanding of geometry to create housing with the mathematically minimum exposure to public view while maximizing available light.




Sightline analysis of maximum viewable space from the street. Burke (2000)

Related: Hidden Origins: Exposing Humanity's Ancient Secrets

However, Athenians penchant for solitude was not without its influential critics:


“For where men conceal their ways from one another in darkness rather than light, there no man will ever rightly gain either his due honour or office or the justice that is befitting”

-
Socrates

Athenian philosophy proved far more popular than their architecture. In Greece’s far less egalitarian successor, Rome, the landed gentry built their homes with wide open gardens. Turning one’s house into a public museum was an ostentatious display of wealth. Though, the rich seemed self-aware of their unfortunate trade-off:


“Great fortune has this characteristic, that it allows nothing to be concealed, nothing hidden; it opens up the homes of princes, and not only that but their bedrooms and intimate retreats, and it opens up and exposes to talk all the arcane secrets”

- Pliny the Elder, ‘The Natural History’, circa 77 A.D.

The majority of Romans lived in crowded apartments, with walls thin enough to hear every noise. “Think of Ancient Rome as a giant campground,” writes Angela Alberto in A Day in the life of Ancient Rome.

And, thanks to the Rome’s embrace of public sex, there was less of a motivation to make it taboo - especially considering the benefits.

Sex art, Pompeii

Related: The Truth About Sexuality In Ancient Greece And Rome


“Baths, drink and sex corrupt our bodies, but baths, drink and sex make life worth living”


- Graffi - Roman bath


Early Middle Ages (4th century AD-1,200 AD): Privacy As Isolation

Early Christian saints pioneered the modern concept of privacy: seclusion. The Christian Bible popularized the idea that morality was not just the outcome of an evil deed, but the intent to cause harm; this novel coupling of intent and morality led the most devout followers (monks) to remove themselves from society and focus obsessively on battling their inner demons free from the distractions of civilization.


“Just as fish die if they stay too long out of water, so the monks who loiter outside their cells or pass their time with men of the world lose the intensity of inner peace. So like a fish going towards the sea, we must hurry to reach our cell, for fear that if we delay outside we will lost our interior watchfulness”

- St Antony of Egypt

It is rumored that on the island monastery of Nitria, a monk died and was found 4 days later. Monks meditated in isolation in stone cubicles, known as “Beehive” huts.

Even before the collapse of ancient Rome in 4th century A.D., humanity was mostly a rural species

A stylized blueprint of the Lord Of The Rings-looking shire longhouses, which were popular for 1000 years, shows animals and humans sleeping under the same room - because, there was only one room.


“There was no classical or medieval latin word equivalent to ‘privacy’. privatio meant ‘a taking away’”

- Georges Duby, author, ‘A History Of Private Life: Revelations of the Medieval World’


Late Medieval / Early Renaissance (1300–1600)  -  The Foundation Of Privacy Is Built


“Privacy — the ultimate achievement of the renaissance”

- Historian Peter Smith

In 1215, the influential Fourth Council Of Lateran (the “Great Council”) declared that confessions should be mandatory for the masses. This mighty stroke of Catholic power instantly extended the concept of internal morality to much of Europe.

“The apparatus of moral governance was shifted inward, to a private space that no longer had anything to do with the community,” explained religious author, Peter Loy. Solitude had a powerful ally.

Fortunately for the church, some new technology would make quiet contemplation much less expensive: Guttenberg’s printing press.

Thanks to the printing presses invention after the Great Counsel’s decree, personal reading supercharged European individualism. Poets, artists, and theologians were encouraged in their pursuits of “abandoning the world in order to turn one’s heart with greater intensity toward God,” so recommended the influential canon of The Brethren of the Common Life.

To be sure, up until the 18th century, public readings were still commonplace, a tradition that extended until universal book ownership. Quiet study was an elite luxury for many centuries.

Citizens enjoy a public reading


The Architecture Of Privacy

Individual beds are a modern invention. As one of the most expensive items in the home, a single large bed became a place for social gatherings, where guests were invited to sleep with the entire family and some servants.

But, the uncleanness of urbanized life quickly caught up with the Europeans, when infectious diseases wiped out large swaths of newly crowded cities. The Black Death, alone, killed over 100 million people.

This profoundly changed hygiene attitudes, especially in hospitals, where it was once common for patients to sleep as close together as houseguests were accustomed to.


“Little children, both girls and boys, together in dangerous beds, upon which other patients died of contagious diseases, because there is no order and no private bed for the children, [who must] sleep six, eight, nine, ten, and twelve to a bed, at both head and foot”

- Notes of a nurse (circa 1500), lamenting the lack of modern medical procedures

Though, just because individual beds in hospitals were coming into vogue, it did not mean that sex was any more private. Witnessing the consummation of marriage was common for both spiritual and logistical reasons:


“Newlyweds climbed into bed before the eyes of family and friends and the next day exhibit the sheets as proof that the marriage had been consummated”

- Georges Duby, Editor, ‘A History of Private Life’

Few people demanded privacy while they slept because even separate beds wouldn’t have afforded them the luxury. Most homes only had one room. Architectural historians trace the origins of internal walls to the more basic human desire to be warm.

Below, in the video, is a Hollywood re-enactment of couples sleeping around the burning embers of a central fire pit, from the film, Beowulf. It’s a solid illustration of the grand hall open architecture that was pervasive before the popularization of internal walls circa 1,400 A.D.




Couples sleep around the warmth of a fire (clip from Beowulf)


“Firstly, I propose that there be a room common to all in the middle, and at its centre there shall be a fire, so that many more people can get round it and everyone can see the others faces when engaging in their amusements and storytelling” 

-  15th century Italian Architect, Sebastian Serlio

To disperse heat more efficiently without choking houseguests to death, fire-resistant chimney-like structures were built around central fire pits to reroute smoke outside. Below is an image of a “transitional” house during the 16th century period when back-to-back fireplaces broke up the traditional open hall architecture.

Housing Culture: Traditional Architecture In An English Landscape


“A profound change in the very blueprint of the living space”

- Historian Sarti Raffaella, on the introduction of the chimney.


Pre-Industrial Revolution (1600–1840)  -  The Home Becomes Private, Which Isn’t Very Private



The first recorded daily diary was composed by Lady Margaret Hoby, who lived just passed the 16th century. On February 4th, 1600, she writes that she retired “to my Closit, wher I praid and Writt some thinge for mine owne priuat Conscience’s”.

Cardinal Albrecht of Brandenburg in his study

By the renaissance, it was quite common for at least the wealthy to shelter themselves away in the home. Yet, even for those who could afford separate spaces, it was more logistically convenient to live in close quarters with servants and family.


“Having served in the capacity of manservant to his Excellency Marquis Francesco Albergati for the period of about eleven years, that I can say and give account that on three or four occasions I saw the said marquis getting out of bed with a perfect erection of the male organ”

- 1751, Servant of Albergati Capacelli, testifying in court that his master did not suffer from incontinence, thus rebutting his wife’s legal suit for annulment.


Law

It was just prior to the industrial revolution that citizens, for the first time, demanded that the law begin to keep pace with the evolving need for secret activities.

In this early handwritten note on August 20th, 1770, revolutionist and future President of the United States, John Adams, voiced his support for the concept of privacy.


“I am under no moral or other Obligation…to publish to the World how much my Expences or my Incomes amount to yearly.”



Despite some high-profile opposition, the first American Census was posted publicly, for logistics reasons, more than anything else.

Transparency was the best way to ensure every citizen could inspect it for accuracy.



Privacy-conscious citizen did find more traction with what would become perhaps America’s first privacy law, the 1710 Post Office Act, which banned sorting through the mail by postal employees.




“I’ll say no more on this head, but When I have the Pleasure to See you again, shall Inform you of many Things too tedious for a Letter and which perhaps may fall into Ill hands, for I know there are many at Boston who dont Scruple to Open any Persons letters, but they are well known here.”

- Dr. Oliver Noyes, lamenting the well-known fact that mail was often read.

This fact did not stop the mail’s popularity


Gilded Age: 1840–1950  - Privacy Becomes The Expectation


“Privacy is a distinctly modern product”

- E.L. Godkin, 1890



“In The Mirror, 1890” by Auguste Toulmouche

By the time the industrial revolution began serving up material wealth to the masses, officials began recognizing privacy as the default setting of human life.


“The material and moral well-being of workers depend, the health of the public, and the security of society depend on each family’s living in a separate, healthy, and convenient home, which it may purchase”

- Speaker at 1876 international hygiene congress in Brussels

For the poor, however, life was still very much on display. The famous 20th-century existentialist philosopher Jean Paul-Satre observed the poor streets of Naples:

Crowded apartment dwellers spill on to the streets


“The ground floor of every building contains a host of tiny rooms that open directly onto the street and each of these tiny rooms contains a family…

they drag tables and chairs out into the street or leave them on the threshold, half outside, half inside…outside is organically linked to inside…

yesterday i saw a mother and a father dining outdoors, while their baby slept in a crib next to the parents’ bed and an older daughter did her homework at another table by the light of a kerosene lantern…

if a woman falls ill and stays in bed all day, it’s open knowledge and everyone can see her.”

Insides of houses were no less cramped:


The “Right To Privacy“ Is Born

While architecture failed to keep up with society, it was during the Gilded Age that privacy was officially acknowledged as a political right.


“The intensity and complexity of life, attendant upon advancing civilization, have rendered necessary some retreat from the world, and man, under the refining influence of culture, has become more sensitive to publicity, so that solitude and privacy have become more essential to the individual; but modern enterprise and invention have, through invasions upon his privacy, subjected him to mental pain and distress, far greater than could be inflicted by mere bodily injury.”

- “The Right To Privacy” - December 15, 1890, Harvard Law Review

Interestingly enough, the right to privacy was justified on the very grounds for which it is now so popular: technology’s encroachment on personal information.

However, the father of the right to privacy and future Supreme Court Justice, Louis Brandeis, was ahead of his time. His seminal article did not get much press - and the press it did get wasn’t all that glowing.


"The feelings of these thin-skinned Americans are doubtless at the bottom of an article in the December number of the Harvard Law Review, in which two members of the Boston bar have recorded the results of certain researches into the question whether Americans do not possess a common-law right of privacy which can be successfully defended in the courts."

- Galveston Daily News on ‘The Right To Privacy’

Privacy had not helped America up to this point in history. Brazen invasions into the public’s personal communications had been instrumental in winning the Civil War.



A request For Wiretapping

This is a letter from the Secretary of War, Edwin Stanton, requesting broad authority over telegraph lines; Lincoln simply scribbled on the back “The Secretary of War has my authority to exercise his discretion in the matter within mentioned. A. LINCOLN.”

It wasn’t until the industry provoked the ire of a different president that information privacy was codified into law. President Grover Cleveland had a wife who was easy on the eyes. And, easy access to her face made it ideal for commercial purposes.



Related: Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe

The rampant use of President Grover Cleveland’s wife, Frances, on product advertisements, eventually led to the one of the nation’s first privacy laws. The New York legislature made it a penalty to use someone’s unauthorized likeness for commercial purposes in 1903, for a fine of up to $1,000.

Indeed, for most of the 19th century, privacy was practically upheld as a way of maintaining a man’s ownership over his wife’s public and private life  -  including physical abuse.


"We will not inflict upon society the greater evil of raising the curtain upon domestic privacy, to punish the lesser evil of trifling violence”

- 1868, State V. Rhodes, wherein the court decided the social costs of invading privacy was not greater than that of wife beating.



The Technology Of Individualism

The first 150 years of American life saw an explosion of information technology, from the postcard to the telephone. As each new communication method gave a chance to peek at the private lives of strangers and neighbors, Americans often (reluctantly) chose whichever technology was either cheaper or more convenient.

Privacy was a secondary concern.




"There is a lady who conducts her entire correspondence through this channel. She reveals secrets supposed to be the most pro- found, relates misdemeanors and indiscretions with a reckless disregard of the consequences. Her confidence is unbounded in the integrity of postmen and bell-boys, while the latter may be seen any morning, sitting on the doorsteps of apartment houses, making merry over the post-card correspondence.”

- Editor, the Atlantic Monthly, on Americas of love of postcards, 1905

Even though postcards were far less private, they were convenient. More than 200,000 postcards were ordered in the first two hours they were offered in New York City, on May 15, 1873.


The next big advance in information technology, the telephone, was a wild success in the early 20th century. However, individual telephone lines were prohibitively expensive; instead, neighbors shared one line, known as “party lines.” Commercial ads urged neighbors to use the shared technology with “courtesy”.

But, as this comic shows, it was common to eavesdrop.



Related: The Surveillance State: How To Disappear & It’s Why Big Tech Is Watching You: How You Spend Your Money Reveals Parts Of Your Personality, And Vice Versa


“Party lines could destroy relationships…if you were dating someone on the party line and got a call from another girl, well, the jig was up.

Five minutes after you hung up, everybody in the neighborho -  including your girlfriend  -  knew about the call. In fact, there were times when the girlfriend butted in and chewed both the caller and the callee out. Watch what you say.”


- Author, Donnie Johnson



Where convenience and privacy found a happy co-existence, individualized gadgets flourished. Listening was not always an individual act. The sheer fact that audio was a form of broadcast made listening to conversations and music a social activity.

This all changed with the invention of the headphone.

“The triumph of headphones is that they create, in a public space, an oasis of privacy”~ The Atlantic’s libertarian columnist, Derek Thompson.



Related: It's Official: This Is Straight Out Of Orwell's 1984...


Late 20th Century  - Fear Of A World Without Privacy

By the 60's, individualized phones, rooms, and homes became the norm. 100 years earlier, when Lincoln tapped all telegraph lines, few raised any questions. In the new century, invasive surveillance would bring down Lincoln’s distant successor, even though his spying was far less pervasive.

Upon entering office, the former Vice-President assured the American people that their privacy was safe.


“As Vice President, I addressed myself to the individual rights of Americans in the area of privacy…

There will be no illegal tappings, eavesdropping, bugging, or break-ins in my administration.

There will be hot pursuit of tough laws to prevent illegal invasions of privacy in both government and private activities.”

- Gerald Ford


Justice Brandeis Had Finally Won


2,000 A.D. And Beyond  - A Grand Reversal

In the early 2,000s, young consumers were willing to purchase a location tracking feature that was once the stuff of 1984 nightmares.


“The magic age is people born after 1981…

That’s the cut-off for us where we see a big change in privacy settings and user acceptance.”

- Loopt Co-Founder Sam Altman, who pioneered paid geo-location features.

 


The older generations’ fear of transparency became a subject of mockery.


“My grandma always reminds me to turn my GPS off a few blocks before I get home “so that the man giving me directions doesn’t know where I live.”

- A letter to the editor of College Humor’s “Parents Just Don’t Understand” series.

Increased urban density and skyrocketing rents in the major cities has put pressure on communal living.



A co-living space in San Francisco / Source: Sarah Buhr, TechCrunch


“We’re seeing a shift in consciousness from hyper-individualistic to more cooperative spaces…

We have a vision to raise our families together.”


- Jordan Aleja Grader, San Francisco resident

At the more extreme ends, a new crop of so-called “life bloggers” publicize intimate details about their days:

Blogger Robert Scoble takes A picture with Google Glass in the shower

At the edges of transparency and pornography, anonymous exhibitionism finds a home on the web, at the wildly popular content aggregator, Reddit, in the aptly titled community “Gone Wild”.


Section II: How Privacy Will Again Fade Away

For 3,000 years, most people have been perfectly willing to trade privacy for convenience, wealth or fame. It appears this is still true today.

AT&T recently rolled out a discounted broadband internet service, where customers could pay a mere $30 more a month to not have their browsing behavior tracked online for ad targeting.


“Since we began offering the service more than a year ago the vast majority have elected to opt-in to the ad-supported model.”

- AT&T spokeswoman Gretchen Schultz (personal communication)

Performance artist Risa Puno managed to get almost half the attendees at an Brooklyn arts festival to trade their private data (image, fingerprints, or social security number) for a delicious cinnamon cookie. Some even proudly tweeted it out.

Tourists on Hollywood Blvd willing gave away their passwords to on live TV for a split-second of TV fame on Jimmy Kimmel Live.




Even for holdouts, the costs of privacy may be too great to bear. With the advance of cutting-edge health technologies, withholding sensitive data may mean a painful, early death.

For instance, researchers have already discovered that if patients of the deadly Vioxx drug had shared their health information publicly, statisticians could have detected the side effects earlier enough to save 25,000 lives.

As a result, Google’s Larry Page has embarked on a project to get more users to share their private health information with the academic research community. While Page told a crowd at the TED conference in 2013 that he believe such information can remain anonymous, statisticians are doubtful.


“We have been pretending that by removing enough information from databases that we can make people anonymous. We have been promising privacy, and this paper demonstrates that for a certain percent of a population, those promises are empty.”

- John Wilbanks of Sage Bionetworks, on a new academic paper that identified anonymous donors to a genetics database, based on public information

Speaking as a statistician, it is quite easy to identify people in anonymous datasets. There are only so many 5'4" jews living in San Francisco with chronic back pain. Every bit of information we reveal about ourselves will be one more disease that we can track, and another life saved.

If I want to know whether I will suffer a heart attack, I will have to release my data for public research. In the end, privacy will be an early death sentence.

Already, health insurers are beginning to offer discounts for people who wear health trackers and let others analyze their personal movements. Many, if not most, consumers in the next generation will choose cash and a longer life in exchange for publicizing their most intimate details.

What can we tell with basic health information, such as calories burned throughout the day? Pretty much everything.

With a rudimentary step and calorie counter, I was able to distinguish whether I was having sex or at the gym, since the minute-by-minute calorie burn profile of sex is quite distinct (the image below from my health tracker shows lots of energy expended at the beginning and end, with few steps taken. Few activities besides sex have this distinct shape)

My late-night horizontal romp, as measured by calories burned per minute

More advanced health monitors used by insurers are coming, like embedded sensors in skin and clothes that detect stress and concentration. The markers of an early heart attack or dementia will be the same that correspond to an argument with a spouse or if an employee is dozing off at work.

No behavior will escape categorization - which will give us unprecedented superpowers to extend healthy life. Opting out of this tracking - if it is even possib - will mean an early death and extremely pricey health insurance for many.

If history is a guide, the costs and convenience of radical transparency will once again take us back to our roots as a species that could not even conceive of a world with privacy.

Related: The Transhumanist Agenda And The [Attempted] Future Of Humanity


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Fifth Estate Casts Its Shadow Like a Massive Mothership
January 4 2024 | From: CosmicConvergence / Various

Before Long the Mainstream Media Will be History.



“Big Mother is watching Big Brother!” The biggest story on planet Earth has gone virtually unnoticed.

Related: Mainstream Media Is Trying Hard To Convince Us That “Plandemic” Is A “Conspiracy Theory” + The New Normal

It is now common knowledge that whoever controls the media effectively controls the world.

Those who do control the entire planetary realm are only able to do so because they have controlled the mainstream media for as long as it has been in existence.

This ironclad control has enabled the World Shadow Government to exert power over the flow of information throughout every sphere of life for centuries.

In fact, it is the Fourth Estate that holds the true power over the other three. Only by the power of the press is the WSG able to keep the governments and corporations of the world in check.


A New Era Dawns

Since the advent of the Internet in 1995, the Fifth Estate has been growing by the day. It has taken over 20+ years for it to finally come into its own. People have finally had enough of the mainstream media horseshit.



Related: Four Words: Weapons Of Media Lies & When Corporate Power Is Your Real Government, Corporate Media Is State Media

2020 will one day be reflected upon as the year when the Fifth Estate became a force unto itself
, so much so that it affected the outcome of this year’s U.S. presidential election.

The silent majority began to awaken and there was nothing that the mainstream media couold do about it except ignore and lie. But that charade can only run out for so long...

As the truth unfolds about the unprecedented voting fraud that has taken place with the US (and other) elections in the coming days and weeks - the entire world is going to be in shock.

No one has ever seen anything like it. And currently the world still finds itself steeped in the depths of a contrived 'pandemic', there were millions of young adults out of work.

Many of them lived at home with mom and dad and with very few possessions except a smartphone or a tablet, a laptop or a desktop.



Related: Astroturf and manipulation of media messages

It is in this environment that the citizen journalist has been born. They are by and large unemployed, bored and angry that the American Dream has eluded them. Some of them believe that the dream has become an “American nightmare” and want to know why.

As they seek answers to this inquiry, they are stumbling upon long-hidden truths that have made them deeply distrust the mainstream media (MSM)…with a vengeance.


"The MSM is comprised not only of all print, video and audio forms of media but also book publishing, movie production, music production, TV programming, social networks among others."

So here’s the current context: While the banksters bankrupted the USA in order to swell the ranks of the jobless and unemployed, especially among the youth who they intended to fight their unlawful and unprovoked wars of aggression around the world, something unexpected happened.  

The banksters unwittingly created an army of writers and bloggers, e-book authors and essayists, Facebook posters and Twitter tweeters, YouTube video producers and Instagram photojournalists.

Related: Whoever Controls The Media Controls The World

What else was there to post about that year but the exceedingly dramatic 2016 presidential election, as well as the coming Second American Revolution. No matter what side of the fence these folks are on, they are busier than if they had a 9 to 5 with the local corporation.

And they’re loving every minute of it because they are learning how the world really works. And, why they really had no job… or even a prospect of a job.


The Rise of the Citizen Journalist

The Internet is the place where many will find their future job. Not the one working for a Fortune 500 corporation; rather, a real job that will assist with the transformation of post-modern society.  

As these young Internet practitioners expand their skill sets, deepen their knowledge base, and broaden their experience, they have quickly acquired the right stuff to function as a one-person, multi-media platform.

This single development has contributed significantly to the rapid establishment of the Fifth Estate.

As a matter of fact, the now defunct specialty of investigative journalism has seen a massive rebound. These young journalists have no advertisers to appease and can therefore go after whatever they choose to investigate.

Bloggers and videographers are tearing up the terrain with their incisive blogs and documentaries, respectively.  

Related: Who Will Tell the Truth About the So-Called ‘Free Press’?

Upstart authors are now writing Pulitzer Prize level reports and series on topics ranging from the Holocaust Industry to the rigged 2016 U.S. presidential election, from the US Government-coordinated terrorist attacks on 9/11 to the CIA-conducted assassination of John F. Kennedy.

These citizen journalists all share one thing, and that is a passion for the truth.  

They see a world in total disarray and are desperately trying to make some sense of it. In their ardent search for the truth they unwittingly find themselves becoming world-class journalists. And it is only their pursuit of the truth that has set them free from the ranks of the unemployed.

Not only do many these folks now have control of their destiny, they are not bound to a corporate agenda like their parents and grandparents were.

Nor are they bound to the conventions of traditional, university taught journalism that keeps their MSM peers in a tighly controlled box. They are free to think for themselves and to follow the truth wherever it leads them.



Four Horsemen - an award winning independent feature documentary which lifts the lid on how the world really works

Related:
BBC Journalist Exposes The Dark Side Of The Media

Such a liberation of genuinely creative energy has created a supernova in the firmament of worldwide media.  So many young journalists have been born into their Internet-based profession that there is now a crowded field of competition to be dealt with.  

This has forced many into various specialty niches which has posed a real threat to the MSM journalists who are now primarily generalists because of the severe budget cuts over several years throughout that industry.


“The Truth Shall Set You Free”

The MSM is soon to be overwhelmed by the Alt-Media. Little did the controllers of this planetary realm know that one day - in the not-too-distant future - they will see a world transformed by the vast number of truth-speakers and fact-writers who they helped create.

The readership and viewership of the Alt-Media will be filled with billions of souls who are likewise truth-seekers who know that the MSM is positively not the place to find it.

Truly, this rapidly evolving saga is “The Greatest Show on Earth” at this very moment in time. It is a global drama of such epic proportions that soon the entire planetary civilization will have gone through an unparalleled metamorphosis.  

For as We the People find our voices and put our pens to paper and take to our keypads to speak truth to power, so, too, will the peoples of the world.

Related: There Is No Such Thing as a Free Press

When the Alt-Media becomes an echo chamber of truth that replaces the MSM echo chamber of falsehood, the world will have taken a great leap forward toward the restoration of both personal and national sovereignty. It is only in this global context that the world community of nations will experience a durable peace and genuine brotherhood.

Then, many things like political integrity and social equality, economic stability and financial security, religious tolerance and racial respect, civil justice and environmental protection, will all occur naturally and spontaneously.

These are only some of the ways that “The Truth Shall Set You Free”.


The Mothership

There is a very powerful and fast-growing movement afoot that identifies with the meme of the Mothership. One of the various tag lines of this extraordinary phenomenon, that is quietly manifesting under the radar, is this:

BIG MOTHER is watching Big Brother!”

For the uninitiated, the emerging Fifth Estate is BIG MOTHER. The slowly dying Fourth Estate is Big Brother. There is no question that the tide is gradually changing. And, that the traditional control of information is being altered in profound and fundamental ways.

Hence, it is only a matter of time - a relatively short period of time - that a veritable sea change will occur on planet Earth. That moment of highly anticipated change will transpire when the Mothership appears to everyone in all its glory.

Think of it this way:  Were a massive Mothership to slowly glide across the sky over New York City… and then Washington, DC… and then Miami, Florida, on the very same day, would not the whole order change in a day and a night?!  



Related: Presstitute Media Collapsing Under the Weight of its Lies

The Alt-Media is like a Mothership that is slowly approaching Earth as it disseminates forbidden truth and lost information, deep wisdom and esoteric knowledge across the entire planetary realm.

Then, one day, when nary a soul expects it, looming over the horizon, is this inconceivably enormous Mothership casting a shadow the size of a solar eclipse. Imagine that out of that Mothership comes darting a multitude of smaller starships, each one carrying a payload of truth and banner of justice.  

More than likely every reader of this post has already contributed to this Project Multi-Media Mothership.

If you have a simple blog or a Facebook page, a website or a Twitter feed, a YouTube channel or an Instagram account, you have already set loose your starship into the skies of planet Earth via the World Wide Web.


Conclusion

It’s time for every truth-seeker to get on board the Mothership.

You have been baptized into the Fifth Estate. Please do not take your responsibilities lightly, you just may be the one who everyone is waiting for to post that vital piece that finally takes the whole God-forsaken System down, once and for all!



Remember, from this point forward, it is BIG MOTHER who will be watching Big Brother.

Related: The Multi-Media Mothership Platform: Beta Version


Related Articles:

A Country Without An Honest Media Is Lost: The Largest Conspiracy Theory Peddlers Are Mainstream Media And The US State Department

Six Ways To Break The Hypnotic Spell Of The Mainstream Media

CBS Reporter Calls Mainstream Press ‘Political Activists,’ ‘Propagandists’ + Max Blumental Proves Western Media A Propagandist For War Criminals

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

Sharyl Attkisson: How Media Narratives Became More Important Than Facts & Every Nation Must Declare War Against Big Tech

Obamagate Is Not A Conspiracy Theory & Disinformation From Schiff, Media Damaged America

How To Stop The Media From Controlling Your Mind + Why The ‘Red Pill’ Has Become So Big

People’s Skepticism About Covid-19 Is The Fault Of The Lying Mass Media & A Personal Take On Covid-19 “Conspiracy Theories”

COVID-19 Lockdown: A Global Human Experiment & Ten Years Ago The World Health Organisation Faked A Pandemic

Sinclair's script for stations

50 Facts Illustrating Mainstream Media’s Relationship With The US Government

Rachel Maddow Called Out By WaPo Columnist For Shamelessly Peddling Fake News

Who REALLY Controls The Mainstream Media?

Google, Corporate Press Launch Attack On Alternative Media

This Review of “Ford v Ferrari” Reflects the Absurdity of Movie Critics Today

Gabbard and Trump Jr. Change America’s View of The View


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Is Psychiatry Bullshit? + Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School
January 3 2024 | From: Sott / GlobalResearch / Various

Some Psychiatrists View The Chemical-Imbalance Theory As A Well-Meaning Lie.



In the current issue of the journal Ethical Human Psychology and Psychiatry, Australian dissident psychiatrist Niall McLaren titles his article, "Psychiatry as Bullshit" and makes a case for just that.

Related: The Myth Of Mental Illness: Psychiatry Is A Fraud And It Is All About Control + “Opposition Defiant Disorder” - Non-Conformity And Anti-Authoritarianism Now Considered An Illness

The great controversies in psychiatry are no longer about its chemical-imbalance theory of mental illness or its DSM diagnostic system, both of which have now been declared invalid even by the pillars of the psychiatry establishment.

In 2011, Ronald Pies, editor-in-chief emeritus of the Psychiatric Times, stated;


In truth, the 'chemical imbalance' notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists."

And in 2013, Thomas Insel, then director of the National Institute of Mental Health, offered a harsh rebuke of the DSM, announcing that because the DSM diagnostic system lacks validity, the: "NIMH will be re-orienting its research away from DSM categories."

So, the great controversy today has now become just how psychiatry can be most fairly characterized given its record of being proven wrong about virtually all of its assertions, most notably its classifications of behaviors, theories of "mental illness" and treatment effectiveness/adverse effects.

Among critics, one of the gentlest characterizations of psychiatry is a "false narrative," the phrase used by investigative reporter Robert Whitaker (who won the 2010 Investigative Reporters and Editors Book Award for Anatomy of an Epidemic) to describe the story told by the psychiatrists' guild American Psychiatric Association.

In "Psychiatry as Bullshit," McLaren begins by considering several different categories of "nonscience with scientific pretensions," such as "pseudoscience" and "scientific fraud."

"Pseudoscience" is commonly defined as a collection of beliefs and practices promulgated as scientific but in reality mistakenly regarded as being based on scientific method. The NIMH director ultimately rejected the DSM because of its lack of validity, which is crucial to the scientific method.



In the DSM, psychiatric illnesses are created by an APA committee, 69 percent of whom have financial ties to Big Pharma.

The criteria for DSM illness are not objective biological ones but non-scientific subjective ones (which is why homosexuality was a DSM mental illness until the early 1970s).

Besides lack of scientific validity, the DSM lacks scientific reliability, as clinicians routinely disagree on diagnoses because patients act differently in different circumstances and because of the subjective nature of the criteria.

"Fraud" is a misrepresentation, a deception intended for personal gain, and implies an intention to deceive others of the truth - or "lying." Drug companies, including those that manufacture psychiatric drugs, have been convicted of fraud, as have high-profile psychiatrists (as well as other doctors).

Human rights activist and attorney Jim Gottstein offers an argument as to why the APA is a "fraudulent enterprise"; however, the APA has not been legally convicted of fraud.

To best characterize psychiatry, McLaren considers the category of "bullshit," invoking philosopher Harry Frankfurt's 1986 journal article "On Bullshit" (which became a New York Times bestselling book in 2005).



Defining Bullshit

What is the essence of bullshit? For Frankfurt, "This lack of connection to a concern with truth - this indifference to how things really are - that I regard as of the essence of bullshit."

Frankfurt devotes a good deal of On Bullshit to differentiating between a liar and a bullshitter. Both the liar and the bullshitter misrepresent themselves, representing themselves as attempting to be honest and truthful. But there is a difference between the liar and the bullshitter.



Related: Why Nutritional Psychiatry Is The Future Of Mental Health Treatment + Depression Is A Symptom Of Nutrient Deficiency; Treating It With Drugs Is Not Only Ineffective But Dangerous

The liar knows the truth, and the liar's goal is to conceal it.

The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda. So, bullshitters are committed to neither truths nor untruths, uncommitted to neither facts nor fiction. It's actually not in bullshitters' interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge can hinder their capacity to bullshit.

Frankfurt tells us that liar the hides that he or she is "attempting to lead us away from a correct apprehension of reality." In contrast, the bullshitter hides that "the truth-values of his statements are of no central interest to him."



Are Psychiatrists Bullshitters?

Recall establishment psychiatrist Pies' assertion:


In truth, the 'chemical imbalance' notion was always a kind of urban legend - never a theory seriously propounded by well-informed psychiatrists."

What Pies omits is the reality that the vast majority of psychiatrists have been promulgating this theory. Were they liars or simply not well-informed? And if not well-informed, were they purposely not well-informed?


If one wants to bullshit oneself and the general public that psychiatry is a genuinely scientific medical specialty, there's a great incentive to be unconcerned with the truth or falseness of the chemical imbalance theory of depression.

Bullshitters immediately recognize how powerful this chemical imbalance notion is in gaining prestige for their profession and themselves as well as making their job both more lucrative and easier, increasing patient volume by turning virtually all patient visits into quick prescribing ones.

Prior to the chemical imbalance bullshit campaign, most Americans were reluctant to take antidepressants - or to give them to their children.



Related: Big Pharma Caught Manipulating Antidepressant Drug Trials Putting Teenagers in Grave Danger

But the idea that depression is caused by a chemical imbalance that can be corrected with Prozac, Paxil, Zoloft and selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor antidepressants sounded like taking insulin for diabetes.

Correcting a chemical imbalance seemed like a reasonable thing to do, and so the use of SSRI antidepressants skyrocketed.

In 2012, National Public Radio correspondent Alix Spiegel began her piece about the disproven chemical imbalance theory with the following personal story about being prescribed Prozac when she was a depressed teenager:



My parents took me to a psychiatrist at Johns Hopkins Hospital. She did an evaluation and then told me this story: "The problem with you," she explained, "is that you have a chemical imbalance. It's biological, just like diabetes, but it's in your brain.

This chemical in your brain called serotonin is too, too low. There's not enough of it, and that's what's causing the chemical imbalance. We need to give you medication to correct that." Then she handed my mother a prescription for Prozac. "



Related: 7 Facts About Depression That Will Blow You Away

When Spiegel discovered that the chemical imbalance theory was untrue, she sought to discover why this truth had been covered up, and so she interviewed researchers who knew the truth.

Alan Frazer, professor of pharmacology and psychiatry and chairman of the pharmacology department at the University of Texas Health Sciences Center, told Spiegel that by framing depression as a deficiency - something that needed to be returned to normal - patients felt more comfortable taking antidepressants.

Frazer stated;



“If there was this biological reason for them being depressed, some deficiency that the drug was correcting, then taking a drug was OK."

For Frazer, the story that depressed people have a chemical imbalance enabled many people to come out of the closet about being depressed.

Frazer's rationale reminds us of Edward Herman and Noam Chomsky's book Manufacturing Consent, the title deriving from presidential adviser and journalist Walter Lippmann's phrase "the manufacture of consent" - a necessity for Lippmann, who believed that the general public is incompetent in discerning what's truly best for them, and so their opinion must be molded by a benevolent elite who does know what's best for them.



There are some psychiatrists who view the chemical imbalance theory as a well-meaning lie by a benevolent elite to ensure resistant patients do what is best for them, but my experience is that there are actually extremely few such "well-meaning liars." Most simply don't know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.

I believe McLaren is correct in concluding that the vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction. Most psychiatrists would certainly have been happy if the chemical-imbalance theory was true but obviously have not needed it to be true in order to promulgate it.

For truth seekers, the falseness of the chemical imbalance theory has been easily available, but most psychiatrists have not been truth seekers.

It is not in the bullshitters' interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion. Simply put, a commitment to the truth hinders the capacity to bullshit.


About the Author

Bruce E. Levine is a practicing clinical psychologist. His latest book is Get Up, Stand Up: Uniting Populists, Energizing the Defeated, and Battling the Corporate Elite.


Psychotropic Drugs, Are They Safe?

Fourteen Lies That Our Psychiatry Professors Taught Us In Medical School.




Myth # 1:

“The FDA (US Food and Drug Administration) tests all new psychiatric drugs”

False. Actually the FDA only reviews studies that were designed, administered, secretly performed and paid for by the multinational profit-driven drug companies.

The studies are frequently farmed out by the pharmaceutical companies by well-paid research firms, in whose interest it is to find positive results for their corporate employers. Unsurprisingly, such research policies virtually guarantee fraudulent results.

Myth # 2:

“FDA approval means that a psychotropic drug is effective long-term”

False. Actually, FDA approval doesn’t even mean that psychiatric drugs have been proven to be safe – either short-term or long-term! The notion that FDA approval means that a psych drug has been proven to be effective is also a false one, for most such drugs are never tested – prior to marketing – for longer than a few months (and most psych patients take their drugs for years).

The pharmaceutical industry pays many psychiatric “researchers” – often academic psychiatrists (with east access to compliant, chronic, already drugged-up patients) who have financial or professional conflicts of interest – some of them even sitting on FDA advisory committees who attempt to “fast track” psych drugs through the approval process.



For each new drug application, the FDA only receives 1 or 2 of the “best” studies (out of many) that purport to show short-term effectiveness. The negative studies are shelved and not revealed to the FDA. In the case of the SSRI drugs, animal lab studies typically lasted only hours, days or weeks and the human clinical studies only lasted, on average, 4- 6 weeks, far too short to draw any valid conclusions about long-term effectiveness or safety!

Hence the FDA, prescribing physicians and patient-victims should not have been “surprised” by the resulting epidemic of SSRI drug-induced adverse reactions that are silently plaguing the people.

Indeed, many SSRI trials have shown that those drugs are barely more effective than placebo (albeit statistically significant!) with unaffordable economic costs and serious health risks, some of which are life-threatening and known to be capable of causing brain damage.



Myth # 3:

“FDA approval means that a psychotropic drug is safe long-term”

False. Actually, the SSRIs and the “anti-psychotic” drugs are usually tested in human trials for only a couple of months before being granted marketing approval by the FDA. And the drug companies are only required to report 1 or 2 studies (even if many other studies on the same drug showed negative, even disastrous, results).

Drug companies obviously prefer that the black box and fine print warnings associated with their drugs are ignored by both consumers and prescribers. One only has to note how small the print is on the commercials.



Related: Key Factors To Overcoming Depression Without Drugs

In our fast-paced shop-until-you-drop consumer society, we super-busy prescribing physicians and physician assistants have never been fully aware of the multitude of dangerous, potentially fatal adverse psych drug effects that include addiction, mania, psychosis, suicidality, worsening depression, worsening anxiety, insomnia, akathisia, brain damage, dementia, homicidality, violence, etc, etc.

But when was the last time anybody heard the FDA or Big Pharma apologize for the damage they did in the past?

And when was the last time there were significant punishments (other than writs slaps and “chump change” multimillion dollar fines) or prison time for the CEOs of the guilty multibillion dollar drug companies?



Myth # 4:

“Mental ‘illnesses’ are caused by ‘brain chemistry imbalances’”

False. In actuality, brain chemical/neurotransmitter imbalances have never been proven to exist (except for cases of neurotransmitter depletions caused by psych drugs) despite vigorous examinations of lab animal or autopsied human brains and brain slices by neuroscientist s who were employed by well-funded drug companies.

Knowing that there are over 100 known neurotransmitter systems in the human brain, proposing a theoretical chemical ”imbalance” is laughable and flies in the face of science.



Related: Low-Serotonin Depression Theory Challenged

Not only that, but if there was an imbalance between any two of the 100 potential systems (impossible to prove), a drug – that has never been tested on more than a handful of them – could never be expected to re-balance it!

Such simplistic theories have been perpetrated by Big Pharma upon a gullible public and a gullible psychiatric industry because corporations that want to sell the public on their unnecessary products know that they have to resort to 20 second sound bite-type propaganda to convince patients and prescribing practitioners why they should be taking or prescribing synthetic, brain-altering drugs that haven’t been adequately tested.


Myth # 5:

“Antidepressant drugs work like insulin for diabetics”

False. This laughingly simplistic – and very anti-scientific – explanation for the use of dangerous and addictive synthetic drugs is patently absurd and physicians and patients who believe it should be ashamed of themselves for falling for it.

There is such a thing as an insulin deficiency (but only in type 1 diabetes) but there is no such thing as a Prozac deficiency.

SSRIs (so-called Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors – an intentional mis-representation because those drugs are NOT selective!) do not raise total brain serotonin.

Rather, SSRIs actually deplete serotonin long-term while only “goosing” serotonin release at the synapse level while at the same time interfere with the storage, reuse and re-cycling of serotonin (by its “serotonin reuptake inhibition” function).

(Parenthetically, the distorted “illogic” of the insulin/diabetes comparison above could legitimately be made in the case of the amino acid brain nutrient tryptophan, which is the precursor molecule of the important natural neurotransmitter serotonin.

If a serotonin deficiency or “imbalance” could be proven, the only logical treatment approach would be to supplement the diet with the serotonin precursor tryptophan rather than inflict upon the brain a brain-altering synthetic chemical that actually depletes serotonin long-term!



Myth # 6:

“SSRI ‘discontinuation syndromes’ are different than ‘withdrawal syndromes’”

False. The SSRI “antidepressant” drugs are indeed dependency-inducing/addictive and the neurological and psychological symptoms that occur when these drugs are stopped or tapered down are not “relapses” into a previous ”mental disorder” - as has been commonly asserted - but are actually new drug withdrawal symptoms that are different from those that prompted the original diagnosis

The term “discontinuation syndrome” is part of a cunningly-designed conspiracy that was plotted in secret by members of the psychopharmaceutical industryin order to deceive physicians into thinking that these drugs are not addictive.



Related: Dr. Kelly Brogan's Takedown Of Big Pharma's SSRI Anti-Depressant Drug Lies Hits Bestseller Lists

The deception has been shamelessly promoted to distract attention from the proven fact that most psych drugs are dependency-inducing and are therefore likely to cause “discontinuation/withdrawal symptoms” when they are stopped.

The drug industry knows that most people do not want to swallow dependency-inducing drugs that are likely to cause painful, even lethal withdrawal symptoms when they cut down the dose of the drug.



Myth # 7:

“Ritalin is safe for children (or adults)”

False. In actuality, methylphenidate (= Ritalin, Concerta, Daytrana, Metadate and Methylin; aka “kiddie cocaine”), a dopamine reuptake inhibitor drug, works exactly like cocaine on dopamine synapses, except that orally-dosed methylphenidate reaches the brain more slowly than snortable or smoked cocaine does.



Related: Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist

Therefore the oral form has less of an orgasmic “high” than cocaine.

Cocaine addicts actually prefer Ritalin if they can get it in a relatively pure powder form.

When snorted, the synthetic Ritalin (as opposed to the naturally-occurring, and therefore more easily metabolically-degraded cocaine) has the same onset of action but, predictably, has a longer lasting “high” and is thus preferred among addicted individuals.

The molecular structures of Ritalin and cocaine both have amphetamine base structures with ring-shaped side chains which, when examined side by side, are remarkably similar. The dopamine synaptic organelles in the brain (and heart, blood vessels, lungs and guts) are unlikely to sense any difference between the two drugs.



Myth # 8:

“Psychoactive drugs are totally safe for humans”

False. See Myth # 3 above. Actually all five classes of psychotropic drugs have, with long-term use, been found to be neurotoxic (ie, known to destroy or otherwise alter the physiology, chemistry, anatomy and viability of vital energy-producing mitochondria in every brain cell and nerve). They are therefore all capable of contributing to dementia when used long-term.



Related: The Shocking Truth About Antidepressant Drug Studies + Peter Breggin MD: How Do Psychiatric Drugs Really Work?

Any synthetic chemical that is capable of crossing the blood-brain barrier into the brain can alter and disable the brain. Synthetic chemical drugs are NOT capable of healing brain dysfunction, curing malnutrition or reversing brain damage.

Rather than curing anything, psychiatric drugs are only capable of masking symptoms while the abnormal emotional, neurological or malnutritional processes that mimic “mental illnesses” continue unabated.



Myth # 9:

“Mental ‘illnesses’ have no known cause”

False. The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual (DSM, published by the American Psychiatric Association, is pejoratively called “the psychiatric bible and billing book” for psychiatrists.

Despite its name, it actually has no statistics in it, and, of the 374 psychiatric diagnoses in the DSM-IV (there is now a 5th edition) there seem to be only two that emphasize known root causes.

Those two diagnoses are Posttraumatic Stress Disorder and Acute Stress Disorder. The DSM-V has been roundly condemned as being just another book that laughingly pathologizes a few more normal human emotions and behaviors.

In my decade of work as an independent holistic mental health care practitioner, I was virtually always able to detect many of the multiple root causes and contributing factors that easily explained the signs, symptoms and behaviors that had resulted in a perplexing number of false diagnoses of “mental illness of unknown origin”.

Many of my patients had been made worse by being hastily diagnosed, hastily drugged, bullied, demeaned, malnourished, incarcerated, electroshocked (often against their wills and/or without fully informed consent).

My patients had been frequently rendered unemployable or even permanently disabled as a result – all because temporary, potentially reversible, and therefore emotional stressors had not been recognized at the onset.



Because of the reliance on drugs, many of my patients had been made incurable by not having been referred to compassionate practitioners who practiced high quality, non-drug-based, potentially curable psychotherapy.

The root causes of my patient’s understandable emotional distress were typically multiple, although sometimes a single trauma, such as a rape, violent assault or a psychological trauma in the military would cause an otherwise normally-developing individual to decompensate.

But the vast majority of my patients had experienced easily identifiable chronic sexual, physical, psychological, emotional and/or spiritual traumas as root causes – often accompanied by hopelessness, sleep deprivation, serious emotional or physical neglect and brain nutrient deficiencies as well.

The only way that I could obtain this critically important information was through the use of thorough, compassionate (and, unfortunately, time-consuming) investigation into the patient’s complete history, starting with prenatal, maternal, infant and childhood exposures to toxins (including vaccines) and continuing into the vitally important adolescent medical history (all periods when the patient’s brain was rapidly developing).

My clinical experience proved to me that if enough high quality time was spent with the patient and if enough hard work was exerted looking for root causes, the patient’s predicament could usually be clarified and the erroneous past labels (of “mental illnesses of unknown origin”) could be thrown out.

Such efforts were often tremendously therapeutic for my patients, who up to that time had been made to feel guilty, ashamed or hopeless by previous therapists.

In my experience, most mental ill health syndromes represented identifiable, albeit serious emotional de-compensation due to temporarily overwhelming crisis situations linked to traumatic, frightening, torturous, neglectful and soul-destroying life experiences.

My practice consisted mostly of patients who knew for certain that they were being sickened by months or years of swallowing one or more brain-altering, addictive prescription drugs that they couldn’t get off of by themselves.

I discovered that many of them could have been cured early on in their lives if they only had access – and could afford – compassionate psychoeducational psychotherapy, proper brain nutrition and help with addressing issues of deprivation, parental neglect/abuse, poverty and other destructive psychosocial situations.



Related: Officials Declare ‘Eating Healthy’ A “Mental Disorder”

I came to the sobering realization that many of my patients could have been cured years earlier if it hadn’t been for the disabling effects of psychiatric drug regimens, isolation, loneliness, punitive incarcerations, solitary confinement, discrimination, malnutrition, and/or electroshock.

The neurotoxic and brain-disabling drugs, vaccines and frankenfoods that most of my patients had been given early on had started them on the road to chronicity and disability.



Myth # 10:

“Psychotropic drugs have nothing to do with the huge increase in disabled and unemployable American psychiatric patients”

False. See Myths # 2 and # 3 above. In actuality recent studies have shown that the major cause of permanent disability in the “mentally ill” is the long-term, high dosage and/or use of multiple neurotoxic psych drugs – any combination of which, as noted above, has never been adequately tested for safety even in animal labs.



Related: Neuroscientist Shows What Fasting Does To Your Brain & Why Big Pharma Won’t Study It

Many commonly-prescribed drugs are fully capable of causing brain-damage long-term, especially the anti-psychotics (aka, “major tranquilizers”) like Thorazine, Haldol, Prolixin, Clozapine, Abilify, Clozapine, Fanapt, Geodon, Invega, Risperdal, Saphris, Seroquel and Zyprexa, all of which can cause brain shrinkage that is commonly seen on the MRI scans of anti-psychotic drug-treated, so-called schizophrenics – commonly pointed out as “proof” that schizophrenia is an anatomic brain disorder that causes the brain to shrink! (Incidentally, patients who had been on antipsychotic drugs – for whatever reason – have been known to experience withdrawal hallucinations and acute psychotic symptoms even if they had never experienced such symptoms previously.)

Of course, highly addictive “minor” tranquilizers like the benzodiazepines (Valium, Ativan, Klonopin, Librium, Tranxene, Xanax) can cause the same withdrawal syndromes. They are all dangerous and very difficult to withdraw from (withdrawal results in difficult-to-treat rebound insomnia, panic attacks, and seriously increased anxiety), and, when used long-term, they can all cause memory loss/dementia, the loss of IQ points and the high likelihood of being mis-diagnosed as Alzheimer’s disease (of unknown etiology).


Myth # 11:

So-called bipolar disorder can mysteriously ‘emerge’ in patients who have been taking stimulating antidepressants like the SSRIs”

False. In actuality, crazy-making behaviors like mania, agitation and aggression are commonly caused by the SSRIs. That list includes a syndrome called akathisia, a severe, sometimes suicide-inducing internal restlessness – like having restless legs syndrome over one’s entire body and brain.

Akathisia was once understood to only occur as a long-term adverse effect of antipsychotic drugs (See Myth # 10). So it was a shock to many psychiatrists (after Prozac came to market in 1987) to have to admit that SSRIs could also cause that deadly problem.



Related: Antidepressants Aren’t Needed Most Of The Time

It has long been my considered opinion that SSRIs should more accurately be called “agitation-inducing” drugs rather than “anti-depressant” drugs.

The important point to make is that SSRI-induced psychosis, mania, agitation, aggression and akathisia is NOT bipolar disorder nor is it schizophrenia!


Myth # 12:

“Antidepressant drugs can prevent suicides”

False. In actuality, there is no psychiatric drug that is FDA-approved for the treatment of suicidality because these drugs, especially the so-called antidepressants, actually INCREASE the incidence of suicidal thinking, suicide attempts and completed suicides.



Related: The Roots Of Mental Health - Maybe They’re Not In Our Heads + Rising Rates Of Suicide: Are Pills The Problem?

Drug companies have spent billions of dollars futilely trying to prove the effectiveness of various psychiatric drugs in suicide prevention.

Even the most corrupted drug company trials have failed! Indeed what has been discovered is that all the so-called “antidepressants” actually increase the incidence of suicidality.

The FDA has required black box warning labels about drug-induced suicidality on all SSRI marketing materials, but that was only accomplished after over-coming vigorous opposition from the drug-makers and marketers of the offending drugs, who feared that such truth-telling would hurt their profits (it hasn’t).

What can and does avert suicidality, of course, are not drugs, but rather interventions by caring, compassionate and thorough teams of care-givers that include family, faith communities and friends as well as psychologists, counselors, social workers, relatives (especially wise grandmas!), and, obviously, the limited involvement of drug prescribers.



Myth # 13:

America’s school shooters and other mass shooters are ‘untreated’ schizophrenics who should have been taking psych drugs”

False. In actuality, 90% or more of the infamous homicidal – and usually suicidal – school shooters have already been under the “care” of psychiatrists (or other psych drug prescribers) and therefore have typically been taking (or withdrawing from) one or more psychiatric drugs.

SSRIs (such as Prozac) and psychostimulants (such as Ritalin) have been the most common classes of drugs involved. Antipsychotics are too sedating, although an angry teen who is withdrawing from antipsychotics could easily become a school shooter if given access to lethal weapons.

The 10% of school shooters whose drug history is not known, have typically had their medical files sealed by the authorities – probably to protect authorities such as the drug companies and/or the medical professionals who supplied the drugs from suffering liability or embarrassment.

Important Comment: It should be noted that in most cases such 'False Flag' shooter events, that Mind-Controlled assets are used in order to carry out events pushing Cabal-driven agenda's such as gun control. In virtually EVERY case the 'perpetrators' are on multiple prescription drugs for mental health issues.

This is not a comfortable subject but it is one that you will need to confront sooner or later, as the truth will become common knowledge at some point. Interspersed with the rest of this section are details of the reality which hides behind the prescription drugs and their side effects -




Related: Monarch Mind Control & The MK-Ultra Program

The powerful drug industry and psychiatry lobby, with the willing help of the media that profits from being their handmaidens, repeatedly show us the photos of the shooters that look like zombies.

They have successfully gotten the viewing public to buy the notion that these adolescent, white male school shooters were mentally ill rather than under the influence of their crazy-making, brain-altering drugs or going through withdrawal.

Contrary to the claims of a recent 60 Minutes program segment about “untreated schizophrenics” being responsible for half of the mass shootings in America, the four mentioned in the segment were, in fact, almost certainly being already under the treatment with psych drugs – prior to the massacres – by psychiatrists who obviously are being protected from public identification and/or interrogation by the authorities as accomplices to the crimes or witnesses.



Related: CIA MKULTRA: They Intended To Use Drugs For “Everything”

Because of this secrecy, the public is being kept in the dark about exactly what crazy-making, homicidality-inducing psychotropic drugs could have been involved.

The names of the drugs and the multinational corporations that have falsely marketed them as safe drugs are also being actively protected from scrutiny, and thus the chance of prevention of future drug-related shootings or suicides is being squandered.

Such decisions by America’s ruling elites represent public health policy at its worst and is a disservice to past and future shooting victims and their loved ones.



Related: Confession Of A Human Programmer: Illuminati Mind Control

The four most notorious mass shooters that were highlighted in the aforementioned 60 Minutes segment included the Virginia Tech shooter, the Tucson shooter, the Aurora shooter and the Sandy Hook shooter whose wild-eyed (“drugged-up”) photos have been carefully chosen for their dramatic “zombie-look” effect, so that most frightened, paranoid Americans are convinced that it was a crazy “schizophrenic”, rather than a victim of psychoactive, brain-altering, crazy-making drugs that may have made him do it.

Parenthetically, it needs to be mentioned that many media outlets profit handsomely from the drug and medical industries.

Therefore those media outlets have an incentive to protect the names of the drugs, the names of the drug companies, the names of the prescribing MDs and the names of the clinics and hospitals that could, in a truly just and democratic world, otherwise be linked to the crimes.



Related: Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories

Certainly if a methamphetamine-intoxicated person shot someone, the person who supplied the intoxicating drug would be considered an accomplice to the crime, just like the bartender who supplied the liquor to someone who later committed a violent crime would be held accountable.

A double standard obviously exists when it comes to powerful, respected and highly profitable corporations.

A thorough study of the scores of American school shooters, starting with the University of Texas tower shooter in 1966 and (temporarily) stopping at Sandy Hook, reveals that the overwhelming majority of them (if not all of them) were taking brain-altering, mesmerizing, impulse-destroying, “don’t give a damn” drugs that had been prescribed to them by well-meaning but too-busy psychiatrists, family physicians or physician assistants who somehow were unaware of or were misinformed about the homicidal and suicidal risks to their equally unsuspecting patients (and therefore they had failed to warn the patient and/or the patient’s loved ones about the potentially dire consequences).



Related: How To Protect Yourself From WEF Davos Man & New Zealand Prime Minister Calls For A Global Censorship System

Most practitioners who wrote the prescriptions for the mass shooters or for a patient who later suicided while under the influence of the drug, will probably(and legitimately so) defend themselves against the charge of being an accomplice to mass murder or suicide by saying that they were ignorant about the dangers of these cavalierly prescribed psych drugs because they had been deceived by the cunning drug companies that had convinced them of the benign nature of the drugs.


Myth # 14:

“If your patient hears voices it means he’s a schizophrenic”

False. Auditory hallucinations are known to occur in up to 10% of normal people; and up to 75% of normal people have had the experience of someone that isn’t there calling their name. (www.hearing-voices.org/voices-visions).

Nighttime dreams, nightmares and flashbacks probably have similar origins to daytime visual, auditory and olfactory hallucinations, but even psychiatrists don’t think that they represent mental illnesses.

Indeed, hallucinations are listed in the pharmaceutical literature as a potential side effect or withdrawal symptom of many drugs, especially psychiatric drugs.

These syndromes are called substance-induced psychotic disorders which are, by definition, neither mental illnesses nor schizophrenia.



Rather, substance-induced or withdrawal-induced psychotic disorders are temporary and directly caused by the intoxicating effects of malnutrition or brain-altering drugs such as alcohol, medications, hallucinogenic drugs and other toxins.

Psychotic symptoms, including hallucinations and delusions, can be caused by substances such as alcohol, marijuana, hallucinogens, sedatives, hypnotics, and anxiolytics, inhalants, opioids, PCP, and the many of the amphetamine-like drugs (like Phen-Fen, [fenfluramine]), cocaine, methamphetamine, Ecstasy, and agitation-inducing, psycho-stimulating drugs like the SSRIs).

Psychotic symptoms can also result from sleep deprivation, sensory deprivation and the withdrawal from certain drugs like alcohol, sedatives, hypnotics, anxiolytics and especially the many dopamine-suppressing, dependency-inducing, sedating, and zombifying anti-psychotic drugs.



Related: The Drugs May Be The Problem - Inconvenient Truths About Big Pharma And The Psychiatric Industry + Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders

Examples of other medications that may induce hallucinations and delusions include anesthetics, analgesics, anticholinergic agents, anticonvulsants, antihistamines, antihypertensive and cardiovascular medications, some antimicrobial medications, anti-parkinsonian drugs, some chemotherapeutic agents, corticosteroids, some gastrointestinal medications, muscle relaxants, non-steroidal anti-inflammatory medications, and Antabuse.

The very sobering information revealed above should cause any thinking person, patient, thought-leader or politician to wonder:


“How many otherwise normal or potentially curable people over the last half century of psych drug propaganda have actually been mis-labeled as mentally ill (and then mis-treated) and sent down the convoluted path of therapeutic misadventures – heading toward oblivion?”

In my mental health care practice, I personally treated hundreds of patients who had been given a multitude of confusing and contradictory mental illness labels, many of which had been one of the new “diseases of the month” for which there was a new psych “drug of the month” that was being heavily marketed on TV.

Many of my patients had simply been victims of unpredictable drug-drug interactions (far too often drug-drug-drug-drug interactions) or simply adverse reactions to psych drugs which had been erroneously diagnosed as a new mental illness.

Extrapolating my 1,200 patient experience (in my little isolated section of the nation) to what surely must be happening in America boggles my mind.

There has been a massive epidemic going on right under our noses that has affected millions of suffering victims who could have been cured if not for the drugs.

The time to act on this knowledge is long overdue.

Related: The Violence-Inducing Effects Of Psychiatric Medication & The Psychiatric Agenda Destroys Creative Children


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Planned Obsolescence: How The Products You Buy Are Designed To Break
January 2 2024 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various

How many times have you bought an electronic device, only to find out that it has stopped functioning properly just a short time after your purchase (or just after the Warranty ended)?



Planned Obsolescence: The absurd practise of designing products with a limited lifespan in order to maximise profits, based on the notion that infinite economic growth can be balanced by the finite resources of the planet...

You spent so much money on it, and suddenly you’re sad to know that it’s not working well anymore.

Related: How Consumerism Is Ruining Our Lives And The World

The result? Wasted expenses, labor, energy and finite resources, not to mention the toxic waste that ends up in landfills, poisoning the planet. But why is that so? Why is it that most products’ lifespan is so short, considering the advanced modern technological means of production?

Enter planned obsolescence.


Cyclical Consumption & Planned Obsolescence

Our economic system is based on consumption - the more we buy, the more money moves into the economy, and hence the more the economy grows. If money stops moving, the economic system is bound to collapse, since people will not be paid or have money to pay for the products and services they need or want.

There are two main ways our society manages to keep people buying stuff:

Firstly, through advertising. We’re exposed to thousands of advertisements each and every day whose sole purpose is to convince us to keep on shopping under the promise that doing so will make our lives better.

Through advertising, companies have managed to make us confuse our needs with our wants, thus making us desire to acquire things that we don’t truly need, so that we can fill in their pockets by emptying our own.



Related: Fear-Based Manipulation: How Politicians, Marketers And The Media Create Panic To Control The Masses

Secondly, through planned obsolescence, although this is not yet understood by many. If you didn’t know, planned obsolescence is a production technique that compels people to buy more and more stuff unnecessarily, by providing people with products of short lifespan.

Instead of creating goods with the intention to last for as long as it is technically possible - considering that we are living in a finite planet with finite resources as well as the importance of saving material and human energy - companies, whose sole interest is to make sales, purposefully design products of low quality that will soon break, in order to assure repeat purchases.



Planned Obsolescence & The Phoebus Light Bulb Cartel

In the early 20th century, technical efficiency brought about by industrial development in the US increased dramatically, which resulted in the production of higher quality goods at a much quicker pace.

Although that was a great success from a technological standpoint, the fact that the goods produced had increased lifespan was found to slow down consumption - hence it was an anathema for the economy.



Related: Bio-Resonant Therapy And Telecommunication Frequencies

In order to prevent this from happening even further, people were encouraged to make more purchases, but it was found that this alone couldn’t make a significant difference.

The “solution” given in the 1930s was to make it legally mandatory for all industries to produce goods of lower lifespan, which was believed to help reduce unemployment and increase consumption.

This brings us to the case of the Phoebus light bulb cartel.

In the 1930s, a single light bulb could last for up to 25,000 hours, but the cartel forced all companies produce bulbs limited to a maximum life of 1,000 hours in order to increase demand. Below is a trailer of The Light Bulb Conspiracy, a feature documentary film that investigates the evolution and impact of planned obsolescence.



The Light Bulb Conspiracy



In order to make sure that people make repeat purchases, most manufacturers today create products that have short life cycles. In other words, the products sold by most companies have been intentionally designed in such a way that they will break shortly after they’ve been purchased, so as to urge the general public to buy more of them in the future.


Market Efficiency vs Technical Efficiency

In our economic system, which is based on cyclical consumption, technical efficiency is only damaging to the market efficiency - both cannot co-exist by any means.

Increased technical efficiency decreases market efficiency, which is disrupting the flow of our economy.




Related: Brave New World And Individual Power & How The Elite Dominate The World: They Buy Politicians, And Incumbents Almost Always Win

But how stupid is it to keep on having such an economic system, knowing how technically inefficient it is as well as its tremendous negative impacts on society and the natural world?


Instead of urging people to buy more and more, would it not be wiser to make use of our current scientific knowledge to create an economic system that is based on technical efficiency and environmental sustainability?

I would like to leave you now with these questions in mind, which will hopefully help you to realize how obsolete our economic system is and urge you to seek out information about how alternative economic systems can be implemented that would actually promote social and environmental well-being.



Related Articles:


Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe


The Truth About Electro Magnetic Frequencies - What The Authorities Don't Tell You

Are There Patents To Manipulate The Human Nervous System Using Electromagnetic Frequencies?

Everything Is Rigged: Medicine, Science, Elections, The Media, Money, Education, Search Engines, Social Media... You Are Living In A Fabricated Fairy Tale

The World’s Best Economist



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Someone Else’s Country - The Neoliberal Revolution In New Zealand
January 1 2024 | From: AlisterBerry

The Globalist's test case trial of Corporatisation: In the early 1980s a group of free market economists came to dominate policy at the New Zealand Treasury.



With the election of the Labour Party in 1984 and the appointment of Roger Douglas as finance minister, the new right elite took power and began relentlessly and ruthlessly turning New Zealand into their vision of the model free market state.

Related: State Control: The Government Of Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern Is Shaping Up To Be One Of The Most Controlling In New Zealand’s History

"A coherent and comprehensive account of the years which will define this country for a century to come."
- New Zealand Herald.





Related Articles:

The World’s Best Economist

Groundswell Building For A While & Ardern’s Nightmarish Weekend

What Is Globalism And Where Is It Going?

Ten Current Trends Of Operation Coronavirus As Of August 2021 & Vaccine Mandates And The "Great Reset"

Our Positives At 40 Cycles Are Of No Concern As They Have Little / No Viral Load To Transmit & Norway Reclassifies Covid-19: No More Dangerous Than Ordinary Flu + Covid-19 – The Spartacus Letter

Ardern Intent On Smashing Free Speech

The ‘Great Reset’: A Technocratic Agenda That Waited Years For A Global Crisis To Exploit & Globalists Will Need Another Crisis As Their Reset Agenda Fails

Jacinda Ardern’s COVID Treason + Global Uprising Underway

Four Things Globalists Think You’re Too Stupid To Understand

The Ardern Effect: A Disturbance In The Force & Jacinda Ardern And Labour: The Truth Exposed

Elections In New Zealand, Australia, Canada, England, Germany, The Netherlands & Exposed: Proof NZ Prime Ministers Are Globalists



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening
December 31 2023 | From: CollectiveEvolution / SitsShow / TheUnboundedSpirit

An ‘aura’ field can be defined as a luminous glow or radiation that surrounds a person’s body, almost like a halo. Ancient depictions of religious and spiritual figures often feature this aura, but today, modern science is discovering that we are all, in fact, surrounded by this type of field, and it can actually affect the way we feel.



We know that energy cannot be seen with the naked human eye, which is why attempts to measure invisible phenomena scientifically are often greeted with harsh criticism, but thanks to the groundbreaking work of dedicated scientists from all over the world, the concept of non-material science is starting to become accepted in the mainstream. 

Related: Introduction / Overview: The ‘Healing Computer’ Technology

This refers to the idea that the physical material reality we perceive with our senses isn’t the only reality that’s available for us to study in a modern day scientific manner.


“The day science begins to study non-physical phenomena, it will make more progress in one decade than in all the previous centuries of its existence.”

– 
Nikola Tesla

Before getting into how our aura can affect us and those around us, I’d like to mention that human thoughts, intentions, feelings and emotions - ‘factors associated with consciousness’ - have been shown to have a direct effect on and correlation to our physical material world.


"The stream of knowledge is heading toward a non-mechanical reality; the universe begins to look more like a great thought than like a great machine.

Mind no longer appears to be an accidental intruder into the realm of matter, we ought rather hail it as the creator and governor of the realm of matter. Get over it, and accept the inarguable conclusion. The universe is immaterial-mental and spiritual."

- Sir James Jeans (“The Mental Universe” ; Nature 436:29,2005)

To see a more in-depth explanation of how factors associated with consciousness are intertwined with our physical material reality you can read this article:

Physicists Examine Consciousness & Conclude The Universe Is ‘Spiritual, Immaterial & Mental


The Human Aura

Work by the brilliant scientists over at the Institute of HeartMath can perhaps best shed light on one aspect of human aura. A large portion of their research has investigated heart and brain interaction.



Related: How Science Arrived At The Doorstep Of Spirituality

Researchers have examined how the heart and brain communicate with each other and how that affects our consciousness and the way in which we perceive our world. For example, when a person is feeling really positive emotions like gratitude, love, or appreciation, the heart beats out a certain message.

Because the heart beats out the largest electromagnetic field produced in the body, researchers are able to gather significant data from it. According to Rolin McCratey, Ph.D, and Director of Research at the Institute:


"Emotional information is actually included and modulated into these fields. By learning to shift our emotions, we are changing the information coded into the magnetic fields that are radiated by the heart, and that can impact those around us.

We are fundamentally and deeply connected with each other and the planet itself, and what we do individually really does count and matters."


- Source

Did you know that your heart emits electromagnetic fields which change according to your emotions, or that the human heart has a magnetic field that can be measured up to several feet away from the human body?

Did you know that positive emotions create physiological benefits in your body, or that you can boost your immune system by conjuring up positive emotions?

Did you know that negative emotions can create nervous system chaos, and that positive emotions do the complete opposite?


The bottom line is, feelings of love, gratitude, and compassion – any positive feelings whatsoever – have a larger impact than we could have ever imagined.





The Spiritual Heart - is in a way a little like a smart phone, invisibly connecting us to a large network of information. It is through an unseen energy that the heart emits that humans are profoundly connected to all living things. The energy of the heart literally links us to each other. Every person's heart contributes to a 'collective field environment.' This short video explains the importance of this connection and how we each add to this collective energy field. The energetic field of the heart even connects us with the earth itself.

It’s fascinating to consider how the heart’s magnetic field might be interacting with and affecting other people, and it leads me to wonder if perhaps the electromagnetic fields around our bodies are somehow connected to that of the Earth.



Related: Are You Awake? Or Just Informed

What type of effect, if any, might the information coded into our electromagnetic fields have on the information coded into the Earth’s field? It’s all very exciting, and there are so many questions still left to answer.

Below is a video of  Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University, who believes that our positive and negative thoughts each have a different impact on our surrounding environment.





A Russian scientist is trying to convince people they can change the world simply by using their own energy. He claims that thinking in a certain way can have a positive or negative effect on the surrounding environment. "We are developing the idea that our consciousness is part of the material world and that with our consciousness we can directly influence our world," said Dr. Konstantin Korotkov, a professor of physics at St. Petersburg State Technical University. To bridge our understanding of the unseen world of energy, scientific experiments are being carried out using a technique called bioelectrophotography. The assumption is that we are constantly emitting energy. Bioelectrophotography aims to capture these energy fields seen as a light around the body -- or what some people would call your aura.


He has developed a scientific device based on the ancient Chinese system of energy meridians which measures the bio-energy of living organisms, as well as the environment.

The device, called the GDV, uses a completely painless electrical current applied to the fingertips - taking less than one millisecond to work - to highlight potential health (physiological and psycho-emotional) abnormalities. 

The body’s response is measured in the form of an “electron cloud” which is composed of light energy photons. The glow of this discharge is invisible to the human eye (humans can only see one percent of the entire electromagnetic spectrum) and is captured by an optical CCD camera system and then translated into a digital computer.



Related: The Three Stages Of Spiritual Transformation

In the GDV software programs, the glow from the different sectors of the finger images is projected onto the shape of a human body in correspondence with the location of the different organs and systems. As a result, it produces energy field images that allow for intuitive analysis of the physiological level of human body functioning.

It has been approved and received registration as a routine medical diagnostic device by the Russian Ministry of Health upon recommendation of the Russian Academy of Sciences.

According to Eastern metaphysical theories of Ayurvedic Indian medicine, there are seven “Chakras,” or integrated energy centers, correlated with physical, mental, emotional, and spiritual well-being.

These energy Chakras are positioned or embedded into the spinal column at various locations beginning with the coccyx, rising all the way to the crown of the head.

Dr. Pradeep B. Deshpande, a Professor Emeritus at the Department of Chemical Engineering at the University of Louisville, explains:


"Each Chakra is considered to resonate at a different frequency level. With new BioWell software, it is now possible to quantitatively estimate the energy of Chakras and graphically display their level of activation, and indicate whether this level of activation is above or below the level found from large numbers of subjects.

-
Source

The results from a case study he conducted involving over 100 participants in attendance indicate that imbalanced Chakras are easily detectable:



Related: 1899 Merck Manual Shows Natural And Food - Based Medicine Once Reigned Supreme + The Healing Web


"Each individual sector or portion of the fingertip is connected energetically with specific organs and organ systems such as the respiratory system. When the data of the 10 individual BIO-grams are collated and interpolated, an image of the entire full body energy field is created.

An example of the full body energy field from a healthy and unhealthy/emotionally unbalanced individual are shown above. The gaps and the reduced emissions and out-of-balance Chakras for the unhealthy individual are quite obvious." 

- Source

Please keep in mind that clinical studies of more than 10,000 patient cases with various health challenges have also been well documented in Russia.


How to See a Human Aura in 5 Minutes







Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And Their Functions

Manly P. Hall is a philosopher and mystic from the early 20th century. Some view him as a pillar of esoteric knowledge, while others think he was part of a dark cabal that has infiltrated Masonic lodges throughout the globe.



Hall did not work his way up the degrees as most Masons do. Instead, he was given an honorary 33rd degree after establishing himself as a learned scholar in many fields. 

Related: In Harmony With All Life: The Open Source Way + Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality

While it is all too easy to label someone "evil" purely for an association to a group that has overall been corrupted to a large extent, those who truly seek knowledge and wisdom beyond armchair judgments can see past a book's cover, for the wisdom within its pages.

Those who dismiss what Hall had to say are the ones who miss out on the knowledge he has to offer but if one can look past appearances, then a wealth of information can be claimed. 

I think that knowledge is everywhere, even held within the hands of some of the most diabolical people on the planet. But in receiving these gems of wisdom, we need not consider ourselves evil or supporting those who act insidiously. 

Knowledge is amoral. When used in the right hands it can be a powerful tool. but in the wrong hands (usually the ignorant), it can be a destructive weapon. But for the one who foolishly dismisses wisdom because of an appearance alone, they will suffer the pitfalls of their own prejudice. 



Related: The Incredible Hidden Life Of Trees

But for the truly discerning, the ability to absorb data from any source is the key to personal growth and evolution. To the discerning mind, wisdom can be found everywhere, but it will remain hidden behind a veil if we never explore it. 

As such, if you have prejudices about Manly P. Hall because of his association with Freemasonry, I ask you to set them aside and open your heart and mind to hear what he has to say. 

And I will share that the concept of magnetic fields affecting the body is hardly new and has been well established for years. Our energetic body connects directly to the Earth-mother in many ways, earthing and geomagnetic fields are some of them. Both of these play an important role in restoring the health of mind, body, and soul. 



Related: 50 Years Of Near Death Experience Research Suggests That The “Soul” Is Real + 7,000 Souls Recall Their ‘Life’ Between Lives During Regression Hypnosis, The Similarities Are Astounding

Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions is the title of an interview with Manly P. Hall, a Freemason who was very knowledgeable in esoteric teachings.

I do not agree with everything that Manly teaches; however, in the interview, he shared a lot of very important information about energy fields and the human body, so if you want to learn some empowering information about energy fields and the human body, I highly encourage you to watch and listen to the interview.


Manly Palmer Hall (March 18, 1901 – August 29, 1990) was a Canadian-born author and mystic. He is perhaps most famous for his work The Secret Teachings of All Ages: An Encyclopedic Outline of Masonic, Hermetic, Qabbalistic and Rosicrucian Symbolical Philosophy, which is widely regarded as his magnum opus, and which he published at the age of 25 (or 27, 1928)

He has been widely recognized as a leading scholar in the fields of religion, mythology, mysticism, and the occult.

Carl Jung, when writing Psychology and Alchemy, borrowed material from Hall’s private collection.
In 1934, Hall founded the Philosophical Research Society (PRS) in Los Angeles, California, dedicating it to an idealistic approach to the solution of human problems.

The PRS claims to be non-sectarian and entirely free from educational, political, or ecclesiastical control, and the Society’s programs stress the need for the integration of philosophy, religion, and science into one system of instruction.

The PRS Library, a public facility devoted to source materials in obscure fields, has many rare and scarce items now impossible to obtain elsewhere.

In 1973 (47 years after writing The Secret Teachings of All Ages), Hall was recognized as a 33º Mason (the highest honor conferred by the Supreme Council of the Scottish Rite), at a ceremony held at PRS on December 8th, despite never being initiated into the physical craft.

In his over 70-year career, Hall delivered approximately 8,000 lectures in the United States and abroad, authored over 150 books and essays, and wrote countless magazine articles.


Manly Hall: Magnetic Fields of the Human Body and Their Functions







13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening

Here are 13 crystal clear signs that you’re experiencing a spiritual awakening:



1. You desire less stuff and more simplicity.
You realize that the less you possess the more unburdened your psyche is, and instead of wanting to acquire material wealth, you are seeking to find your inner wealth.

2. You are drawn to mind-expanding books.
You don’t read books anymore just in order to entertain yourself when you feel like having nothing better to do, and choose to read those books that help you to become the greatest version of yourself.

3. You spend more time alone in silence.
You go for solitary walks in nature and meditate in silence so as to reconnect and make peace with yourself.

4. You eat healthier and take better care of your body. You start treating your body like it’s sacred, listening to its wisdom, and keeping it as healthy as you can.

5. You feel more connected to nature and all living beings.
 You recognize the interconnectedness and interdependence of all beings and feel a sense of oneness with everyone and everything.



6. You feel compassion about the suffering in the world. You become aware of how much pain there is all around you and do your best to alleviate it in any way you can.

7. You take responsibility in your hands.
You realize that there’s no point in having a victim’s mentality and blaming others for what’s going wrong in your life, and you take conscious action to shape your destiny.

8. You are mindful of your actions.
You’ve discovered the tremendous power of your actions and you make sure to act in ways that don’t negatively affect yourself and the world.

9. The past and the future lose control over your life.
You understand that the past and future don’t truly exist, and the only moment that was, is, and will ever be is the present.



10. You have a deep yearning for meaning.
 You comprehend that living a normal life is empty of meaning and purpose, and you seek to create your own path in your life’s journey.

11. You are more creative.
You feel an increased desire to creatively express yourself and turn your dreams into reality.

12. You expose your true self to the world.
You’ve dropped your social masks of pretense and you are open to communicate your innermost thoughts and feelings with others without feeling guilty or ashamed.

13. You have a loss of interest in competition.
You realize that competition brings conflict and suffering, and that the only way to live in harmony with others is by having a loving and compassionate attitude towards them.

Related: Spirit Led Activism - The True Power Of The People + Rites Of Passage - Encountering Spiritual “Initiations” On The Path


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Real Reason Why The UN Wants Control Over The Internet
December 30 2023 | From: DeWeeseReport

By its very nature, the Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers (ICANN) is a non-profit organization exclusively run by Technocrats.



As such, it is an apolitical body that is happy to serve whatever form of governance exists as long as funding is received and salaries are paid. To a Technocrat, a world run by science and technology is better than any other form of governance.

Related: The UN Releases Plan to Push for Worldwide Internet Censorship

That Technocrats have played a supporting role in world history is unquestioned. Scientists, engineers and technicians played a huge role in the Communist dictatorship in the former Soviet Union (For instance, see Science and the Soviet Social Order).



Related: Vampire Technocrats Fly To Jekyll Island To Stop Trump

Technocrats likewise played a central role in support of Adolph Hitler and National Socialism (See Scientists, Engineers and National Socialism). In both cases, the Technocrat goal was not necessarily Communism or Nazism, but rather the methodical exercise of science according to its Scientific Method.

In other words, the process was more important than the outcome – and in both cases, the outcome was not questioned or resisted, but simply accepted.




Reality Check: Obama Administration Has Handed Over The Internet to a Private Corporation




The reason that ICANN formerly served the interests of the United States was simply that it answered to our government’s judicial, legislative and executive branches. In other words, the U.S. held the umbrella over ICANN and that was enough to keep it working for our national interests and not for someone else’s interests.

Obama changed that when he cut ICANN loose on September 30, 2016 by letting the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) contract expire without being renewed. After expiration, we forever lost the right to renew the contract again.

So, ICANN is now a “free-agent” looking for shelter in the same way that a boll weevil looks for a cotton plant: it needs a host organization in order to practice its craft, and, I dare say, it doesn’t care one whit who that host is.

What does ICANN do?



Click on the image above to open a larger version in a new window

It is no secret that the United Nations is making a play to become host to ICANN. In particular, the UN’s International Telecommunications Union (ITU), run by the Peoples Republic of China, is expected to play the central role in this effort.

However, whether it is the ITU or some other UN agency is immaterial because it will still be the UN in the end.

But, why the UN? Because it is the fountainhead of the plans and operations to establish Technocracy as the sole global economic system while destroying capitalism and free enterprise. Technocracy is the issue here. Others know it as Sustainable Development or Green Economy, but the correct historical term is Technocracy.

In February 2015, the head of climate change at the UN, Christiana Figures, stated,


This is the first time in the history of mankind that we are setting ourselves the task of intentionally, within a defined period of time to change the economic development model that has been reigning for at least 150 years, since the industrial revolution.” [emphasis added]

What is unclear about this? Sustainable Development, or Technocracy, is a resource-driven economic model regulated by energy rather than by supply and demand plus monetary currencies. In 1938, the original Technocrats defined Technocracy as


“The science of social engineering, the scientific operation of the entire social mechanism to produce and distribute goods and services to the entire population.”

To achieve its Utopia goals, the UN must have ICANN’s steering wheel and throttle. But while everyone is stressing over Internet censorship of web sites and the suppression of free speech, the real prize is completely overlooked: The Internet of Things (IoT).



In terms of “follow the money”, IoT is expected to generate upwards of $3 trillion by 2025 and is growing at a rate of at least 30 percent per year. In other words, it is a huge market and money is flying everywhere. If the UN can figure out a way to tax this market, and they will, it will provide a windfall of income and perhaps enough to make it self-perpetuating. Currently, the UN is financed by contributions from member states.

But, what is the IoT and who cares? IoT are the connections between inanimate objects and the humans that depend upon them. The digital Smart Meter on your home communicates energy usage via WiFi to the utility company; but it also communicates with the major appliances in your home and can even control them remotely without your consent or knowledge.



The smart phone that you carry communicates with cell towers and localized signal receptors to create a map of your every movement. Smart home technology lets your stereo send sound to remote wireless speakers and to light bulbs equipped with sensors.

The security camera that you installed to watch your home while you were on vacation can communicate with other cameras, microphones, the police department, etc. Examples go on and on.

ICANN issues the so-called IP addresses that are assigned to all these devices on a global basis. The original addressing scheme, IPV4, was based on four blocks of up to three digits each, punctuated with a period (e.g., 192.168.2.14). This scheme allows for a discrete address for up to 16.8 million devices.



A few years ago, IPV4 ran out of numbers, forcing Internet service providers, corporations and other organizations to improvise internal numbering systems, known as ‘proxy servers’, to issue safe addresses to devices within their own domain. These systems are not only fragile, but they are bloated beyond reason and generally easy to hack.

To fix this, ICANN devised a new IP numbering system called IPV6, which adds two more blocks of numbers (e.g., 192.168.2.14.231.58).

This scheme provides for 3.4×1038  addresses, or 340 trillion, 282 billion, 366 million, 920 thousand, 938 - followed by 24 zeroes. There is probably a way to say this number, but I cannot imagine what it would be. It’s somewhere beyond a trillion trillion unique numbers for every human being on earth!

Thus, IPV6 provides a way to assign a unique and directly addressable number to every electronic device on earth… for centuries to come.

As IPV6 rolls out to the world, the modified mission for ICANN will be to inventory and categorize the device attached to each IP address. For instance, all the air conditioners in the world would be directly addressable from a single list. Likewise for all computers, all automobiles, all cameras, all phones, all refrigerators, all articles of clothing, etc.

Whoever has control over and access to this data will literally be able to control the entire world, down to the last minutiae  – and that is the United Nations’ exact mission: inventory, monitor and control.

But, this concept was set in history long before the technology existed. The original bible of Technocracy, the Technocracy Study Course (1934), laid out the hard requirements necessary for its implementation:


1. “Register on a continuous 24 hour-per-day basis the total net conversion of energy.

2. “By means of the registration of energy converted and consumed, make possible a balanced load.

3. “Provide a continuous inventory of all production and consumption

4. “Provide a specific registration of the type, kind, etc., of all goods and services, where produced and where used

5. “Provide specific registration of the consumption of each individual, plus a record and description of the individual.”

- Scott, Howard et al, Technocracy Study Course, p. 232

As I thoroughly documented in my book, Technocracy Rising: The Trojan Horse of Global Transformation, the United Nations is indeed the engine of modern Technocracy and as such, it is acting in a perfectly predictable manner.



Related:
Technocracy: A Scientific Dictatorship

It seeks to establish a global Scientific Dictatorship where it controls all resources, all production and limits all consumption to its own liking. These Technocrats will dutifully apply their pseudo-scientific methodology to every problem in the world, and simply issue instructions to the net to ‘make it so.’

Yes, free speech will decrease and censorship will increase, but that pales in comparison to the real prize of the IoT that the United Nations desperately wants and needs in order to accomplish its own twisted goals.

Congress never understood this when they passively let Obama fail to renew our contract with ICANN. However, Obama and his globalist handlers understood it perfectly well, which makes the deception and treachery of it even worse.

Thanks to this scurrilous bunch, the world has just been sold into digital slavery, from which there may be no return.

Related: Warning: Don’t Share This Article, Facebook Might Ban You!


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Climate Intervention: A Government Cover-Up Of Epic Proportions
December 29 2029 | From: WND / Various

A few years ago I addressed how CIA Director John Brennan gave a historic speech to the Council on Foreign Relations, confessing something few thought they would ever hear: the federal government’s explicit and intentional climate intervention via operations like stratospheric aerosol spraying or injections, or SAI.

What I didn’t explain is that SAI is a ginormous federal geo-engineering cover up that is now being exposed, and yet not a single mainstream media outlet has reported on it. Let me explain.

Related: Exposing The Bogus "97% Consensus" Claim Over Climate Change 'Science' & Top-Level Climate Modeler Spills The Beans On The ‘Nonsense’ Of ‘Global Warming Crisis’

In April of 2016, the U.S. Senate directed the Department of Energy (DOE) “to review the findings of the National Academy [of Sciences, or NAS] report,” “Climate Intervention: Reflecting Sunlight to Cool Earth,” and “to study the potential impacts of albedo modification [or solar radiation management], a potential method of geoengineering,” which included “smaller scale field trials.”

Science magazine explained:


“Albedo modification would work by lacing the atmosphere with tiny particles or aerosols that would reflect sunlight and mimic natural processes.

For example, in 1991 the volcano Mount Pinatubo in the Philippines spewed 20 million tons of sulfur dioxide into the stratosphere, which spans altitudes from 10 to 50 kilometers.

There, the sulfur dioxide produced aerosols that reflected enough sunlight to reduce global temperature by an estimated 0.3°C for 3 years.

Albedo modification might also work by using aerosols to seed cloud formation in a lower atmospheric layer called the troposphere.”

The U.S. Senate pushed the DOE to pursue albedo modification action a couple months before CIA Director Brennan gave his blessing to stratospheric spraying as a government operation that “potentially could help reverse the warming effects of global climate change.”

What’s crazy about all that government endorsement is that the February 2015 NAS report, on which the feds base their entire toxic rain operation;


“Warned explicitly that albedo modification shouldn’t be deployed now because the risks and benefits were far too uncertain.”

What are those risks? Here are just three grave consequences that we know about:

Drought: The team under Chien Wang, a co-author of the NAS study and a senior research scientist at MIT’s Center for Global Change Science and the Department of Earth, concluded that albedo modification would lead;


“To dangerous changes in global weather: Precipitation would also decline worldwide, and some parts of the world would be worse off. Europe, the Horn of Africa, and Pakistan may receive less rainfall than they have historically.”

Loss of blue sky: According to a report by the New Scientist, Ben Kravitz of the Carnegie Institution for Science explained, “Releasing sulphate aerosols high in the atmosphere should in theory reduce global temperatures by reflecting a small percentage of the incoming sunlight away from the Earth.



Related: Same Media That Once Deemed Chemtrails A Conspiracy Theory Now Openly Promotes Chemtrailing The Entire Planet To “End Climate Change” & Global Geoengineering (Chemtrails) Experiment Pushed By Bill Gates Also Funded By Nazi-Linked Alfred P. Sloan Foundation, Linked To Eugenics And Depopulation

However, the extra particles would also scatter more of the remaining light into the atmosphere. This would reduce by 20 per cent the amount of sunlight that takes a direct route to the ground, and it would increase levels of softer, diffuse scattered light,” making the sky appear hazier.

Hazards to human health and other earth life: The gravest of all consequences of atmospheric aerosol spraying is that, simply put, what’s sprayed above us settles down upon us and in us, as well as other life on earth.

The U.S. government’s own National Center for Biotechnology Information, or NCBI, released a report in January 2016, the goal of which was “Assessing the direct occupational and public health impacts of solar radiation management with stratospheric aerosols.” The NCBI concluded:


“Our analysis suggests that adverse public health impacts may reasonably be expected from SRM via deployment of stratospheric aerosols.

Little is known about the toxicity of some likely candidate aerosols, and there is no consensus regarding acceptable levels for public exposure to these materials.

There is also little infrastructure in place to evaluate potential public health impacts in the event that stratospheric aerosols are deployed for solar radiation management.”

No wonder the co-author of the study on “Climate Intervention,” Dr. James Fleming, called geo-engineering like SAI: "Untested and untestable, and dangerous beyond belief."



Related: Amazing Science Lesson: Environmentalists Declare War On Photosynthesis In Stupefying Effort To Exterminate All Recognizable Life On Planet Earth

Another colleague and co-author, Dr. Raymond T. Pierrehumbert, the Louis Block professor in geophysical sciences at the University of Chicago, and Sweden’s King Carl XVI Gustafn, chairman in environmental science at Stockholm’s Universitet, took it one step further. He warned;


"The nearly two years’ worth of reading and animated discussions that went into this study have convinced me more than ever that the idea of ‘fixing’ the climate by hacking the Earth’s reflection of sunlight is wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad.”

(That is why Dr. Pierrehumbert prefers to call albedo modification by the name “albedo hacking.”)

Dr. Pierrehumber added: “The report describes albedo modification frankly as involving large and partly unknown risks. It states outright that albedo modification ‘should not be deployed.'”

So, why are the U.S. Senate and CIA director disregarding the dire and passionate warnings of scientists like Dr. Pierrehumbert and Dr. Fleming by demanding that the Department of Energy proceed with trials on geo-engineering? In the words of Dr. Pierrehumber, are they “wildly, utterly, howlingly barking mad”?

Answer: Yes!



Related: Head Of World Meteorological Organization Slams Climate Extremists, In Unprecedented Move & NASA Admits That Climate Change Occurs Because Of Changes In Earth’s Solar Orbit, And Not Because Of SUVs And Fossil Fuels

Is it a mere coincidence that the very government agencies that are spraying our stratosphere with toxic chemicals were the actual sponsors of the NAS report? The NAS itself confessed:


“The study was sponsored by the National Academy of Sciences, U.S. intelligence community, National Aeronautics and Space Administration, National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration, and U.S. Department of Energy” (italics mine).

Isn’t that like your right hand quoting your left hand so that your right hand can grab what it’s already holding? Is the NAS report another government push and ploy to collaborate and cite “scientific proof” to justify its clandestine climate agenda?

Why else would the CIA and U.S. Senate be proceeding in climate aerosol spraying when the very scientists preparing the study warned, “Stop! Don’t do it! It’s crazy and dangerous!”

The most colossal and tragic of all government cover-ups is the fact that the feds have been waging climate warfare for more than 30 years, lacing our clouds and stratosphere with dangerous nano-particles, including environmental sulfates, black carbon, metallic aluminum and aluminum oxide aerosols.

The truth is, for decades, the feds have been covertly and overtly running sky criminal operations behind (above!) our backs, leaving humans and the rest of the planet life as lab rats of their toxic cocktail fallout.



Related: Do You Know What We Are Breathing In From Weather Geoengineering Efforts?

Geoengineeringwatch.org reported that a 1978 750-page congressional report was recently discovered with a mountain of information going back decades that “confirms the ongoing extensive involvement of our government in climate modification/weather warfare.

This document also confirms the involvement of foreign governments around the globe, even governments that would otherwise have been considered ‘hostile to US interests.'”

Why hasn’t a single mainstream media outlet reported on the CIA and DOE’s march forward with SAI when the scientific community has explicitly and repeatedly warned against it?

Why are geo-engineering researchers being stonewalled by government and media?

And why in hell are watchdogs on both the left and right dodging the feds’ intentional and hazardous climate intervention, when they seek to uncover government cover-ups and conspiracies with the most scant of evidence?

Dane Wigington, the lead researcher for GeoengineeringWatch.org and a fierce fighter for government geoengineering transparency, was absolutely right when he wrote: “How big does the climate engineering elephant in the room need to be before it can no longer be hidden in plain site?



Related: Geoengineering And Weather Modification Exposed

How much more historical proof do we need of the ongoing climate engineering / weather warfare before the denial of the masses crumbles?

When will populations around the globe bring to justice all those responsible for the ongoing and rapidly worsening worldwide weather warfare assault?”

Is it a mere coincidence that, in October 2015, the feds put a universal “gag order” on agency employees in “The National Weather Service,” the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration” and the “U.S. Dept. of Commerce”?

Is it a mere coincidence that the Obama administration spent more taxpayer monies for legal prosecutions of government whistleblowers than all other U.S. presidents combined, resulting in 31 times the jail sentences?

It’s time to blow the lid off the climate bullshit of governments!



Related: Let's Review 50 Years Of Dire Climate Forecasts And What Actually Happened & New Zealand Climate Commission’s Radical Plan

That is why my wife, Gena, and I encourage citizens everywhere to do their own research on geo-engineering and then write their government representatives to demand action.  We also encourage the support of the Legal Alliance of pro-bono lawyers now amassed as a united front to fight the geo-engineering government cover-up in court.

To read or learn more immediately, I highly recommend the work and website of Dane Wigington. GeoEngineeringWatch.org is loaded with great research on the many facets of climate intervention.


Related Articles:

Chemtrails, Geoengineering, Weather Modification & Weather Warfare

UN IPCC Scientist Blows Whistle On Lies About Climate, Sea Level

Discovery Of Massive Volcanic CO2 Emissions Puts Damper On Global Warming Theory & Climate Change Hoax Collapses As New Science Finds Human Activity Has Virtually Zero Impact On Global Temperatures


Hollywood Sci-Fi Filmmakers Dramatise Fictional Climate Change To Scare Everybody Into Voting For Climate Totalitarians


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Weather Weapons Are Real, They Have A Treaty To Regulate Them
December 28 2023 | From: Geopolitics / Various

There is still a sizable portion of our society who cannot grasp the reality of weather altering devices and technologies which have made us all unsure about which weather is real, and which ones are not.



This poses a big problem for those who understand how these weather devices are being used, but want to inform the public about the impending danger of the draconian laws that have been legislated based on the false pretext of global warming.

Related: Do You Know What We Are Breathing In From Weather Geoengineering Efforts?

Surely, Al Gore’s Inconvenient Truth movie and his green energy companies continue making money for the guy, but when the lie became impossible enough to sustain, they have begun using the more generic term, i.e. climate change.


Kilimanjaro Still Has Snow

One of the first glaring claims Gore makes is about Mount Kilimanjaro in Africa. He claims Africa’s tallest peak will be snow-free “within the decade.” Gore shows slides of Kilimanjaro’s peak in the 1970s versus today to conclude the snow is disappearing.

Well, it’s been a decade and, yes, there’s still snow on Kilimanjaro year-round. It doesn’t take a scientist to figure this out.



Related: Let's Review 50 Years Of Dire Climate Forecasts And What Actually Happened & New Zealand Climate Commission’s Radical Plan

Climate does change, it’s been that way since the birth of our solar system, but the phrase is now synonymous to abnormal weather patterns, flash flooding, forest wildfires, and to some extent, even earthquakes, all of which could be the handiwork of highly covert government entities trying to justify their subsequent invasive policies.

All of these calamitous events can affect the economic productivity and greatly hamper the development of the targeted regions on the planet. Indeed, weather weapons are a very effective tool for geopolitical coercion.

The nations possessing these weather weapons agreed that they won’t be used in wars and geopolitical conflicts. But who can ever refuse the power to play like the mythical gods of thunder and lightning?

We are not only talking here about “cloud seeding” technologies like Wikipedia would like us to limit our understanding about weather warfare:



Related: U.S. Attacked Philippines with HAARP

Weather warfare is the use of weather modification techniques such as cloud seeding for military purposes.


"Weather warfare is the use of weather modification techniques such as cloud seeding for military purposes.

Prior to the Geneva Convention, the United States used weather warfare in the Vietnam War. Under the auspices of the Air Weather Service, the United States’ Operation Popeye used cloud seeding over the Ho Chi Minh trail, increasing rainfall by an estimated thirty percent during 1967 and 1968. It was hoped that the increased rainfall would reduce the rate of infiltration down the trail.

With much less success, the United States also dropped salt on the airbase during the siege of Khe Sanh in an attempt to reduce the fog that hindered air operations.

A research paper produced for the United States Air Force written in 1996 speculates about the future use of nanotechnology to produce “artificial weather”, clouds of microscopic computer particles all communicating with each other to form an intelligent fog that could be used for various purposes. “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist… "

- Wikipedia (the trusted source...)

The above phrase, “Artificial weather technologies do not currently exist…” is in disagreement to the statement made by the US Air Force during a budget hearing for HAARP, like so:




HAARP, or High Altitude Auroral Research Program, is said to be an experimental electromagnetic wave propagator which could deliver radio signals in any desired frequencies with a twist of a button, to strike at any target. But as that US congressional hearing suggest, the Air Force is already using a more advanced version, they are now willing to abandon the existing HAARP site in Alaska.

There are, of course, radar systems mounted on mobile platforms which could emit high powered EM signals, and can be positioned in any of the 1,000 US military bases, for steering “weather disturbance” to any triangulated terrestrial and extraterrestrial targets.

The other side of this all-in-one ultrahigh powered radio broadcast technology is to foster positive disposition, fry the electronics of an incoming ICBM, or MiRVs simultaneously, and render their thermonuclear/chemical warhead inert, and deliver controlled rainfall on arid deserts of Africa so that food abundance is assured at last.



Related: When Plutocrats Own The Weather & Nobody Is Buying The “Climate Change” Hoax Anymore

Yes, the most versatile weather weapon is staring right in plain sight and is using that same technology still being used in the wireless broadcast industry today.

The only notable difference is that the weaponized version is using billion watts of sheer power which is very feasible just by transforming the transmission voltage from a few hundred volts into the range of hundreds of million volts which is what Tesla was actually playing with.

Consider three radar installations firing upward in a triangle configuration, all at the same time. Those three hot nodes will then experience high gas pressures, and as a result, their common center will then become the “low pressure area [LPA],” which will be news broadcasted by your weather channel as where the potential typhoon will come from.

The fact that they can move the three points of attack will make the typhoon steerable to hit at any desired target.

For more in-depth study, the researcher can refer to the US Patent 4686605 by clicking on the image below:


Related: Meet Naomi Seibt - The 19-Year-Old, Blond Antidote To Greta Thunberg & NZ Government Begins National Climate Indoctrination Of Children

But no, the United Nations, Inc., or any of its subsidiary corporate states, are not capable of providing these commonsensical solutions any time soon. It can only afford to pay lip service to those pressing problems, because the Old Men running the show can’t get over with their myopic appreciation of the power entrusted to them, which they use only to impress young women.

Considering that our body, like everything else in nature, is made up of EM waves propagating at certain frequencies in space, we can also be altered, or our bodily functions can be influence for any desired effect.

If at certain microwave frequencies, a radar system can cook the atmosphere to increase gas pressure, and change the weather, it can also be used to deliver modulated brain wave frequencies to stimulate docility, or hyperactivity to destroy an entire targeted population without firing a single bullet.

This is the reason why the authorities sought to limit, or eradicate, its use in actual conflict scenario.



Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques

The States Parties to this Convention,

Guided by the interest of consolidating peace, and wishing to contribute to the cause of halting the arms race, and of bringing about general and complete disarmament under strict and effective international control, and of saving mankind from the danger of using new means of warfare,

Determined to continue negotiations with a view to achieving effective progress towards further measures in the field of disarmament,

Recognizing that scientific and technical advances may open new possibilities with respect to modification of the environment,

Recalling the Declaration of the United Nations Conference on the Human Environment, adopted at Stockholm on 16 June 1972,

Realizing that the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes could improve the interrelationship of man and nature and contribute to the preservation and improvement of the environment for the benefit of present and future generations,

Recognizing, however, that military or any other hostile use of such techniques could have effects extremely harmful to human welfare,

Desiring to prohibit effectively military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques in order to eliminate the dangers to mankind from such use, and affirming their willingness to work towards the achievement of this objective,

Desiring also to contribute to the strengthening of trust among nations and to the further improvement of the international situation in accordance with the purposes and principles of the Charter of the United Nations,

Have agreed as follows:

Article I

  1. Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to engage in military or any other hostile use of environmental modification techniques having widespread, long-lasting or severe effects as the means of destruction, damage or injury to any other State Party.

  2. Each State Party to this Convention undertakes not to assist, encourage or induce any State, group of States or international organization to engage in activities contrary to the provisions of paragraph 1 of this article.

Article II

As used in article 1, the term “environmental modification techniques” refers to any technique for changing – through the deliberate manipulation of natural processes – the dynamics, composition or structure of the Earth, including its biota, lithosphere, hydrosphere and atmosphere, or of outer space.

Article III

  1. The provisions of this Convention shall not hinder the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes and shall be without prejudice to the generally recognized principles and applicable rules of international law concerning such use.

  2. The States Parties to this Convention undertake to facilitate, and have the right to participate in, the fullest possible exchange of scientific and technological information on the use of environmental modification techniques for peaceful purposes. States Parties in a position to do so shall contribute, alone or together with other States or international organizations, to international economic and scientific co-operation in the preservation, improvement and peaceful utilization of the environment, with due consideration for the needs of the developing areas of the world.

Article IV

Each State Party to this Convention undertakes to take any measures it considers necessary in accordance with its constitutional processes to prohibit and prevent any activity in violation of the provisions of the Convention anywhere under its jurisdiction or control. Blah, blah,blah.

In witness whereof, the undersigned, being duly authorized thereto, have signed this Convention at Geneva, on the 18 day of May 1977.

- Convention on the Prohibition of Military or Any Other Hostile Use of Environmental Modification Techniques

The reality on the ground is far from being straightforward, i.e. countries possessing weather weaponry may not be actively firing at each other, but that doesn’t mean that the United States government, for example, is not using the same capability against its own people, or its smaller nation allies, you know, to keep them in line.

The chemical based geoengineering, for instance, is being extended to spray harmful chemicals instead of merely “cloud seeding”.


Historical Perspectives

It was Dr. Nikola Tesla who tried to give us wireless power so that global prosperity can be achieved by providing free and unlimited access to energy, for the benefit of all.



Related: Unraveling Nikola Tesla’s Greatest Secret: Radiant Energy

He constructed a “magnifying transmitter” which could deliver both power and data wirelessly to far off distances. In the process, he realized the vast potential of his device and the dangers it may pose when the technology falls into the wrong hands.

On April 28, 1997 U.S. Defense Secretary William Cohen made the following statement:


'"Others [terrorists] are engaging even in an eco-type of terrorism whereby they can alter the climate, set off earthquakes, volcanoes remotely through the use of electromagnetic waves…

So there are plenty of ingenious minds out there that are at work finding ways in which they can wreak terror upon other nations…

It’s real, and that’s the reason why we have to intensify our [counterterrorism] efforts.”

In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program.



Related: Geoengineering And Weather Modification Exposed

The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:


'Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”

- European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999

The weapons referred to by Secretary Cohen are longitudinal EM wave interferometers (LWIs). Longitudinal EM waves easily travel through the ocean and earth with very little loss. In a distant interference zone, there appears real EM energy again, of the kind we have in our textbooks.

However, the energy arises from spacetime itself in the interference zone, as proven by M.W. Evans, P.K. Anastasovski, T.E. Bearden et al., “On Whittaker’s Representation of the Electromagnetic Entity in Vacuo: The Production of Transverse Fields and Energy by Scalar Interferometry,” Journal of New Energy, 4(3), Winter 1999, p. 76-78. (That entire issue of JNE contains some 60 papers by the Alpha Foundation’s Institute for Advanced Study (AIAS), dealing with the kind of higher symmetry electrodynamics needed to understand such weapons).

Though tested in prototype in the 1950s, the first strategic LWIs were deployed in Russia in April 1963, and were used to kill the U.S.S. Thresher nuclear attack submarine, underwater off the East coast of the United States, in April 1963. The signatures of the kill are 100% decisive.



USS Thresher

Related: Eco-Terrorism Correspondence

One day later, the same weapon placed an enormous electromagnetic burst (explosion) deep underwater, 100 miles north of Puerto Rico. From the surface of the ocean there arose a giant cone of water, rising a half mile into the air, turning into a mushroom, and falling back into the sea.

This was the second test of the new Russian strategic LWIs, under KGB control. By this test and the fact that the West did not even recognize what killed the Thresher, Khrushchev managed to stay in power another two years or so, after his Cuban Crisis fiasco where he lost face in front of the entire world.

World-wide weather engineering started in earnest by the Russians on July 4, 1976 - as a quirky sense of humor and “bicentennial gift” to the United States. The weapons have been used to shoot down aircraft, etc. worldwide also, mostly as tests, and have also destroyed ICBMs shortly after launch.

Both the scientific and political priesthoods are being used by the plutocrats at the highest totem pole of our society to impose upon humanity a world of endless scarcity in all aspects of our existence. They justify this policy by saying that if everything is free and easily accessible, people get lazy and just play around. What’s wrong with that?



Related: Dane Wigington Exposes The Globalist Geoengineering Weather Control Agenda In Fascinating Interview
With The Health Ranger

We are the only species in the entire solar system that consented to making life very difficult after we have discovered ways and means to make it easier.


"When I first joined the American Physical Society sixty-seven years ago it was much smaller, much gentler, and as yet uncorrupted by the money flood (a threat against which Dwight Eisenhower warned a half-century ago).

…The giants no longer walk the earth, and the money flood has become the raison d’être of much physics research, the vital sustenance of much more, and it provides the support for untold numbers of professional jobs.

For reasons that will soon become clear my former pride at being an APS Fellow all these years has been turned into shame, and I am forced, with no pleasure at all, to offer you my resignation from the Society.

It is of course, the global warming scam, with the (literally) trillions of dollars driving it, that has corrupted so many scientists, and has carried APS before it like a rogue wave.

It is the greatest and most successful pseudoscientific fraud I have seen in my long life as a physicist.

Anyone who has the faintest doubt that this is so should force himself to read the ClimateGate documents, which lay it bare. (Montford’s book organizes the facts very well.)

I don’t believe that any real physicist, nay scientist, can read that stuff without revulsion. I would almost make that revulsion a definition of the word scientist.

So what has the APS, as an organization, done in the face of this challenge? It has accepted the corruption as the norm, and gone along with it…”

- Top Scientist Resigns From His Post At The University Of California Admitting Global Warming Is A Big Scam

In February 1998, the European Parliament’s Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy held public hearings in Brussels on the U.S based weather warfare facility developed under the HAARP program.

The Committee’s “Motion for Resolution” submitted to the European Parliament:


"Considers HAARP… by virtue of its far-reaching impact on the environment to be a global concern and calls for its legal, ecological and ethical implications to be examined by an international independent body…; [the Committee] regrets the repeated refusal of the United States Administration… to give evidence to the public hearing …into the environmental and public risks [of] the HAARP program.”

- European Parliament, Committee on Foreign Affairs, Security and Defense Policy, Brussels, doc. no. A4-0005/99, 14 January 1999

The Committee’s request to draw up a “Green Paper” on “the environmental impacts of military activities”, however, was casually dismissed on the grounds that the European Commission lacked the required jurisdiction to delve into “the links between environment and defense”. Brussels was anxious to avoid a showdown with Washington. (see European Report, 3 February 1999).

The possibility of climatic or environmental manipulations as part of a military and intelligence agenda, while tacitly acknowledged, has never been considered relevant. Military analysts are mute on the subject.

Meteorologists are not investigating the matter, and environmentalists are strung on global warming and the Kyoto protocol.



Related: 'Conspiracy Theorists' Vindicated: HAARP Confirmed Weather-Manipulation Tool

Ironically, the Pentagon, while recognizing its ability to modify the World’s climate for military use, has joined the global warming consensus. In a major study (pdf) , the Pentagon has analyzed in detail the implications of various global warming scenarios.

Power is never given, or handed down in a silver platter. It must be taken away from those who are incapable of using it wisely for the good and benefit of all lifeforms everywhere.

In lieu of these deplorables, we must put in management positions the visionaries, engineers and technologists, so that only the progressive use of science and technology is given the light of day.

This is the revolution worth fighting for.


Related Articles:

Exposing The Bogus "97% Consensus" Claim Over Climate Change 'Science' & Top-Level Climate Modeler Spills The Beans On The ‘Nonsense’ Of ‘Global Warming Crisis’

Head Of World Meteorological Organization Slams Climate Extremists, In Unprecedented Move & NASA Admits That Climate Change Occurs Because Of Changes In Earth’s Solar Orbit, And Not Because Of SUVs And Fossil Fuels

Climate Change Hoax Collapses As Michael Mann’s Bogus “Hockey Stick” Graph Defamation Lawsuit Dismissed By The Supreme Court Of British Columbia

UN IPCC Scientist Blows Whistle On Lies About Climate, Sea Level

World Extreme Weather: Is It Man Or Something Else?

Environmental Warfare and Climate Change


Ten Years On: Al Gore's 'Inconvenient Truth' Propaganda Film Turns Out To Be Total Bunk - How Is His Profit From Carbon Taxes Not Criminal Fraud?

An Inconvenient Review: After 10 Years Al Gore’s Film Is Still Alarmingly Inaccurate


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Many Scientific “Truths” Are, In Fact, False + A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"
December 27 2023 | From: QZ / Inverse / Various

In 2005, John Ioannidis, a professor of medicine at Stanford University, published a paper, “Why most published research findings are false,” mathematically showing that a huge number of published papers must be incorrect.



He also looked at a number of well-regarded medical research findings, and found that, of 34 that had been retested, 41% had been contradicted or found to be significantly exaggerated.

Related: The Rise Of Scientific Fundamentalism

Since then, researchers in several scientific areas have consistently struggled to reproduce major results of prominent studies. By some estimates, at least 51% - and as much as 89% - of published papers are based on studies and experiments showing results that cannot be reproduced.

Related: Crisis In Science Research: Over 70% Of Researchers Fail To Reproduce Another Scientist's Experiments

Researchers have recreated prominent studies from several scientific fields and come up with wildly different results.

And psychology has become something of a poster child for the “reproducibility crisis” since Brian Nosek, a psychology professor at the University of Virginia, coordinated a Reproducibility Initiative project to repeat 100 psychological experiments, and could only successfully replicate 40%.



Related: Some Of The Biggest Lies Of Science

Now, an attempt to replicate another key psychological concept (ego depletion: the idea that willpower is finite and can be worn down with overuse) has come up short.

Martin Hagger, psychology professor at Curtin University in Australia, led researchers from 24 labs in trying to recreate a key effect, but found nothing. Their findings are due to be published in Perspectives on Psychological Science in the coming weeks.



Why Are They Getting it Wrong?

No one is accusing the psychologists behind the initial experiments of intentionally manipulating their results. But some of them may have been tripped up by one or more of the various aspects of academic science that inadvertently encourage bias.

For example, there’s massive academic pressure to publish in journals, and these journals tend to publish exciting studies that show strong results.


"Journals favor novelty, originality, and verification of hypotheses over robustness, stringency of method, reproducibility, and falsifiability,”
Hagger tells Quartz.

“Therefore researchers have been driven to finding significant effects, finding things that are novel, testing them on relatively small samples.”

This has created a publication bias, where studies that show strong, positive results get published, while similar studies that come up with no significant effects sit at the bottom of researchers’ drawers.



Related: The Top 10 Tricks Used By Corporate Junk Science

Meanwhile, in cases where researchers have access to large amounts of data, there’s a dangerous tendency to hunt for significant correlations. Researchers can thus convince themselves that they’ve spotted a meaningful connection, when in fact such connections are totally random.


A Sign of Strength

The idea that papers are publishing false results might sound alarming but the recent crisis doesn’t mean that the entire scientific method is totally wrong. In fact, science’s focus on its own errors is a sign that researchers are on exactly the right path.

Ivan Oransky, producer of the blog Retraction Watch, which tracks retractions printed in journals, tells Quartz that ultimately, the alarm will lead to increased rigor.


"There’s going to be some short-term and maybe mid-term pain as all of this shakes out, but that’s how you move forward,” he says. “It’s like therapy - if you never get angry in therapy, you’re probably not pushing hard enough. If you never find mistakes, or failures to reproduce in your field, you’re probably not asking the right questions.”

For psychologists, who have seen so many results crumble in such a short space of time, the replication crisis could be disheartening. But it also presents a chance to be at the forefront of developing new policies.



Related: Official Science: The Grand Illusion

Ioannidis tells Quartz that he views the most recent psychology reproducibility failures as a positive.


"It shows how much effort and attention has gone towards improving the accuracy of the knowledge produced,”
he says.

“Psychology is a discipline that has always been very strong methodologically and was at the forefront at describing various biases and better methods. Now they are again taking the lead in improving their replication record.”

For example, there’s already widespread discussion within psychology about pre-registering trials (which would prevent researchers from shifting their methods so as to capture more eye-catching results), making data and scientific methods more open, making sample sizes larger and more representative, and promoting collaboration.

Dorothy Bishop, a professor of developmental neuropsychology at Oxford University, tells Quartz that several funding bodies and journals seem to be receptive to these ideas and that, once one or two adopt such policies, she expects them to spread rapidly.


Doing Science on Science

Each scientific field must adopt its own methods of ensuring accuracy. But ultimately, this self-reflection is a key part of the scientific process.



Related: The Cult Of 'Scientism' Explained: How Scientific Claims Behind Cancer, Vaccines, Psychiatric Drugs And GMOs Are Nothing More Than Corporate-Funded Science Fraud

As Bishop notes, “Science has proved itself to be an incredibly powerful method.” And yet there’s always room for further advancement.


"There’s never an end point,” says Bishop. “We’re always groping towards the next thing. Sometimes science does disappear down the wrong path for a bit before it corrects itself.”

For Nosek, who led the re-testing of 100 psychology papers, the current focus on reproducibility is simply part of the scientific process.


"Science isn’t about truth and falsity, it’s about reducing uncertainty,”
he says.

“Really this whole project is science on science: Researchers doing what science is supposed to do, which is be skeptical of our own process, procedure, methods, and look for ways to improve.”




A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"

But that doesn't mean we should give up.



Between the duping of the American public from Big Sugar, shocking moral fact-checks on some of history’s most groundbreaking experiments, and failure after failure of science research we’ve accepted as truth, science is teetering on the verge of being, well, fucked.

Related: Junk Science Week: Science Is On The Verge Of A Nervous Breakdown

Actually, it might be too late.

Those fears drove University of Oregon psychologist Sanjay Srivastava, Ph.D., to design the fictitious course “Everything Is Fucked.” The imagined ten-week seminar, written up as a syllabus on his blog, is Srivastava’s version of a reality check for young scientists:

Do you seriously think you’re going to cure the world’s diseases and elevate humanity through technology? You won’t - because everything is fucked.

This may seem a little harsh. After all, aren’t CRISPR, the discovery of Martian water, and the newly not-endangered panda and whale proof that science is alive and well?



Related: Willful Ignorance: Why We Stay Oblivious To Facts That Threaten Our Health And The Planet

But that’s the problem with science, Srivastava argues: We’re so intent on focusing on the results that we don’t see the path toward finding these results, and that’s fucked up. Would CRISPR have become 2015’s biological buzzword if academic journal editors hadn’t decided gene editing papers were worth publishing?

What else did we find out (or not find out) about Mars that wasn’t deemed publishable? Can we even trust the data showing the pandas and whales are thriving? We don’t know, and not only is it fucked up, it raises questions about the foundations of modern science altogether.

The “everything” in “Everything Is Fucked,” Srivastava explains, refers to scientific methods, the ways researchers acquire funding, the universities that support research, and our channels for publishing and disseminating scientific knowledge.

He defines something as fucked if:


"It presents hard conceptual challenges to which implementable, real-world solutions for working scientists are either not available or routinely ignored in practice.”

For Srivastava, the way we discover and share scientific knowledge is so riddled with these problems that there’s no way we can fully trust what we believe to be true.

Take week eight’s theme, “Scientific publishing is fucked.” In the science community, a published paper in an academic journal is professional currency; everyone’s striving to collect them, and anyone who doesn’t have one is professionally broke. Academic journals - big-name, respected publications like Nature, Science, and the New England Journal of Medicine - are academia’s banks.



Related: Academic Oligarchy: Majority Of Science Publishing Is Controlled By Just Six Companies

In Srivastava’s view, this is troublesome, because it means they’re in control. “The problem is, there’s this incentive to find things that meet the publishable standards,” he says, referring to science that shows positive results, like a drug that promises a cure.

If journals only pay attention to the “success” stories, it means they’re ignoring all of the research that doesn’t produce sexy results. In turn, the temptation to falsify results and fudge graphs only grows stronger.

Scientists behind the unsexy studies are screwed: If they don’t get published, they don’t get tenure at research institutions or grants to continue their work, and their scientific pursuits inevitably come to a standstill.



Related: Scientific American Writer Exposes The Tribal Cultist Arrogance And Dogmatic Lunacy Of Science 'Skeptics'

But does their work deserve to come to an end? Most of those studies are not “wrong” or “useless,” because negative results are often just as useful for advancing scientific discovery as positive ones.

But they aren’t treated that way because they don’t make for good publishing.


"That’s really where it starts: Publication decisions becoming hinged, not on whether it’s a good question, but on whether the answer comes out, one way or another,”
Srivastava says.

The cycle continues, and fucked-ness persists.

He has other, finer bones to pick. In week six, he discusses the issue of replicability, which is the idea that an experiment needs to be repeatable. If it’s not, the data it produces is, statistically, a one-off, and therefore pretty much useless.

And yet, there are an alarming number of scientific studies out there that are not replicable, cited by everyone from Big Pharma to the federal government.



Related: A Totalitarian Society Has Totalitarian Science

He claims that the scientific profession as a whole is fucked in week ten because the pressure on scientists to publish more papers, faster, leads to smaller sample sizes, which in turn lead to weaker, less statistically sound results.

The scientists that design better, more thorough experiments may be doing better science, but because they aren’t publishing as many studies, they’re ultimately viewed as less accomplished.


"Where do truth and publishability depart?”
Srivastava ponders. “When it comes time to hire people, we’re still going to hire someone with more papers.”

If it sounds like a massive clusterfuck, then Srivastava has made his point. Does that mean the pursuit of science in 2016 is a completely futile endeavor?

No, Srivastava surprisingly argues. Look to week seven - “Interlude” - for a scientific salvation, right about the time when his fictional students consider switching to a liberal arts degree, which can be distilled to this: Sure, everything is fucked, but it’s up to the next generation of scientists to make science less so.

There’s hope, and the replicability crisis might ironically offer that by being a cautionary tale for the arrogance of science.

The rest of us should be at least calmed by the fact that sexy results are garnering more upturned eyebrows and head scratching than ever before.


Related Articles:

Are You Tired Of Being Angry At The State Of The World? & Three Hard Truths About Pain Most People Hate To Admit

Degeneracy And Fundamentalism Of Western Media Control & Truth In Media

In The Western World Lies Have Displaced Truth

What The New Acceptability Of The Lab Leak Origin Tells Us About Media Outlets & COVID-19 – The Real Truth

The Truth About Electro Magnetic Frequencies - What The Authorities Don't Tell You

The Drugs May Be The Problem - Inconvenient Truths About Big Pharma And The Psychiatric Industry + Psychologist Speaks Out: Psychiatry Is Misleading Public About Mental Disorders

The Truth About Addiction And Recovery

The Truth About MMS (Chlorine Dioxide) That They Don’t Want You To Know

Nine Indisputable Truths About “Conspiracy Theorists”

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

Science Explains Why Highly Intelligent People Prefer To Be Alone

Everything Is Rigged: Medicine, Science, Elections, The Media, Money, Education, Search Engines, Social Media... You Are Living In A Fabricated Fairy Tale

The COVID-19 RT-PCR Test: How To Mislead All Humanity - Using A “Test” To Lock Down Society + Former Pfizer Science Officer Reveals Great COVID-19 Scam

Exposing The Bogus "97% Consensus" Claim Over Climate Change 'Science' & Top-Level Climate Modeler Spills The Beans On The ‘Nonsense’ Of ‘Global Warming Crisis’

How ‘Science’ Is Used To Deceive The Public



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Whose Work Was The Inspiration For The First [Supposedly] Nuke-Free Country?
December 26 2023 | From: HelenCaldicott / GregHallett

New Zealand was the first country in the world to pass national nuclear-free legislation. Marilyn Waring reflects on how Dr. Helen Caldicott’s influence culminated in the passage of the cornerstone of New Zealand’s foreign policy.



If you were growing up in New Zealand and Australia post World War II, there’s a chance you knew about the United States using the Marshall Islands as a nuclear testing site from 1947 until 1962.

Related: Extracting Energy From The Quantum Vacuum: Can Zero-Point Energy Power Our Planet? & For 30 Years The US Department Of Energy And “Scientific Establishment” Has Blocked The Truth About Cold Fusion (Low-Energy Nuclear Reactions), The Ultimate “Renewable” Energy Solution For Humanity

In an agreement signed with the United Nations, the U.S. government held the Marshall Islands as a “trust territory” and detonated nuclear devices in this pristine area of the Pacific Ocean - leading, in some instances, to huge levels of radiation fall-out, health effects, and the permanent displacement of many island people.

In all, the U.S. government conducted 105 underwater and atmospheric tests. You would have also known that the British conducted seven atmospheric tests between 1956 and 1963 on traditional Aboriginal land, in Maralinga, Australia.




Related: 2-Billion-Year-Old Nuclear Mega-Reactor Discovered In Africa

It may be that you read Neville Shute’s 1957 novel On the Beach, in which people in Melbourne, Australia wait for deadly radiation to spread from a Northern Hemisphere nuclear war.

This book made a memorable impact on Helen when she read it as a teenager. When I was a teenager, some years later, I read Bertrand Russell’s 1959 classic, Common Sense and Nuclear Warfare.

Both Helen and I saw Peter Watkin’s The War Game, a BBC documentary drama about nuclear war and the consequences in an English city. In New Zealand the film was restricted for children unless accompanied by an adult, so I had to get my father to take me. The War Game won the Oscar for the best documentary in 1965.

France began its series of over 175 nuclear tests at Mururoa, in the South Pacific, in 1966. At least 140 of these tests were above ground.

In 1973, the New Zealand and Australian governments took France to the World Court for continued atmospheric testing, and forced the last tests underground.

The testing finally came to an end in 1976.



Related: Declassified Documents Reveal Pentagon’s 1950's Planned Nuclear Holocaust: “Systemic Destruction” And Annihilation Of Prague, Warsaw, Budapest, Moscow, Beijing - More Than 1000 Cities

In New Zealand the U.S. Navy made regular visits between 1976 and 1983 with nuclear-powered and, most likely, nuclear-armed, ships.

These visits produced spectacular protest fleets in the Auckland and Wellington harbours, when hundreds of New Zealanders - in yachts of all sizes, in motor boats and canoes, even on surf boards - surrounded the vessels and tried to bring them to a complete stop.

By 1978, a campaign began in New Zealand to declare borough and city council areas nuclear-free and, by the early 1980s, this symbolic movement had quickly gained momentum, covering more than two-thirds of the New Zealand population.

Helen Caldicott and I had not met up to this point, but these were shared parts of our history and consciousness when Helen visited New Zealand in 1983.

Helen Caldicott graduated with a medical degree from University of Adelaide Medical School in 1961. She moved to the United States, becoming an Instructor in paediatrics at Harvard Medical School and was on the staff of the Children’s Hospital Medical Centre in Boston, Massachusetts.



Related: Uranium One: Nuclear Scandal Fallout Hits FBI & Clintons

In the late 1970s, Helen became the President of Physicians for Social Responsibility. This group was founded when Helen was finishing medical school, quickly making its mark by documenting the presence of Strontium-90, a highly radioactive waste product of atmospheric nuclear testing, in children’s teeth.

The landmark finding eventually led to the Limited Nuclear Test Ban treaty, which ended atmospheric nuclear testing.

But it was the Three Mile Island accident that changed Helen’s life. An equipment failure resulted in a loss of cooling water to the core of a reactor at the Three Mile Island Nuclear Generating Station in Pennsylvania, causing a partial meltdown.

Operator failure meant that 700,000 gallons of radioactive cooling water ended up in the basement of the reactor building.

It was the most serious nuclear accident to that date in the U.S. Helen published Nuclear Madness the same year. In it she wrote:


“As a physician, I contend that nuclear technology threatens life on our planet with extinction. If present trends continue, the air we breathe, the food we eat, and the water we drink will soon be contaminated with enough radioactive pollutants to pose a potential health hazard far greater than any plague humanity has ever experienced.”

In 1980, Helen resigned from her paid work positions to work full time on the prevention of nuclear war.

In 1982, Canadian director Terre Nash filmed a lecture given by Helen Caldicott to a New York state student audience. Nash’s consequent National Film Board of Canada documentary If You Love this Planet was released during the term of U.S. President Ronald Reagan, at the height of Cold War nuclear tensions between the United States and the Soviet Union.

The U.S. Department of Justice moved quickly to designate the film “foreign propaganda,” bringing a great deal of attention to the film. It went on to win the 1982 Academy Award for Documentary Short Subject. That same year, Helen addressed about 750,000 people in Central Park, New York in the biggest anti-nuke rally in the United States to that date.

In 1983, I was serving as a member of the New Zealand parliament, having been elected eight years earlier at the age of 23.



Our parliament established a Disarmament and Arms Control Select Committee to conduct hearings on the possibility of making New Zealand a nuclear-free zone.

During this critically important time, Helen was invited to New Zealand on a lecture tour. The documentary If You Love This Planet was shown at her speaking engagements. I did not get to meet her, nor hear any of her lectures in person, as I was working in parliament every night. But I did follow the media coverage.

Helen told the magazine the Listener about having observed five-star generals in U.S. congressional and senate committees complaining that the Russian missiles were bigger than the American ones.


“The Russian missiles are very big (and) inaccurate and clumsy. America has very small, very accurate missiles, which are better at killing people and destroying targets,”
she explained.

A frequent message in her talks to New Zealand audiences was the redundant overkill capacity of both superpowers. Caldicott noted to her audiences that “[T]he U.S. has 30,000 bombs and Russia 20,000.”

I had sat in a New Zealand parliamentary committee hearing some months earlier, when a government colleague, brandishing a centrefold of a Russian submarine, excitedly called for us to “Look at how big it is.”



I had thought that no one would believe me if I had repeated such an inane banality - when an adult male was more impressed by the size of the submarine than its capacity to destroy life on this planet.

Helen’s public addresses were grounded in the potential impact of nuclear weapons. “Imagine a 20-megaton bomb targeted on Auckland,” she told audiences in New Zealand.


“The explosion, five times the collective energy of all the bombs dropped in the Second World War, digs a hole three-quarters of a mile wide by 800 feet deep and turns people, buildings and dirt into radioactive dust.

Everyone up to six miles will be vaporised, and up to 20 miles they will be dead or lethally injured. People will be instantly blinded looking at the blast within 40 miles. Many will be asphyxiated in the fire storm.”

Helen did not hold back, explaining that nuclear war means “blindness, burning, starvation, disease, lacerations, haemorrhaging, millions of corpses and an epidemic of disease.” Helen’s dramatic and blunt style reduced many in her audiences to tears.

She always ended her talks with a call to action - especially to parents - as she strongly believes that nuclear disarmament is “the ultimate medical and parenting issue of our time.”

To those who would claim New Zealand was not a target she had a short reply:


“Trident submarines in ports are targeted. They are a first strike target. It is much easier to destroy subs when they are in dock than it is when they are submerged in the ocean.”



Related: What Are Chemtrails And How Are They Harming Our Food And Water? + Nuclear Chemist Publishes Paper Detailing: “Aluminum Poisoning Of Humanity Via Geoengineering”

In 2015, I asked Helen how she managed to deliver such bad news and yet keep her audiences with her. “Being a doctor helps because you have to learn to negotiate with a patient and with language they can understand,” she explained.


“You have to convert the medical diagnosis and treatment to lay language. I also have to keep them awake sometimes by letting them laugh because it relieves their tension and because the stuff I say is pretty awful.”
Helen told me that she practices “global preventative medicine.”

Helen’s tour through New Zealand in 1983 had a huge, and lasting, impact. At one stop, Helen addressed over 2,000 people at a public event in Auckland. The librarian with whom I corresponded looking for old newspaper reports of Helen’s visit, wrote to me:


“Her chillingly detailed description of the effects of a nuclear device detonated over the hall in which we were sitting remains rooted in my psyche to this day! …

The other message I most recall is the dichotomy she evoked between the destructive drive of ‘old men’ rulers, the instigators of war, versus the procreative energy of mothers most impelled to oppose them - which, however reductive, retains the compelling logic of a truism!”

Helen’s approach was transformative in New Zealand. Helen’s speaking events packed auditoriums, and overflows of audiences had to be accommodated using loud speaker systems.

People responded strongly to this woman, whose life work involved caring for children, speaking about medical effects of fallout, and speaking without the use of the clichéd military and defence ideological rhetoric that treated people as if they were simpletons who couldn’t understand.

Her speeches inspired people to act. After Helen spoke, the volume of mail delivered to my parliamentary office increased - particularly from women.



Related: Elections In New Zealand, Australia, Canada, England, Germany, The Netherlands & Exposed: Proof NZ Prime Ministers Are Globalists

On May 24, 1983, 20,000 women wearing white flowers and armbands and holding banners with peace signs marched quietly up a main street in Auckland to hold a huge rally and call for New Zealand to be nuke-free. It was one of the largest women’s demonstrations in New Zealand’s history.

In her book, Peace, Power and Politics – How New Zealand Became Nuclear Free, Maire Leadbetter writes:


“I am one of many activists who think of Helen Caldicott’s visit as the point when the peace movement began to grow exponentially… Helen had a magical ability to motivate previously passive citizens to become activists.”

Shortly after Helen’s visit to New Zealand, in 1984, I advised that I intended to vote for the opposition-sponsored nuclear-free New Zealand legislation. This prompted conservative Prime Minister Rob Muldoon to call a snap election. Muldoon told media that my “feminist anti-nuclear stance” threatened his ability to govern.

The new Labour Government of 1984 passed the New Zealand Nuclear Free Zone, Disarmament and Arms Control Act in 1987, the world’s first national nuclear-free legislation. Dr. Helen Caldicott’s influence had culminated in the passage of the cornerstone of New Zealand’s foreign policy.


New Zealand's Nuclear History?

Unfortunately, technically speaking, New Zealand is NOT nuclear free. We have food-irradiating facilities (sounds super healthy) and according to researcher Greg Hallett - a whole lot more in our past...

According to Hallett, "The Wairakei Geothermal Power Station was not for the production of power, but was built by the British Atomic Energy Commission to produce heavy water for the manufacture of nuclear weapons."

“The Wairakei Geothermal Power Station was a front for heavy water production to be used for nuclear power and the production of deuterium and tritium for hydrogen bombs. These were a thousand times more powerful than the first atom bomb and were first tested in at least three different locations."

...

“During the nuclear scare, Kiwis were buying houses in Taupo to be away from a nuclear blast, which they thought would be aimed at Auckland and Wellington.

The funny thing was, Taupo was the only nuclear target the Russians had in New Zealand. At least one nuclear weapon was aimed squarely at the Wairakei Geothermal ‘heavy water’ power station which produced much of the heavy water for the Western world.”


...

“But more importantly, New Zealand took over the production of nuclear detonators from Norway in 1961. Norway was producing detonators for nuclear bombs during and after World War Two and they paid quite a heavy price in casualties. After World War Two the Norwegians said, ‘A plague on both of your houses. Take this shit away’, and they stopped production."

“The Americans didn’t want the job as they’d be under attack, so New Zealand held its hand up highest and produced nuclear detonators in secret.

That’s Walter Nash’s duplicitous Labour government for you [1957–60]. He was charged with sedition while fronting as ‘a man of peace’ and producing nuclear detonators. No doubt he on-sold any secrets gained to the Russians. But this also has a more recent history to it.”

...

“If you went up the hill towards Eastbourne then took the alternative route through the gorse-covered hills to Wainuiomata at the back of Gracefield, there was a sign saying ‘Nuclear Research Facility’. This is where the firing devices for the nuclear blast at Mururoa were made.

New Zealand supplied the nuclear detonation gear to the French via the British. Yes, it was New Zealand that provided the detonation gear for the atmospheric nuclear tests at Mururoa Atoll from July 1966, and for the underground tests from 1975. "

...

“There was a big stink in the armed forces about the anti-nuclear protests because they violated secret military pacts that went back years. Labour wanted the military to act against the pacts and that’s why the military decided to take part in the killing of Prime Minister Norman Kirk."


...

“In 1981, the known gay and child sex abuser Colin Moyle was re-elected to Labour and became the Minister of Agriculture and Fisheries from 1984–90. He assisted the Russians in placing submarine locator beacons for Russian nuclear-powered submarines for a nuclear strike against America."

...

“Helen Clark’s anti-nuclear policy only applied to ‘American ships’. Russian nuclear-armed vessels were never questioned. Such duplicity is consistent with those converted to an agenda-driven ideology from a foreign country for non-national purposes, in exchange for hiding their sexuality. This results in treasonous activities tantamount to war – and that’s what we got so very close to – nuclear war from NZ.”


...

"New Zealand is the only ‘Nuclear-Free State’ that fails to put to print it’s history of manufacturing nuclear material. As well as ‘heavy water’, New Zealand also manufactured detonators for nuclear bombs and Prime Minister Muldoon was set on testing a nuclear power station in at least three different locations."


Related: The US Space Force Just Swore In Its First “Chief Of Space Operations” + Navy Patents UFO-Like Compact Nuclear Fusion Reactor And Hybrid Space / Sea Crafts


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
The Occult Origins Of Christmas
December 25 2023 | From: OmniThought / Various

What most people do not know about Christmas is that it is a ritual contract created by the Dark Forces to trick people to give them their consent.



What you need to know about rituals is that they have energetic binding forces attached to them.

Related: Occult Holidays And Sabbats: Why Holidays Are Satanic Rituals

These binding forces are not dependent upon personal knowledge or beliefs. By simply taking the ACTION to perform the ritual, the effects and results are achieved, and therefore the people who performed the ritual are bound to whatever the ritual is designed to do.

Christmas is saturated with occult symbolism linked to dark magic that is designed to bind you to the Christmas contract. This contract is used by the Dark Forces to drain your energy and enslave your soul.





However, when you become aware of it and remove your consent and stop performing the ritual known as Christmas, the magic spells of the Christmas contract cannot harm you anymore. Be aware that magic can be used for good or evil purposes.

If you have a hard time believing that magic is real, read my informative article titled How Words Can Be Used as Magic Spells. This article gives you a short introduction to how magic works. If you plan to celebrate Christmas, it would be wise to mediate before doing so.

During meditation, tell the Universe that you refuse to give your consent to the Dark Forces. Furthermore, tell the Universe that you are getting together on December 25th to spend time with your family and friends, not to celebrate Christmas.

When you say these things, your mind generates energy signatures and then projects them out into the Universe. These energy signatures tell the Dark Forces that you are aware of their Christmas contract and refuse to give them your consent.

If the Dark Forces do not honor your decision and harm you, they would violate your free will and therefore would have to face the consequences for their actions. All thoughts, intentions, and actions are known by the Universe and there is no escaping its laws.

I will be writing my own article about the hidden secrets of Christmas in about a week, so if you are interested in the occult version of Christmas, keep an eye out for it. - PL Chang

Is Christmas really magic mushroom, sun and Saturn worship in disguise?

Christmas has come around again, and as we all scurry about hanging lights and stars everywhere, and adorning our trees with red and white ornaments, how many of us reflect on the occult origins of Christmas? How many of us realize that this merry festival has roots, in fact, in ancient traditions of magic mushrooms, Saturn worship and sun worship?



Jesus again pictured in religious artwork with magic mushrooms [beneath his feet]

Related: Noel! Noel! An Occult Code

Today’s Christmas is truly a hodgepodge of ancient rituals and celebrations, with roots as far back as 4000 years to the Mesopotamians. This is not surprising, for Christianity itself is a borrowed religion, built on top of previous Coptic (Egyptian), Mesopotamian and Babylonian religions.

Christmas really has nothing to do with the alleged historical birthday of a human called Jesus. Let’s take a look at some of the traditions which have formed Christmas, so we can gain a deeper understanding of its symbolism.

The Christmas-Magic Mushroom Connection

John Allegro was a free-thinking Dead Sea Scrolls scholar and archeologist. In 1970 he wrote a fascinating and highly controversial book entitled The Sacred Mushroom and the Cross, whose subtitle was A Study of the Nature and Origins of Christianity within the Fertility Cults of the Ancient Near East. In it he put forth the unique idea that Christianity was an expression of an ancient cult which worshipped sex and mushrooms.





To straight-laced scholars and prim-and-proper Christian apologists, this idea was simply too much for them to contemplate, but Allegro (left) provided an impressive amount of evidence to back his claims.

He showed how the mushroom – specifically the red-and-white magic mushroom Amanita muscaria – came up again and again in Christian art.

He explained how the Eucharist – where Christians believe the bread wafer is transformed into the body of Christ – is a re-enactment of the sacred ceremony of ingesting the flesh of the Amanita magic mushroom.

Allegro argued that the entire story of the Jesus in the Gospels was a code for the ancient journey of conscious self-exploration, the hallucinogenic “trip”.

You can imagine how the majority of people reacted to his “sex-and-mushroom cult” theory in 1970 in England!

Yet his ideas have merit. James Arthur and others after Allegro further developed the idea of the Christmas-magic mushroom connection. 

Amanitas are also linked to fertility and sex; they have a sexual appearance, representing both the male and female. At different stages of their growth life cycle, they resemble a phallus, breast and yoni.

It is interesting to note that Jesus pictured in religious artwork with amanita mushrooms around him. Is the red-and-white Santa Claus or St. Nicholas a modern representation of the village shaman who had the knowledge of pharmacopeia? Is the holy grail actually the mature Amanita with its edges curled up? 

Is the Amanita magic mushroom the fabled Holy Grail?

Related: The Occult Symbolism Of The Vatican’s 2020 Nativity Scene

Were Amanitas the source of power and insight for the old ruling class of priests? And perhaps most importantly, what part does the Amanita play in humanity’s origins and the extraterrestrial Annunaki who were mining for “gold”? These are interesting questions to ponder as you decorate your tree in red-and-white with mushroom ornaments this year.


Note: Masonic and other insider have stated that the 'Holy Grail' actually has nothing to do with a cup or grail, that it is a veiled reference to the 'Royal Bloodlines'.


The Christmas-Sun Worship Connection

Thanks to groundbreaking research of investigators like Jordan Maxwell (whose work was the basis of one major segment of the hit movie Zeitgeist), people have begun to become aware of the link between Christmas and sun worship.

At its core, the Illuminati and secret societies that run the world are deeply into black magic, which, defined, is the use of mostly unseen and unknown forces to gain power and control over others. The Illuminati are black magicians.

They utilize certain powers and then, through their control of the media and academia, put out disinformation and lies to prevent people from believing in and accessing those very powers, lest their power base be eroded.



A typical Christian art interpretation of Jesus. Note the sun cross at the back

Related: The Unwrapping of Christmas

Christmas is all about the birth of the “son”. But what if it is actually the birth or rebirth of the “sun”? A sun that goes through a “spring”, ascends to a height (summer solstice), then goes through a “fall” (autumn)? Christianity tells us that Jesus the son is our savior. Yet literally speaking the “sun” is our savior; without the sun there would be little or no life on Earth.

So it is only natural that sun worship was practiced by early cultures all over the world, especially in the keys days following the winter solstice, when the sun disappears over the horizon in northern latitudes for 3 days. Jesus was dead for the 3 days. Is this the symbolic “death” of the sun?



Related: Christmas Is NOT Cancelled: My 2021 Holiday Message

December 25th is the first day when the son or sun makes his triumphant return. Many people make fun of early religions and brand them as primitive, without actually realizing that Christianity itself has either stolen or built upon (depending on your viewpoint) these exact traditions.

Is it purely a coincidence that the date of Christmas is always December 25th every year, exactly 3 days after the 22nd (or night of the 21st), the date of winter solstice? Is it another coincidence that Jesus is pictured everywhere throughout Christian art on top of a sun cross, showing the sun’s journey through the 4 seasons every year? Is Christmas an elaborate ritual to lure back the “prodigal sun” from death?


The Christmas-Saturn Worship Connection

Finally, we come to the Saturn connection. The Christmas-Saturn connection is far from the only connection Saturn has with many modern (dark) activities. Saturn is the ancient roman god of time, harvest, law, tyranny and death. In the ancient Greek pantheon he was Chronos, meaning time, and from which we get words like chronological.



Related: 2022 Review: When “Conspiracy Theories” Turned Into Obvious Realities

Saturnalia was an ancient Roman festival in honour of the deity Saturn, held on 17 December of the Julian calendar and later expanded with festivities through to 23 December. The holiday was celebrated with a sacrifice at the Temple of Saturn, in the Roman Forum, and a public banquet, followed by private gift-giving, continual partying, and a carnival atmosphere that overturned Roman social norms: gambling was permitted, and masters provided table service for their slaves.[1] The poet Catullus called it "the best of days."

For those investigating the global conspiracy, Saturn has particular significance. Why? Because Saturn – and what it represents – is the object of worship of some of the secret societies that are running the planet today. Indeed, the worship of Saturn is a theme running through the priest, the lawyer and the academic classes, as can be seen by the use of gowns and square mortarboards in the color of black – Saturn’s color.

To quote Jordan Maxwell:


“When you graduate from high school you come out processionally with a black robe … and wear the square mortarboard on top of your head. The square mortarboards are, of course, used by the Freemasons for their plaster, so that is why you wear a square mortarboard when you graduate, ultimately becoming an Alumni. It all has to do with Freemasonry; it all has to do with the control of education in this country.”

In the early first centuries A.D., Saturn had a very strong presence in the most powerful city in the world: Rome. Every year from December 17th to 25th, there was a wild, licentious festival in his honor, named Saturnalia.

For these 8 days of the year, people would cut loose in a period of utter lawlessness; Roman courts were closed and Roman law dictated that no one could be punished for damaging property or injuring people during the festival. 

There was widespread intoxication, people running around naked, rape and orgies. There was even human sacrifice – a theme that continues to underly some of the strange, dark rituals practiced by today’s ruling elite at places like Bohemian Grove.



Related: Occult Origins Of Santa Claus

According to some sources, Christmas was invented to compete with the pagan celebrations like Saturnalia, because it was just so popular. It was a successful strategy. Over time, the Church adopted many pagan rituals in their attempt to make Christianity more attractive to converts.


What Does Christmas Mean to You?

Ultimately, we all imbue our lives and activities with our own sense of meaning. You can decide what Christmas means to you.

However, it is always good to be aware of the occult origins and hidden symbolism of traditions and events, for as Confucius said, the world is ruled by signs and symbols, not words or law. Symbols communicate directly with our subconscious and guide our lives from behind the scenes, so choose consciously to which things you give your attention and energy.

Related: This Christmas We Don’t Need More Stuff; We Need More Love


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Globalization Of Media: A Failing Strike Force
December 24 2023 | From: JonRappoport / Various

[Archival] I begin this piece with three quotes from my work-in-progress, The Underground:



“There is a media metaphysics. Its basic principle states that nothing exists until it becomes information. Now we have a new twist: information only becomes real when it reaches a mind already attuned to it. In other words, the tree falling in the forest makes a sound only if a user/consumer who wants a tree to fall receives video and audio of the event…”

Related: Mainstream Media Achieve Historic Milestone + Trust This: New Zealanders Don't Trust MPs, Bloggers, The Media

“Information can be dressed up a thousand different ways. But it tends to have an ‘elastic’ quality. By that I mean you eventually get to see the person who dressed it up. That’s a problem for chronic liars who inhabit the press. They expose themselves, even though they don’t want to. It takes a surprisingly small push to expose the whole operation. This is happening now, right in front of our eyes.”

“The basis of big media is theater. News is theater. Its directors and producers think they’re doing a first-rate job. But they’re sadly mistaken. Gaps and obfuscations are growing larger. The outright non-sequiturs and gibberish are becoming more apparent. The audience is wising up to the farce. Who are these fools who direct the news?

They’re simply people who want to sell their souls and have found an elite buyer. But that transaction doesn’t contain any guarantees about shelf life. Mainstream news is decaying, and the expiration date is approaching. Like civilizations, the petty princes of information rise and fall…”

Globalized media. It’s nice plan. Let’s examine it.



Related: Western Media Credibility In Free Fall Collapse: Case In Point: UN Peace Council: The US Media Is Lying To The American people. The War In Syria Is Not A Civil War, It's A Proxy Invasion By The United States

The new technocratic media is based on profiling users. There is no impactful news unless each member of the audience is surveilled and analyzed on the basis of what he already likes and wants.

Shocking? It’s to be expected. How else would technocrats parlay the untold hours they’ve spent sizing up their consumers/users?

Several years ago, I wrote:


“Tech blather has already begun, since Jeff Bezos, CEO of Amazon, bought the Washington Post at a fire sale. Jeff Genius will invent new ways to transmit the news to ‘people on the go’ and make the Post a smashing success. Mobile devices. Multiple platforms.

Digital taking over from print. Ads customized to fit readers’ interests (profiling). News stories customized to fit readers’ interests (more profiling).”

In other words, non-news. If you thought media were irrelevant and deceptive before, you haven’t seen anything. The “new news” will create millions of virtual bubbles in which profiled users can float contentedly, under the cozy cottage roofs of their favorite little separate paradigms.

The tech giant Apple has waded into this territory with an app that will deliver news to users. Yahoo:


“Apple News, part of the upcoming iOS 9 operating system, aims to be the primary news source for users of the iPhone and iPad… Apple says its news app ‘follows over a million topics and pulls relevant stories based on your specific interests’…

Joshua Benton of the Nieman Journalism Lab said the app will be important because ‘through the awesome power of default, Apple distribution puts it in an entirely other league. This [news] app will be on hundreds of millions of devices within 24 hours of its debut’.”

Translation: Profiling their users down to their toenails, Apple will present them with virtual bubbles of news they want to see and read.

Not just one overall presentation for all; no, different “news outlets” for Apple’s audiences.

Related: I Used to Be a Human Being

This introduces a whole new layer of mind control.

“You’re an Obama fan? Here are stories confirming your belief in the Prophet.”

“You want neo-con on the rocks with a conservative Republican twist? Here’s some war footage that’ll warm your heart.”

“Do you believe ‘government gridlock’ is our biggest concern? Congress can’t get anything done? We’ve got headlines for that from here to the moon.”

“Tuned into celeb gossip? Here’s your world in three minutes.”

The idea: convince users, one day at a time, that what they already believe is important IS the news of the day.

It’s Decentralized Centralization. One media giant carving its global audience up into little pieces and delivering them a whole host of different algorithmically appropriate lies and fluff and no-context psyops.



Related: Obama Decries 'Wild West' [Independent] Media Landscape

And for “fringe users?” “You’re doubtful about GMOs? Well, look at what Whole Foods is planning for their healthier produce section. Cheer up.” Nothing about Maui voters declaring a temporary ban on devastatingly toxic Monsanto/Dow experiments or the dangers of Roundup.

“You’re anti-vaccine? Sorry, you don’t count. You’re not a recognized demographic. But here’s a piece about a little unvaccinated boy who was involved in car crash on the I5.”

Does this sound like science fiction? It isn’t. It’s the mainstream look of the near-future. Search engines are already “personalizing” your inquiries. US ABC national news is climbing in the ratings because it’s giving viewers “lighter stories,” and spending less time on thorny issues like the Middle East.



Related: Who Owns New Zealand's Media?

The mainstream news business is desperately looking for audience; and treating every “user” as a profiled social-construct-bundle of superficial preferences is their answer.

“Mr. X, we’ve studied the little virtual bubble you live in, and now we can sell you your own special brand of truth.”

“Hello, audience. We’re going to pitch you on becoming full-fledged obsessed consumers, as if there is no other worthy goal in life - and then we’re going to profile you from top to bottom, to find out exactly what kind of obsessed consumer you are, so we can hit you and trigger you with information that uniquely stimulates your adrenal glands…”

The one-two punch.





Trey Gowdy Joins Trump and Gives a Great Mainstream Media Attack






Any actual event occurring in the world will be pre-digested by robot media editors and profilers, and then split up into variously programmed bits of information for different audiences.

Who cares what really happened? In the new world, there is no ‘what really happened’. That’s a gross misnomer. A faulty idea. A metaphysical error.

No, there is only a multi-forked media tongue that simultaneously spits out a dozen or a hundred variations of the same event…because different viewers want and expect different realities.



Related: Hidden Truths About The Mainstream News Media

In 1984, Orwell’s Big Brother was issuing a single voice into the homes of the population. That was old-school. That was primitive technology. That was achieving unity by hammering unity into people’s skulls. This, now, is the frontier of unity through diversity.


“We want to make all of you into androids, through basic PR and propaganda and a pathetic excuse for education. However, we recognize you’ll become different varieties of androids, and we’ll serve that outcome with technological sophistication. Trust us. We care about what you prefer.”

User A: “Wow, did you see the coverage of the border war in Chula Vista?”

User B: “War? They had a fantastic exhibit of drones down there. At least a hundred different types. And then I watched an old WW2 movie about aerial combat.”

User C: “Chula Vista? They had a great food show. This woman made a lemon pie. I could practically taste it.”

User D: “That wasn’t a border war. It was a drill. And then afterwards, these cops gave a demonstration of all their gear. Vests, shields, communication devices, flash-bangs, auto rifles with silencers, batons. I watch drills all over the country. Love them.”

User E: “Chula Vista? The only thing I saw on the news was ‘sunny and mild’ this week. I watch all the weather channels. I love them.”

BUT when a Big One comes along, like the 2016 national election in the US, the separate tunes come together and ring as one. Then the overriding need to extend Globalism’s goals (in the person of Hillary Clinton) blot out every other priority.



Related: Alternative Media Is Winning: 60% Of Americans [ Read: The West ] Distrust Mainstream Media

Then the major media twist whatever they need to twist. Then it’s the same bubble for everyone.

One problem, though. Major media have been lanced thousands of times by alt news sites, and by Wikileaks and Project Veritas. This attack has exposed the truth and the Clinton crimes.

And alt news reflects the growing interest of the public in what’s actually happening on many fronts.

The technocratic plan for the news is failing.

It was a nice plan, but… It’s turning out to be a dud.

Alt media are forcing public awareness of one giant scandal after another: Hillary/Obama support for ISIS; pro-vaccine liars; the collapse of Obamacare; the GMO hustle; pesticide damage... on and on and on.



Related: Mainstream Media Manipulation / Controlling The Narrative + Mosaic Of Facts: Inside The Information War

The result? Major media are being backed into a corner, where they must defend lies and build monolithic lies for EVERYONE all the time. The idea of creating separate news for each profiled user is collapsing.

Major media are playing defense against the rest of the world.

It’s quite a party. And it has no expiration date.

A final note: Trump, Wikileaks, Project Veritas, Drudge, and many alt news sites created a perfect storm in 2016, raining down on major media.

It was and is unprecedented.

The mainstream press has been exposed down to its roots, as never before. The lying, the collusion, the arrogant sense of entitlement, the desperation, the corruption - it’s all there to see, for anyone who has eyes and a few working brain cells.

Expect more to come, regardless of the outcome of the election. The train has really left the station…


Dear Mainstream Media…

You f**king suck! You’ve almost succeeded in destroying the 4th estate and you should be ashamed of yourselves.

This is why 94% of the American people don’t trust you. When are you going to get that through your thick skulls?

You lie, you smear, you ingratiate yourselves with wanton abandon.

Dear mainstream media: You’ve betrayed your profession, sacrificed its once sacred principles, and stabbed the American people in the back.


 



Related Articles:

Six Giant Corporations Control the Media, and Americans Consume 10 Hours of ‘Programming’ a Day


Mainstream Media Insults The Public's Intelligence On Vaccines & Vaccinated Vs. Unvaccinated Pilot Study: Early Vaccination Sees Exponential Increase In Chronic Disorders + Lies, Vaccines And The New Zealand Media

CBS Reporter Calls Mainstream Press ‘Political Activists,’ ‘Propagandists’ + Max Blumental Proves Western Media A Propagandist For War Criminals

The Mainstream Media Lies

Degeneracy And Fundamentalism Of Western Media Control & Truth In Media

How To Spot A Media Psy-Op

How To Succeed In Western Media Without Really Trying & Britain Moves To Criminalize Reading Extremist Material On The Internet



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Energy Follows Thought
December 23 2023 | From: Omnithought / Various

We have all heard this phrase but I would like to go into a bit of depth as to what it means to raise it up a bit above a catch phrase or platitude.




It is a fundamental tenet of esoteric thought. Genesis tells us that "In the beginning the Earth was null and void and darkness was upon the deep". The first question that should bring to mind is "what is the deep?"

Related: New Mind-Blowing Experiment Confirms That Reality Doesn’t Exist If You Are Not Looking At It

Comment: This article sounds a bit religious but the message is more a spiritual one, rather than of the 'God' of any given theology.

We’ll get to that in a moment. This nothingness then stirred and God said "Let there be Light", and divided light from the darkness. It was an act of pure spiritual will through the use of the divine mind. We haven’t actually divided the light from the darkness (its obvious source) only the idea has actually been created. A thought either created or accessed by the divine mind.

The mind created the idea before the will was able to manifest it, empowered by the desire to see it manifest. This is "the deep." The astral or desire plane is always associated with liquid and usually water.

It is interesting also that instead of just doing it we see that God crystallized this idea or thought form in a mantra or word of power; "Let there be light," and then created a physical plane change through his desire.



Related: In Harmony With All Life: The Open Source Way + Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality

Thus the first manifested result of the omniscient being at the center of our system is organized sound, or vibration, and after that all that will ever be in the world is a product of vibration. The word Logos is used to describe this entity in manifestation and literally means "word".

Now why is any of this important? This first act of creation out of the mind of God is repeated in every other creative act on every level in every plane and it is used by you and I to create our world. We have talked about resonance and how we attract into our reality the things we think about most, but when we conceive of an idea and build a better mouse trap we are the creator in the microcosm.

Nothing is created without first being imagined. There has to be that moment when the creator says “wouldn’t it be cool if…” in this case the rest would be “there was light”. The image making faculty of consciousness is the mind. When we visualize and idea we are creating an image.

The energy and potential of the thought form is based on the ability of the consciousness that created, accessed, or simply organized it. We do this constantly but with little result because we are not very good a focusing our minds. The idea may just pass.



Related: Your Brain Is Not A Computer

If the desire is strong enough then it is brought into physical “reality”. It is and always has been energy and has simply been organized at different levels until it has fully crystallized. The will of God creates through the love of God as do you and I.

The organizing force in this process of creation is mind. It may be the universal mind or the mind of an individual creator of some level of consciousness like that of a Logos or a human being. The process is the same. Creation is governed by the intelligence of the system.

The third ray of mind or intelligent activity gives birth to the four subsidiary rays of aspect. Only in manifestation are these aspects realized. The trinity itself stands in its potentiality even in the divine plane of Adi as the supposedly un-manifested self.

When we imagine or visualize something we are building in mental matter. Although it is interwoven with desire, another necessary aspect of the process, the mind is always the organizing force. If we are effective at visualizing what we want to “see” come about we will be more effective at bringing it about.



Related: How Society Kills Our Creativity – In A Breathtaking Award-Winning Short Film

Visualization is an important aspect of meditation because of this. We are learning to create and through training we are taught to visualize in accordance with the things that the teacher see’s and knows as fact. The creative process and the ability to make changes are being used along proven lines and will be improved greatly.

We will eventually find our way but time can be gained through a guided and monitored approach to occult meditation. There are pitfalls that can be avoided on the way.

What we need to keep in mind is that there is a collective human consciousness that is creating all the time as well.

Groups and subgroups of subconscious and super-conscious entities creating in mental and astral matter and this is what decides the directions our in which societies move.

There is a unique way that each nationality approaches life because of its group identity. It is responsible for the beautiful colorations in cultural expression throughout the world and the thought provoking effect that is the result of some one individual swimming upstream.



Related: How Thoughts Create Atoms And Emotions Formulate Time

It is fairly easy for us to create in line with the over-riding dream of our society and the planet herself, but to create something extraordinary requires much more personal power. These are the people we say are on a mission and will not be denied.

Their vision is so clear and the desire so strong that nothing will deter them from seeing is brought to a reality. This is why the training in business can produce, once a redirection of focus is triggered, a student of the spiritual sciences that will excel in these endeavors as well.

This is the reason for goal orientation and all of the attention that gets in business training. We want to be more effective in bringing about change on the physical plane and the only way to do that is to learn to focus our minds and visualize first.

The first creation is not done on the physical plane.



Related: Research Shocks Scientists: Human Emotion Physically Shapes Reality

Everything we see in the physical world was first created on the mental plane. The energies were organized by the mind and brought to be through activity fired by desire. Think about the word “emotion” for a moment and how we express ourselves in this area of our lives.

We can be “moved” or “affected” by a person or a situation or even a song.

Emotions are what move us to move. If you want it bad enough you’ll go get it. It is not enough by itself but neither is the mind.

We have to be harmless in our intentions and balance and align all aspects of ourselves to our real purpose, and then we can create true beauty.

Gandhi once said “be the change you want to see in the world”.

Creation starts within.


Related Articles:

Energy Depletion In A Human Being

Science Confirms That People Absorb Energy From Others

Dr. Russell Blaylock Explains Why The Masses Are Becoming Cognitively Retarded And Incapable Of Rational Thought

You Are Being Programmed: Five Ways Your Thoughts Are Being Driven Against Your Own Self-Interest


Brainwashed: The Goal Of The Media Is To Poison The Minds Of The Masses With Toxic Hatred And Engineered “Thought Loops”

Nineteen Ways To Question Your Reality

CIA Document Confirms Reality Of Humans With ‘Superhuman Powers’


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

In Harmony With All Life: The Open Source Way + Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality
December 22 2023 | From: RobertDavidSteele / KosmosJournal

We do not need a new paradigm but rather a return to the original indigenous paradigm that treated the Earth as a sacred Mother and understood that God was all of us, in harmony with one another and the cosmos, living by one principle (do no harm) and one practice (seventh generation thinking).



The Industrial Era has been both a blessing and a curse. It has radically altered the quality and diversity of life for a billion humans but it has also come at a great cost: the repression in extreme poverty of the other five billion; the eradication of thousands of species; and the destruction almost to a tipping point of the Earth.

Related: This Is How Your ‘Aura’ Affects Your Health & Those Around You + Magnetic Fields Of The Human Body And
Their Functions & 13 Signs You Are Experiencing A Spiritual Awakening


Changes to the Earth that used to take ten thousand years now take three years or less. In combination, colonialism, militarism, and capitalism have squandered the wealth of the Earth, creating an elite 1% that profits from the misery, enslavement, and deception of the 99%.

A revolution is in the making, aided by the Internet. Pockets of cultural and ecological wisdom, both indigenous and modern, are now connected at the same time that the lies - such as the 935 lies that led us into the elective war on Iraq - more easily detected.

Still absent is a precipitant of revolution - our Tunisian fruit seller - and a groundswell of demand for the fundamentals of conscious evolution, the tools for information-sharing and sense-making as a collective, a new civilization, one without corruption and waste, both made possible by transformative politics, which is to say politics with integrity, based on evidence, and in the public interest.

How are we to achieve this mass elevation of humanity in the face of what some call the looming ‘sixth extinction?’ I offer three visual interventions for reflection.


Electoral Reform

With a humble apology to all of those fighting for climate change and other worthy causes, I will tell you what I told Tom Steyer: no amount of money or protest will lead to an honest hearing for any single issue as long as we continue to have a rigged system in which two parties control the public treasury and 70% percent of all eligible voters are disenfranchised.

While I speak of the US in this instance, the same conditions apply in most countries, where virtual dictatorships and virtual fascism (control by banks) is the common standard.



Electoral Reform Act of 2016

I tried eight times over two years to connect with Bernie Sanders. Note that point twelve would have assured him the nomination and he, not Hillary Clinton, would be facing off against Donald Trump today, at the same time that Gary Johnson and Jill Stein would be viable nominees given the Instant Run-Off reform (point ten) as well as all the others.

The current effort to re-ignite a race war in the US, with leftist billionaires funding Black Lives Matter protests and fascist billionaires funding white paramilitary shooters killing cops and seeking to place the blame on blacks, will fail. To their credit, black leaders have identified the twin elements of this strategy.

The race war is intended to distract us from the fact that it is now clear to most that we are in a fight between the 1% who have destroyed the Earth and the hopes of humanity for their own selfish profit, and the 99% capable of creating infinite wealth.



Open Source Everything Engineering (OSEE)

I wrote the book itemizing over sixty opens, The Open Source Everything Manfesto: Transparency, Truth, and Trust, and subsequently developed, with Michel Bauwens and Marcin Jacubowksi, the below starting point for radically expanding public appreciation for what an open source everything mindset can accomplish.


Open Source Everything



Using this approach, I was able to document how one million Somalis could be moved from ghastly United Nations resettlement camps in Ethiopia, Kenya, and Uganda, back to an uncontested portion of Somalia (the northeast) with three things only in abundance: dirt, sunlight, and seawater.

For a one-time cost per person of $500 (i.e., $500 million total), I documented how we could provide them all with free energy, water, housing, food, and communications.


End All Waste

We can not only lift up the five billion poor, we can eradicate waste, now documented at 50% on average across agriculture, energy, housing, health, and security, among the one billion ‘rich.’ The below diagram shows how we do that, with a tip of the hat to co-creator Bojan Radej of Slovania.


The Waste Eradication Tri-Fecto

We do not lack for money on Earth. We lack for applied collective intelligence with integrity. We lack the precipitating event that will spark the revolution in which we all say “ENOUGH!” to predatory capitalism, unilateral militarism, and virtual colonialism.

What we have in abundance, what we have repressed for centuries, is the human imagination. Electoral Reform and Open Source Everything Engineering are the twin pillars of our liberation.



Lifting The Veil: Merging Science And Spirituality


Something miraculous is happening. The invisible is becoming visible. Human consciousness is taking a quantum leap into territory previously unknown as what began with just a few saints, sages, gurus, and a Savior is awakening in the hearts and minds of millions around the globe.



Human evolution is undergoing a profound shift; the proof can be seen with the naked eye. This shift is causing millennia-old beliefs and social structures to be scrutinized like never before - perhaps for the very first time.

Related: Spirit Led Activism - The True Power Of The People + Rites Of Passage - Encountering Spiritual “Initiations” On The Path

Even world-renowned physicist Dr. Stephen Hawking ditched his prior position in his book, The Grand Design: “belief in a creator was not incompatible with science” and now concludes that the Big Bang was as inevitable as gravity.

As science moves closer toward solving the Unifying Theory of Everything, would Dr. Hawking have changed his mind one more time?


Unifying Everything

What is presently emerging out of a weary world filled with very little practical value is a new and quantifiable reality being built by those already embodying a more expansive understanding of who we are and why we are here.

Most of us without a doubt have begun to ask questions - perhaps for the first time in our life. Whether you view current events as the end of the world or a new Golden Age is entirely dependent on whether you are bound by separation consciousness or have expanded beyond it into something new.


“There are only two ways to live your life. One is as though nothing is a miracle. The other is as though everything is a miracle.”

– Albert Einstein

What is currently crumbling around us is the fruit of humanity’s misguided labor, along with a planet stressed by an outdated and unsustainable human belief system. Most human suffering is self-created and derived out of inherent ignorance and limitation found in separation consciousness.

Separation consciousness is the belief that we are separate from one another, our environment, and even God.

Separation consciousness is the veil itself.


Separation Not Real

Just as its definition implies, a veil obfuscates a sun hidden by clouds, yet the sun remains ever present. Until recently, only a small number of people have transcended separation consciousness for humanity’s next stage of evolution: unity consciousness.

Whether you / we destroy ourselves is dependent on our ability to make the evolutionary leap from separation to unity consciousness where human suffering ends.



This is both the warning and reward contained within a universal prophecy spanning many cultures in various forms. The prophecy lends itself to both the physical and metaphysical planes of our lives.

With media focus on humankind’s struggle to emerge out of our collective cocoon of separation, we may be left blind to the miracle that is taking place right under our noses.

The biggest story of the millennium is the reality that millions are waking up to the realization that all life is irrevocably interconnected as the One - it always was. Most of humanity was still too unevolved to “get it” until now.


The Veil is Lifting

What unifies us and all of Creation is contained within the very air that we breathe. The all-pervasive answer to the riddle of the mystery of Life is hidden within the question, enigmatically lingering within reach. It is both the tangible and intangible aspects of our world as the scientific and unscientific.

Call it by any name you wish and you’ll find it there. The secret key that unlocks the end of human suffering is contained within you as your desire to know. Have you discovered it yet?

If you believe in a higher power or organizing force - and even if you don’t - when you awaken, you will be struck with the realization that the power that fuels and binds all of the Universe is not an outside intelligence.

What not even famous cosmologist, Dr. Stephen Hawking, biologist, and atheist Richard Dawkins or even Pope Francis have yet grasped (publicly) is that the creative power that unifies us is Creation itself. There is no separation.


'God' is Creation

Creation was not a singular event, but by self-definition, it will continue into perpetuity. What is so shocking is that this means that science and religion are not in opposition of one another, but are simply left- and right-brain interpretations of the One.



Our quest for knowledge of the One is the quest for reunion with and as the One. Joining hands in a way that has been all but forgotten, darkness turns to light. Fear becomes love. Competition changes to cooperation so that lack becomes abundance.

Unworthiness becomes value that ends racism, genocide, and slavery. Our planet is restored to good health.

Personal peace and of Peace on Earth depend on a new, more evolved understanding of God. It’s our time to thrive!


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Rise And Rise Of Control-Freak Government
December 21 2023 | From: BreakingViews / Various

The ancient Greeks left us several words describing various forms of government: Democracy, Autocracy and Oligarchy, to give just three examples.



But there was one omission, probably because it describes a type of administration that the Greeks never envisaged. For want of a better term, I’ll call it control-freak government.

Related: Why You Really Really Should Disobey

This is a form of government in which policy-makers, politicians and bureaucrats constantly devise new ways of controlling our behaviour on the pretext that they have to protect us from our own foolishness. Perhaps we could call it a bullyocracy.

Control-freak government is based on the supposition that we’re all basically incapable of making our own responsible decisions.

We need paternalistic minders and a suffocating regulatory regime to stop us from getting into trouble.

This busybody culture pervades our lives slowly and insidiously, eventually reaching the point where we become so accustomed to it that we assume it’s the natural order of things and accept restrictions on what we can do without a murmur of complaint.



Related: Groundswell Building For A While & Ardern’s Nightmarish Weekend

In the meantime it restricts individual autonomy, erodes personal responsibility and piles needless extra costs on society.

One tiny example: Small-scale cheesemaker Biddy Fraser-Davies recently protested that at least half the $40,000 annual income from her four jersey cows gets swallowed up by government fees.

Fraser-Davies, who farms near Eketahuna, has been hounded for years by food safety officers from the Ministry for Primary Industries. This, incidentally, is the same government department that turns a blind eye to the large-scale, illegal dumping of fish.

Elderly women (Fraser-Davies is 74) are clearly a much more tempting target than big, hairy fishing companies . She says she was recently billed $10,000 for testing 10 of her cheeses and calculates the cost comes to $240 per kilo.



Related: Ardern Intent On Smashing Free Speech

On radio recently, she recalled that after she featured on Country Calendar in 2009, the Food Safety Authority pounced within minutes because it had no record of her having filed a risk management plan. I suppose we should be impressed by the authority’s 24/7 vigilance (it was a Saturday night, after all), but this suggests an almost obsessive level of control-freakery.

To my knowledge no one ever fell sick or died from eating Fraser-Davies’ cheeses, unless she’s buried the bodies somewhere on her farm. Perhaps the MPI should send some men to start digging the place up.

To her credit, she refuses to be cowed by the public-sector commissars. This sets her apart from most timid New Zealand business owners, who keep their heads down and meekly comply. Presumably, getting offside with the enforcers is more trouble than it’s worth.

The MPI justifies its cheese-testing regime because there’s a theoretical risk of harmful pathogens. Eliminating risk can be used to justify all manner of bureaucratic meddling. It’s all part of the grand mission to create a perfect world where Nanny State keeps us all safe.



Related: Jacinda Ardern’s COVID Treason + Global Uprising Underway

A priceless example was the edict that went out years ago forbidding brass bands from playing on the backs of trucks. I must have missed the news reports about hapless tuba players toppling from truck decks and being crushed under the wheels while playing God Rest Ye Merry Gentlemen in Christmas parades.

Perhaps I also missed hearing the anguished cries of builders and roofers plummeting from house rooftops. There must have been an epidemic of such deaths to justify the requirement that safety scaffolding now be erected around the roofs of houses under construction.

I'm told even chimney sweepers are now saying they can’t work without protective scaffolding, which can bump up the cost of the job from $200 to $1000.

It goes without saying there’s an element of risk in many undertakings. The crucial consideration should surely be whether the action taken to minimise risk is proportionate – or, to put it another way, whether the cost of trying to eliminate risk far outweighs any possible benefit.



Related: State Control: The Government Of Prime Minister Jacinda Ardern Is Shaping Up To Be One Of The Most Controlling In New Zealand’sHistory

Compulsory scaffolding around rooftops may have averted a few broken limbs, but at what cost to house owners and home buyers?

The police, too, have been captured by a control-freak mentality. Just look at their heavy-handed enforcement of liquor controls. Wellington Police have an “alcohol harm reduction officer” (how Big Brother is that?) who gives the impression of being on a moral crusade.

And while police numbers are stretched and burglars are able to strike with apparent impunity, there always seem to be enough officers to operate drink-drive checkpoints in the hope of nabbing some harmless mug who’s unwittingly had one glass of sauvignon blanc too many.

It’s another case of low-hanging fruit. Burglars are hard to catch; women on the way home from bowls, not so much.



Related: Lindsay Perigo: New Zealand Is A Police State

Speaking of which, I wrote a column in this space roughly a year ago criticising the lower drink-drive limits introduced in 2014, which I predicted would catch out responsible, otherwise law-abiding people while hard-core recidivist drunk drivers would continue to behave as they always had.

I also said I would quite likely get pinged myself, since the new limits had made it much harder to judge when you were at risk of breaking the law.

My column attracted a pompous response from an overpaid poo-bah in the New Zealand Transport Agency. He wrote that there was no such thing as safe drink-driving, thus confirming what I’d suspected: that the objective of the law change was to deter us from drinking altogether.

But here’s the thing: road deaths have increased since drink-drive limits were lowered, from 293 in 2014 to 319 in 2015 and 263 so far this year compared with 253 at this time last year.



Related: Drunk-Driving And Fake-Science

It’s a crude measure, admittedly, but it reminds us of what the economist Milton Friedman said about the folly of judging things by their intentions rather than their results.

Of course a few more country pubs have gone out of business in the meantime, because the people who previously socialised in them are terrified of having one too many and getting caught.

But why should the city-dwelling bureaucrats worry? They never drank in them anyway. And if they go one over the limit at a fashionable Thorndon café, they can just call a cab.

Theirs is a different world from the one inhabited by the people whose lives they seek to control.


Related Articles:

Harvard Professor Exposes Google And Facebook & NZ Police Trialled Facial Recognition Tech Without Clearance

The 1963 List “Current Communist Goals” Is Becoming A Reality Right Before Our Eyes

Fear Is Contagious And Used To Control You & The Fascist Scale Revisited

We Don’t Need Government, We Need Purpose

Inflation: The Most Evil Threat = Governments Robbing Their Citizens

Republic Or Democracy And Self-Governance

Academic Warns: Young People’s Ignorance Of Socialism Risks “Absolute Catastrophe” & Goodbye Free Internet, Government Is Already Here

Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Dark Web Isn’t All Dark
December 20 2023 | From: TheAtlantic / Various

Despite its reputation for illegal activity, much of what goes on underneath the surface of the internet is legit.



Drugs, child porn, hitmen for hire: The dark web doesn’t have a particularly glowing reputation. When the leader of a illegal-drug marketplace called the Silk Road was arrested in 2013, many were introduced to the hidden side of the internet for the first time as the home of the notorious “eBay for drugs.”

Related: Dear Clinton Team: We Noticed You Might Need Some Email Security Tips

But because of how the dark web is organized - or rather, how it isn’t - it’s nearly impossible to determ - focuses on the strange and unusual: marketplaces for stolen Netflix credentials, personal data, and even paywalled academic research.

But the dark web and Tor, the privacy-preserving browser that’s used to access hidden sites - called onions - have myriad legitimate uses, too.

New research from Terbium Labs, a company that analyzes the dark web, took a small snapshot of onion sites - a random collection of 400 sites its web-crawling robots had found in the course of one day in August - and divided up the sites based on their purpose and content.

The results suggest that less than half of what goes on beyond the reach of search engines and traditional browsers is illegal.



Related: How To Access The Dark Web

The rest, it turns out, is legitimate, made up of dark-web mirrors of websites like Facebook and ProPublica, websites for companies and political parties, and forums for chatting about technology, games, privacy, or even erectile disfunction.

In addition, as on the “clear” internet, a good chunk of the webpages Terbium studied hosted legal pornography: photos, videos, and written material, available for free or for sale.

“Anonymity does not equate criminality, merely a desire for privacy,” wrote Clare Gollnick and Emily Wilson, the authors of the Terbium study.

That’s not to say the slice of the dark web that the analysis looked at didn’t have its fair share of unsavory and illegal material.

More than 15 percent of the sample was made up of sites selling drugs or pharmaceuticals; pages with content related to hacking, fraud, illegal porn, or terrorism turned up at least once. (A lot of these same categories of websites can be found on the clear web, too, hosted on sketchy domains or protected by passwords.)



Related: New Zealand Follows Communist China In Erecting “Great Firewall” Of Internet Content To Block All Independent Journalism About The Mosque Shootings

Terbium obtained the sample for the study with the same scanner that powers Matchlight, a service I’ve written about before that crawls shady forums and marketplaces on the dark web and the clear web in search of stolen sensitive or personal data.


“We’re trying to index what people don’t want indexed,”
Danny Rogers, Terbium’s CEO, told me earlier this year. “There’s no desire to make things easy to find. Fundamentally, it’s a more hostile environment to crawl.”

That makes studying the dark web really difficult. Terbium’s researchers acknowledged that their study is limited by its scope and the decisions that human analysts made in categorizing the websites the crawler came across. To complicate matters further, the dark web is notoriously transient, with some sites disappearing after only hours.

Just a week passed between the day Terbium took its dark-web snapshot and the day its analysts began categorizing the sites, but some amount of the 18 percent of non-functioning URLs the analysts found may have gone down even in that short a time.

The Terbium study only examined the makeup of a small chunk of the dark web - not the traffic patterns that show where users actually tend to visit. A 2014 study determined that more than 80 percent of visits to the dark web were to child-porn sites.



Related: ExtremeTech Explains: All About The Dark Web, And How To Use It + How To Start Browsing The Web Anonymously

But, as always, it’s hard to know just who those visitors were: That traffic could have come from bots, law-enforcement agencies investigating illegal porn sites, or even a cyber attack directed at the sites.

What’s more, the hidden sites on the dark web like the ones Terbium studied probably only make up a tiny part of the internet as a whole. Estimates from Tor itself show that the number of hidden sites has hovered between 5,000 and 6,000 over the last year - and that only about 2 percent of traffic on the Tor network is visiting them.

Most people who use Tor use it to browse the clear web while preserving their privacy and anonymity.

The network allows users to visit a normal website without revealing the types of information that are often used to track people as they make their way across the internet.

Tor’s privacy-preserving features can be particularly vital to journalists, human-rights advocates, or political dissidents operating in countries hostile to their work.


Related Articles:

WWW Founder Tim Berners-Lee working On A New Decentralised Web

New Zealand Shooting Being Used By Governments To Create An Internet Police State

The Real Reason Why The UN Wants Control Over The Internet

If You Question The Establishment You Are Guilty Of Espionage, Says Corporate Media - Because Russia + The “Fake News” Furor And The Threat Of Internet Censorship


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Listen Up Truth-Seekers: We’re On The Same Team
December 19 2023 | From: WakingTimes / Various

The justice-seeking community are a funny bunch. We’ve all got our differences, including the various ‘beliefs’ we have, but ultimately we’re on the same team. You’d think we would be acting like it too, but unfortunately we’re not. 



It’s clear that the divide and conquer strategy is in full swing, even among the truth and freedom movements. What’s the D&C strategy I can hear some of you ask?

Related: Combating The Elite Rulers Divide And Conquer Tactics

It’s when the powers-that-think-they’re-the-overlords use informational tactics to divide the people so they fight one another, instead of collectively facing the real issues.

And god dammit they’ve been successful.

There’s covert powers who are in control? I would suggest we engage some simple logic with this one. To start, money rules the world. better put, they can digitally punch numbers into a computer and POOF, currency is created.

Now these banksters control the central banks and therefore control the governments. Enter the two-party tyranny system we call democrSo, who owns the money? The banksters of course.

Their scam is so brilliant that they can create money out of thin air, oracy. Both sides work for the same financial interests, which are not just limited to the banking industry, but the energy, pharmaceutical and media corporations too, among many others.



Related: The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised

Essentially, we are ruled via a highly integrated corporatocracy, regardless if you understand it, or believe it to be true.

This control-system is a sick beast. It’s out of alignment with natural law, which essentially means that it disrespects the golden rule. In layman’s terms, this universal law is to do no harm, respect each others shit, honor your contracts; that sort of thing.

Because the matrix of control aims to impose their centralized global dictatorship on all of us, including the disgraceful methods they’re choosing to achieve it, they’ve broken this divine contract. Therefore, their so-called ‘power’ is undermined by their own actions.

They essentially make themselves obsolete.

But we cannot keep our heads in the sand and do nothing; we still have to deal with this layer of truth in one way or another. After all, no great organizational change occurred by riding unicorns and staring at pretty fucking rainbows.

Simply, we have both a material and energetic responsibility to face this cancer of an order and replace it with something truly made out of justice and honor.

What then, should we replace it with? Well, this is one of the million dollar questions.



Related: Governments: The Enemy Of Freedom & Globalists Interviewed: They Admitted They Controlled The Government

Some people are fundamentalist anarchists who want zero government. Now I might be off target, but at least hear me out and then disagree with me if you wish.

Personally I find that proposition unrealistic, especially until every person in every country is at some stage of enlightenment where they won’t try to monopolize, tyrannize, subjugate or apply an array of other tactics of suppression, coercion and control.

In other words my view is that we ned to utilize the current operational system, at least in the transitional phase, because groups of people still exist who will fuck others over given the chance. So it makes more sense for ‘the people’ to ethically take control of the governmental system and transform it into one that honors the golden rule, at least initially.

Now I might be wrong about this, and I’m perfectly okay with that. And that’s my point; we can disagree about exactly where we go from here, but we still need to mobilize a voluntary team otherwise we’re all likely to be royally fucked.

I also see the inherent value of a money-less society because money itself is an evidence-based tool of scarcity, and therefore enslavement. It also naturally breeds excessive competition, inequality and greed. This approach could be achieved via some form of abundance-based economy, but I do realize this futurist design is unrealistic, at least in the short term.



Related: Many Scientific “Truths” Are, In Fact, False + A Scientist Explains Why "Everything Is Fucked"

But once again, I don’t have all the answers. No one does. I would suggest that most of us don’t want to be ruled, and therefore we’re all anarchists in the pure sense of the word, and that’s the first principle we can unite on. But how we transition to a ruler-less world is yet to be determined.

After all, oligarchical and tyrannical systems have been the norm throughout our so-called civilized history, not the exception.

So, given we need to integrate to undermine the mechanisms of the control-system, where are we at?

Unfortunately, the alternative media is in tatters. We’ve recently had a couple of big names surrounded by big controversy, causing further division. Many people are violently arguing about the shape of our reality.

The conspiracy rabbit hole and it’s multiple tunnels of truth and untruth have left many people poorly focused, as well as the truth-seekers significantly divided. The competing views on Trump has also resulted in more infighting.

In addition, many people think they have their shit sorted and are ‘enlightened’, but few appear to remember they’ve continuously changed their minds and behaviors since birth. Even if they have a good idea of what the fuck is going on, many fail to realize that this ride of ‘waking up’ is a journey, not a destination.

For example, there’s a couple of quotes which have been shared tens of millions of times, which say something like ‘be the change’ and ‘I’m wise so I change myself’, but they’ve been disgraced by all those who don’t bother to truly live by them.

The hypocrisy and inaction among the truth-seekers is painfully obvious.

Yet, we’re all hypocrites to one degree or another. We’re all going to evolve our beliefs in some way too. If we truly accept that we all have our weaknesses and contradictions, and that we’ve got philosophical and behavioral refinements that we’re yet to undertake, then it makes it very easy to accept one another as comrades.



Related: Degeneracy And Fundamentalism Of Western Media Control & Truth In Media

And it’s absolutely necessary at this point too. The concerning reality is that the entire freedom movement is in danger of becoming a running joke, not just to the outsider curtain hangers, but internally as well.

That’s one of the reasons why we really need to start fresh. If we begin by accepting that none of us 100% know what has, is and should be, then we will create a level playing field where we all have an opportunity to volunteer as equals on the team of truth and freedom.

If so, we will actually have a strong shot at finally unifying, which is the only bloody way we’re going to get anything seriously done.

Of course we’re already moving in a general direction, and there’s many agreements already subtly made. For example, it’s fairly clear there are certain concepts and primary targets that have manifested as a pattern within the independent media and the progressive mindsets. What follows, therefore, is a simple merger strategy that’s based on a few core values, and a few core systemic areas.

So let’s see how this resonates. In terms of values, do you personally agree with the following?

1.
We value love over hate.

2.
We value truth over lies.

3.
We value freedom over enslavement.

4.
We value happiness over suffering.

5. We value honor over disrespect.

6.
We value cooperation over competition.

7.
We value family and community over money.

8.
We value health over business.

9.
We value peace over war.

10
We value justice over injustice.


Sound fair? I’m going to assume that’s a yes, because otherwise you need some serious self-healing. Sorry (not sorry) to be so blunt, but your-self and your fellow-man are not your enemy.

In addition, if we agree on these values, they must be applied in every area of discourse. Of course there are areas where competition for example has its place, such as sport, but there is still cooperation first and foremost otherwise the game wouldn’t even be played.



Related: Liberty Or Freedom

So if these values can stand the test of time, that also means they will naturally dissolve any so-called rules and laws that contradict them.

In terms of the systemic issues, let’s see if we can at least agree on the Four M’s as our primary targets for change, which are Money, Medicine, Media and Management:

1. Money should be a sovereign public utility, not hijacked by private stakeholders and converted into a transnational banking cartel.

2. Medicine (including food) should be as natural as possible, as well as be inexpensively available to all who need it, not monopolized by the multinational giants and perverted into the toxin-rich, addictive and unnatural substances we have today.

3. Media should be based on truth, authentic journalism and what’s best for the people, not propagandized to create minions of the failing system.

4. Management of our society should be designed by and for the people, not by and for the corporate and oligarchical structures.


Is that fair too? Does the whole lot sit well with you? Let’s bloody well hope so.

So in saying all this, and of the thousands of people who read it, what will actually change to unite the world’s justice-seeking communities?

To be straightforward and realistic, most likely fuck all. In truth, I actually could care less if it’s this proposal either; if a group would like to design a basic unification strategy that we can agree on, please do so. No matter how it happens, it just needs to happen, and that’s the most important thing.



Related: Pulitzer Prize-Winning CNN Journalist Busted For Fabricating Fake News, Resigns From CNN + Google Gestapo Goes Full Nazi Against Independent Media - Hiding “Controversial Content” And “Redirecting” Searches

However, we really do need to show some solidarity, so this has been created as an opportunity for the fragmented independent media to stand together on some core values and systemic focal points.

We’re all in the position to share this information through our networks too, so if you more or less agree with this strategy for unification then there is nothing stopping you from doing so.

In addition, the recent issues arising from two key voices in the independent media has further shown that we shouldn’t be rallying around individuals, but instead be binding around some very simple and key agreements.

If so, we could use them as a framework for publicly debating how they relate to the behavior of governments, corporations, oligarchs and the system itself.

By continuously saturating our agreements and discussions into the collective consciousness, more and more people – working both inside and outside of the system – will be emancipated from the delusions they’ve been programmed to have.

After all, people are just people, and most of them deep down want the best for their fellow-man.



Related: Edward Snowden: 'The People Are Still Powerless, But Now They're Aware'

It would then continue as an education process for everybody who needs it, based on any agreements made. And as Max Igan suggests in the below interview, we could also organize a global day of protest to show unification around our quest for truth and freedom.

In any case, I primarily wrote this as an energetic injection because I know that somewhere lurking just beyond the veil, the many movements for truth and freedom have an innate capacity to put their differences to the side and come together as a peaceful force to radically transform our world into one of honor and justice.

Could this happen soon? Who knows; we’ve all been pleasantly surprised before.

For further information regarding where we’re at, and where we’re going, watch this new interview with the infamous Max Igan.




Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Former Kissinger CEO Says The World Is Run By 30 Families
December 18 2023 | From: Hiduth / Various

A former CEO for Henry Kissinger has said that he believes just 30 families run the world, and that these families are the driving force behind the New World Order.
[Archival but Relevant]



David Rothkopf, author of ‘Superclass: The Global Power Elite and the World They Are Making,’ and former CEO of Kissinger Associates, says that 30 families and their 6,000 minions control the entire human race of six billion people.

Related: Obama At United Nations Calls For America To Be ‘Bound By International Laws’ Give Up Control

His findings mirror a study conducted by the Federal Institute of Technology in Zurich which found that a mere 147 corporations (out of 40,000 studied) had real power and influence in the world economy. All of these 147 companies had interlocking Boards of Directors.



Related: Ten Signs The Global Elite Are Losing Control

Video Rebel’s Blog reports:

Currently, this One World Corporatocracy uses the United States and the European Union to consolidate and wield power over the entire globe. But there are vulnerabilities in the world of Wall Street Globalism. The EU appears to be disintegrating.

The ECB (European Central Bank) under the ex-Goldman Sachs VP Mario Draghi seems to be as suicidal as His Japanese counterpart. And America is stretched thin by its constant warfare. Russia Today said the US had military operations in 134 countries in 2014.

Wikileaks, Snowden and others have revealed way more truth than the public can digest.

The US has been funding Al Qaeda and ISIS. And now Putin has shown his superiority by being able to actually find ISIS and bomb them into oblivion.

The only economic and military advantage America had is about to disappear. Dr Michael Hudson wrote Super Imperialism in 1972. That was the year after Nixon closed the Gold Window on August 15, 1971 and the year before Henry Kissinger’s invention of the Petrodollar in 1973 after the Arab-Israeli war.



Related: The 147 Companies That Control Everything

Hudson went to the Pentagon and the State Department in 1972 to explain that the US was making nations overseas pay for their occupation by American troops by accepting worthless Federal Reserve Notes in exchange for real goods and services.

When an American general finally understood what Dr Hudson was saying about foreigners paying for their own occupation, he exclaimed, “We’re ripping people off.”

The days when The Federal Reserve could print stacks of dollars to the moon and the Saudis could fund the US budget deficit with their oil revenues are rapidly coming to an end. Very soon American politicians will have to recognize that we can no longer afford all of those wars and forget about over 700 military bases overseas.

The American consumer will have to deal with the doubling of the price of imported goods. Of course that will mean a drastic drop in the American standard of living which will lead to instability at home. This cold light of economic reality will force America to either start WW III or go home.



Related: Henry Kissinger, War Criminal Extraordinaire: What You Need To Know About His Real History - And Why The Sanders / Clinton Exchange Matters

Most sane people would like to avoid either a thermonuclear war with Russia or a conventional one as they have far superior weapons. American politicians and the Pentagon spent $400 billion on the F-35 which does not work. Russia is too poor to spend trillions of dollars on failed projects so the Elite can line their pockets at our expense.

What would be nice is for American voters to join with the citizens of Europe, Asia, Latin America, Africa and the Mideast in their revolt against Globalism. That is to say the workers of the world unite to end Global Occupation by Bankers.

The following describes an eleven point program to undo what has been done to us by design. But first I need to explain what causes Depressions.

Ask your friends what a Depression is. Most answers will describe the effects, such as, unemployment, starvation and bankruptcies. Depressions are solved by cancellation of debts either through discharge in bankruptcy court or by inflation devaluing the real value of the burden of debt.



Related: Motives for the Conspiracy

The third alternative would be for the government to void Unpayable Debts as the Kings of ancient Babylon and Sumer did. We would need to devise a more sophisticated plan as those were relatively simpler agricultural societies.


I would like to make 11 suggestions which can both end a Depression and take down our Banker Occupied governments:

1) Offer $25,000 in debt cancellation to every adult US citizen who is not institutionalized. This should be an international effort so people in foreign countries will get equivalent amounts in pounds, euros and other local currencies.

This is to be financed by seizing the assets of financial war criminals that were stashed in Liechtenstein, the Cayman Islands and other such offshore money laundering centers.

We need to get the assets of the private banks and the account numbers of all the corporations and the trusts the criminals who declared war against us.

2) Seize all the assets of war criminals. A lot of assets have been converted into real estate. In America we also have problems with mortgages. To evade taxes and to intentionally create clouded titles to homes the war criminals created the Mortgage Electronic Registration System (MERS). I would suggest that MERS be made illegal and require all mortgages be registered at reduced rates at the local county courthouse. I would give everyone 90 days to register for a clear title.

I would also challenge the title to every property to show that it did not belong to a corporation or trust fund owned by a war criminal. For example, if a shopping mall is owned by a corporation, the actual people who own the shares must identify themselves.



Related: Financial Times Calls For Abolishing Cash In Order "To Give More Power To Central Banks"

The World Bank did a study of 213 banking scandals and found that 150 were traced bank to offshore trusts linked either to drug cartels or to the 30 or so families whose wealth has been fully invested in slave trading, drug smuggling and other crimes against humanity for centuries.

All of these assets need to be seized so we can cancel debts and get the economy moving again. We also need to take away their assets not just because they were stolen from us but to reduce their ability to wage war against us to zero.

We can take the seized real estate and use it to fund Social Security and stolen pension funds.

The seized stock and bond assets should also be used to fund public and private pensions and to cancel government debts. I would also use the tens of trillions of dollars in government agency assets listed at www.CAFR1.com to cancel debts and fund pensions.

3) All federal, sate and local government debt should be made illegal. President Lincoln (and Kennedy (both assassinated)) issued Greenbacks which bore no interest. Greenbacks eliminated the need for bonds to be issued.



Related: The Quadrillion Dollar Derivative Debt And The “Bail-in”: When You Deposit Funds In A Bank, It Becomes “Their Money”

4) I would issue a non-interest bearing currency in America and require the same of any foreign country that would want our assistance to cancel their government and personal debts.

It was the Federal Reserve Act of 1913 that allowed bankers to create money out of nothing and charge us interest.

That interest was designed to transfer all wealth from us to the bankers. It created Unpayable Debts which grow at exponential rates due to the law of compound interest.

Since prices are a ratio of the Money Supply to goods and services for sale, if we increase both at the same rate, we would have price stability. We could at current rates spend 535 billion dollars a year into circulation. We could create 535 billion dollars and spend it without raising taxes to pay for it. If we increased the GDP and the Money Supply to twice our current levels, then we could spend a trillion dollars a year into circulation while maintaining stable prices.


5) I would spend 200 billion dollars a year to repair America’s infrastructure.
We have spent too much money on foreign wars so our infrastructure is collapsing.



Related: There’s something behind that

I would divide up 100 billion dollars a year amongst the 50 states on a proportional basis so a state with 2% of the US population would get 2 billion dollars to spend on bridges, roads, dams, levees, water purification plants, sewers and school buildings. This would be matched by another 100 billion dollars in federal infrastructure repair.

6) I would make pensions illegal. A pension is a promise to pay you something in 20 or 30 years. These pension funds currently attract maggots seeking to feed on your retirement funds. I would pass a law saying that your employer must pay you this year for any money that was intended to be set aside for your retirement. This money would go into a retirement account in your name at a local cooperative trust. Neither politicians nor anyone from Wall Street should ever be allowed to touch your retirement funds.

7) Use those cooperative trusts to overpower Wall Street and the City of London. Allow them to offer low interest credit cards and consumer loans.



Related: Henry Kissinger Calls for a New Post-Covid World Order

Let them issue simple life, fire and auto insurance. Plow the profits back into retirement funds. Commercial banks would be geared to small businesses.

8) To boost the economy release all of the secret government technology to new corporations that would receive the patents and a 5 billion dollar grant to bring cheap and abundant energy and other advances onto the market. If needed, they could trade patent rights for regions overseas in exchange for the machinery needed to produce products in America.

Shares should be issued to American citizens who are over 35. If a stock valued at $50 splits 6 times in 20 years, then it will be worth $3,200 and ten original shares would be valued at $32,000. They will need the extra growth in their stock portfolio more than couples 18 to 30 who have longer growth curves and can expect to retire with a million dollars in stocks.

Young people would no longer contribute to Social Security. Their employer would pay into their retirement account at their cooperative trust but they would pay nothing to Social Security.

If a married couple making no more than the minimum wage were able to set aside everything they paid into Social Security into a mutual fund, they would retire at age 65 with a million dollars. That had to be said for the benefit of those who do not understand money and compound growth.

9) Make fractional reserve banking illegal. In 1348 the people of Venice were on a gold standard. If you deposited one gold coin, the banker could loan 50 certificates said to be equal to 50 gold coins. The banker was allowed to collect interest on that paper note as if it were 50 gold coins.



Related: Why Do We Allow Private Banks & Families To Control The World’s Money? + The Truth Is Out: "Money" Is Just An IOU, And The Banks Are Rolling In It

This system collapsed even though the people had a gold standard. Bankers pay people to spread false doctrines about the gold standard. The bankers have stolen most of the gold and would love a return to the gold standard. But to function as money the medium of exchange must be plentiful enough so everyone can buy and sell.

The only way a gold standard could work is if we allowed bankers to loan out 100 or more paper certificates in exchange for each gold coin. That would impoverish us with interest payments on money the Bankers created out of nothing. Sound familiar?


10) Make property taxes on a primary residence illegal.
A home should be one of the primary savings plans for retirement. Taxing homes harms taxpayers. It should no longer be the policy of the government to do harm to us.

Property tax revenues would be more than balanced by the cancellation of state and local debts and 200 billion dollars a year in federal capital grants. And all those new infrastructure workers will be paying taxes.

11) Establish an incomes policy. My goal is self-determination for the working class. The current government is bankrupting small businesses and the middle class while encouraging welfare dependency.

I would make the first $30,000 a year on a single person or $60,000 for a married couples tax free. I would give the custodial parent $600 a month for the first child and $400 a month for the second child. Nothing for additional children except in cases of twins and triplets.

I would also change the name of the IRS to Internal Revenue and Benefits Services. I would also take away their armed agents and their police powers. A separate police force would be responsible for arresting tax cheats. The IRS has killed too many innocent Americans for them to survive without a serious overhaul.



Related: CAFR (Comprehensive Annual Financial Report) Collateral Accounts: Taxes And Government Fraud Against Citizens Around The World

I would also pass a negative income tax. Under this system a person making $8.50 an hour would be paid $1.50 an additional hour by the employer from federal sources. Under this plan a married couple both working 40 hours a week would earn a guaranteed $40,160 a year tax free. If they had 2 children, they would receive $1,000 a month or $12,000 a year for a total of $52,160 tax free.

I would pay for this in part by ending the wars and the surveillance state. Someone said we spent 7 trillion dollars on wars we did not need after we allowed Israel to blow up the World Trade Center. I also would no longer allow bankers to steal 3 billion or more dollars a week from unaudited federal spending.

We should also eliminate a lot of federal, state and local jobs and even entire departments. We currently have 30 million federal, state and local government workers if you count contractors.



Related: Creepy Globalist Bastards Going All In On Mass Surveillance & Why A Global Government Is The Ultimate Goal Of Billionaires

I would eliminate most tax deductions. I would trade your interest rate deduction on a home mortgage for the elimination of property taxes on a principal residence. And I would trade your tax exemptions for children by paying you $12,000 a year for the first two children.

Eliminating tax deductions would pay for a greater part of the reforms we need. Any deduction that gives you a thousand dollars gives others $100,000 in tax breaks.

An oil man once paid $17.95 in federal income tax on an income of $75,000,000. That was when tax rates were higher but deductions still shifted the burden to the middle class. By giving married couples $12,000 for children, we will make the flat rate tax fair for the middle class.

We need strong middle and working classes to counter the power of Wall Street. By creating our own currency and making home ownership more affordable and getting control of our retirement funds and savings in co-operative trusts, we will guarantee that the Elite stop all this nonsensical talk of killing a few billion of the common people.


Related Articles:

Henry Kissinger & Bill Gates Call For Mass Vaccination & Global Governance

Hillary Clinton Praises Kissinger’s Upcoming Book: World Order

Kissinger Admits Plan for New World Order

Kissinger and the Destruction of Sovereign Nation States


Kissinger: "Control oil and you control nations; control food and you control the people."



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Nutrition And Mental Health + ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist
December 17 2023 | From: BePure / Sott

Last week I attended a conference by Dr Julia Rucklidge from the University of Canterbury where she presented her groundbreaking research on the treatment of mental health disorders such as ADHD, bipolar, depression and anxiety using therapeutic doses of micronutrients.



More and more we are seeing that what we eat, and what we absorb from our food choices, affect more than our physical appearance and physical fitness.

Related: Nutrition And Mental Health

Yes these things are important, but actually there are numerous benefits to eating a nutrient-dense diet with supporting products that don’t get mentioned. And they should. Our mental health is something that affects every interaction we have with ourselves, our families, our work colleagues and our friends.

The takeaway message from this conference is the prevalence of mental health problems in the modern world is concerning. According to Dr Rucklidge:


“There is a very real danger of mental health care bankrupting our society in terms of cost and social implications.”

In this blog I’m going to address the link between nutrition and mental health. There are many other factors involved in the prevention and treatment of mental illness. We are only addressing nutrition in this blog as it is such an important factor to consider.


The Whole Picture

One in ten New Zealanders are on antidepressants. This is an eight-fold increase in total prescription numbers from 1998.

There has been a four-fold increase in claimed disability financial support due to psychiatric disorders in New Zealand from 1991 to now. Both these figures are supplied through Statistics New Zealand’s annual reports.



Related: Getting Real About What Depression IS and ISN'T

In a period of time where more “cutting edge medicines” have been researched, developed and trialled on our population, rates of mental health disorders continue to rise.

The long term results from the National Institute of Mental Health’s (NIMH) MTA study found that children taking medication for ADHD for longer than 24 months showed “significant markers not of beneficial outcome, but of deterioration… medicated children were also slightly smaller, and higher delinquency scores.” Source: The MTA cooperative randomised clinical trial.

It’s fair to say our current gold standards are not working, so what else has changed in this time period?



Food And Stress

This increase in mental health conditions follows the same exponential rise of obesity and type two diabetes from the 1970s to now. We know that the rise in medical knowledge and the availability of medications hasn’t resolved the problem, nor has a 300% increase in gym memberships, so what has changed to negatively affect our mental and metabolic health?



Related: A Mind of Your Own with Guest Dr. Kelly Brogan

I firmly believe, and the evidence supports this idea, that what we are eating and the nutrients we give to our bodies drastically affect our weight, energy, metabolic health AND mental health in both negative and positive ways.

For many people gluten, refined grains and sugar can cause problems affecting everything from digestion, mood, skin disorders like rashes and eczema, to joint pain, weight gain, migraines, thyroid disorders, mental health disorders and behavioural issues such as ADHD.

For an extensive list of gluten-related symptoms, check out this list.

Gluten is a protein found in wheat, barley, and rye, and is what gives bread its stretch. Many nutritionists now believe many people - not just those with gluten intolerance or Celiac Disease - should avoid gluten as it is a known contributor to leaky gut.



Related: Simple changes to your diet can help with mental health issues

This is problematic for mental health conditions because if serotonin is not kept within your gut and digestive tract, it cannot engage in chemical reactions within your brain to increase your mood.

Refined grains and sugar cause blood sugar spikes and energy crashes as insulin is produced to mitigate the quick rush of glucose and fructose. You can read in length about the problem with refined grains and sugar.

Lastly, the stress of modern living has a huge impact on our mental health. Cortisol is a stress hormone that is activated by everything from traffic, fighting with a loved one, worry, anxiety, excessive caffeine intake and even exercise. Cortisol initiates our fight or flight response in our nervous system. In ancestral times this response was necessary for fleeing from danger.



Related: Sadness: The Problem and The Solution

In the modern world, we perceive danger to be everywhere (i.e we release cortisol) despite the fact we aren’t running away from a lion. This constant flood of cortisol prevents our “rest and digest”  nervous system from operating. This prevents recovery from exercise or the day’s stressors, the production of growth hormone and serotonin as well as preventing sleep and digestion.

Managing stress is critical for those people with mental health concerns.



The Brain Gut Connection

Current research in the field of microbiome health and mental health conditions confirms the theory our stomach is our second brain. There are several reasons for this. The first is Serotonin.



Related: What Does Your Illness Mean?

Serotonin is your happiness hormone. It is a neurotransmitter that relays messages from all areas of your brain to your cells. An imbalance or deficiency in serotonin is thought to influence the brain in a way that causes depression.

Up to 70% of your bodies total serotonin lives in your digestive tract. If you have leaky gut, a food intolerance or gut dysbiosis through poor diet or antibiotic use, the serotonin can leak out of your gut and is then unable to do its job in your brain.

The second factor has to do with the nutritional and energy demands of our brains. Our brains are approximately 2% of our body weight. However, it consumes 20-40% of our metabolism. In other words, it is constantly and disproportionately demanding nutrients and oxygen. One litre of blood enters your brain every minute, carrying whatever nutrients it has access to.

Giving it nutrient dense food and access to as many nutrients as possible is critical for mental health.



So What Can We Do?

Dr Rucklidge’s research suggests we need to ensure good nutrient-density in our diets and use therapeutic doses of micronutrients to support mental health conditions.



Related: 5 Stages of Transformation


“Micronutrients such as zinc, vitamin D, Essential Fatty Acids and many more have been used in many open label trials across anxiety, sleep issues, bipolar disorder and ADHD.

All have shown significant reductions in psychiatric and psychological symptoms. Response rates range from 50-80% improvements."

Source: Dr Julia Rucklidge at the University of Canterbury.

The current medical model seeks to use medication first before addressing stress, food, sleep and nutrient deficiencies. I would personally love to see this equation flipped. If we can address dietary and lifestyle factors first, along with nutrient support, while using medication sparingly on a case-by-case basis, we can greatly improve the mental health of our nation.

If you or a loved one are currently struggling with depression-like symptoms, bipolar ADHD or anxiety please seek assistance. You can contact your GP or health care provider, the BePure team at info@bepure.co.nz, www.depression.org.nz or the depression helpline at 0800 111 757.


Related: German psychologists declare "the drugs don't work"


Renowned Harvard Psychologist Calls ADHD A Fraud That Only Benefits The Pharmaceutical Industry

Viewed by academics as one of the most influential psychologists of the 20th century, Jerome Kagan ranked above Carl Jung (the founder of analytical psychology) and Ivan Pavlov (who discovered the Pavlovian reflex) in a 2002 American Psychological Association ranking of the eminent psychologists.



He is well-known for his pioneering work in developmental psychology at Harvard University, where he has spent decades documenting how babies and small children grow, and is an exceptional and highly-regarded researcher.

So it may be surprising to learn that he believes the diagnosis of ADHD (attention deficit hyperactivity disorder) is an invention - and only benefits the pharmaceutical industry and psychiatrists.


Mislabeling Mental Illness


"That is the history of humanity: Those in authority believe they're doing the right thing, and they harm those who have no power", says Jerome Kagan.

In an interview with Spiegel, Kagan addressed the skyrocketing rates of ADHD in America, which he attributes to "fuzzy diagnostic practices."

He illustrated his point with the following example:

Say fifty years ago you have a 7-year-old who is bored in school and exhibits disruptive behavior. Back then, he would be labeled as lazy. But today, that same child is said to suffer from ADHD. That's why we've seen such a dramatic increase in the disorder.

Every child who is having problems in school is sent to see a pediatrician, who then claims it's ADHD and prescribes Ritalin.


"In fact, 90 percent of these 5.4 million kids don't have an abnormal dopamine metabolism. The problem is, if a drug is available to doctors, they'll make the corresponding diagnosis," he said.




Related: Does ADHD Really Exist!? This Is Why French Kids Don’t Have ADHD


"We could get philosophical and ask ourselves: "What does mental illness mean?"

If you do interviews with children and adolescents aged 12 to 19, then 40 percent can be categorized as anxious or depressed.

But if you take a closer look and ask how many of them are seriously impaired by this, the number shrinks to 8 percent.

Describing every child who is depressed or anxious as being mentally ill is ridiculous.

Adolescents are anxious, that's normal. They don't know what college to go to. Their boyfriend or girlfriend just stood them up. Being sad or anxious is just as much a part of life as anger or sexual frustration," Kagan told Spiegel.


What are the implications for the millions of children who are inaccurately diagnosed as mentally ill? Kagan believes it's devastating because they think there is something fundamentally wrong with them.

He's not the only psychologist to raise the alarm about this trend, but Kagan and others feel they're up against:


"An enormously powerful alliance: pharmaceutical companies that are making billions, and a profession that is self-interested."

Kagan himself suffered from inner restlessness and stuttering as a child, but his mother told him: "There's nothing wrong with you. Your mind is working faster than your tongue." He thought at the time: "Gee, that's great, I'm only stuttering because I'm so smart." If he had been born in the present era, he most likely would have been classified as mentally ill.



Jerome Kagan


ADHD isn't the only mental illness epidemic among children that worries Kagan, depression is another.

In 1987, about one in 400 American teenagers was using an antidepressant. By 2002, the numbers leaped to one in 40.

He feels it's another overused diagnosis, simply because the pills are available.

Instead of immediately resorting to pharmaceutical drugs, he thinks doctors should take more time with the child to find out why they aren't as cheerful, for instance. At the very least, a few tests should be carried out - and an EEG for certain, especially since studies have shown that people who have heightened activity in the right frontal lobe respond poorly to antidepressants.



Kagan remembers going into a textbook-type depression after a major research project he was involved with failed. He had insomnia and met all the other clinical criteria for depression. But since he knew what the cause was, he didn't seek professional help. After six months, the depression was gone.

Under normal circumstances, he would have been diagnosed as mentally ill by a psychiatrist and put on medication.

But here lies an important distinction: when a life event overwhelms us, it's common to fall into a depression for a while. But there are those who have a genetic vulnerability and experience chronic depression; they are mentally ill.

It's crucial to look not only at the symptoms, but the causes.

This is where psychiatry drops the ball, as it's the only medical profession that establishes illness on symptoms alone.

Such a blind spot opens the door for new maladies - like bipolar disorder, which we never used to see in children. As it stands today, nearly a million Americans under the age of 19 are diagnosed with it.


"A group of doctors at Massachusetts General Hospital just started calling kids who had temper tantrums bipolar. They shouldn't have done that. But the drug companies loved it because drugs against bipolar disorders are expensive. That's how the trend was started. It's a little like in the 15th century, when people started thinking someone could be possessed by the devil or hexed by a witch," said Kagan.

When asked if there are alternatives to pharmaceutical drugs for behavioral abnormalities, Kagan said we could look at tutoring, as an example, for kids diagnosed with ADHD. After all, it's never the ones who are doing well in school that are diagnosed, it's always the children who are struggling.

Related: ADHD Is A Fabricated Disease, Says Reputed Neurologist


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Flawed Germ Theory; Unfortunately The Basis Of Modern Medicine
December 16 2023 | From: Tbyil / Various

Ever wonder why modern medicine is not helping the populations of the western world to become healthier? Maybe the foundation for health is wrong.



Pasteur's germ theory of disease has helped forward the one germ for one disease concept that has raised Big Pharma to the wealthy business of developing drugs for one germ to purportedly cure one disease while causing autoimmune and chronic diseases to flourish from destroyed immune systems.

Related: Cover Stories Are Used To Control Explanations & Medical Propaganda Headlines For Gullible Minds


Germ phobia, here comes the flu, get your flu shots or you may wind up as one of the 36,000 who manage to die from it each year according to the CDC. It's never more, never less - 36,000 deaths each flu season. Isn't there something fishy about that?

Then get out the antibiotics for every case of the sniffles. Don't forget the pharmaceutical antiviral Tamiflu, expensive, not so effective, and dangerous. The germ theory has turned out to be great for the pharmaceutical business model.



Related: Patients at risk and billions of dollars being wasted because of tests, scans and procedures that don't work

Now we have those nasty mosquitoes carrying the Zika virus, which has no real history of being problematic. So spray everything and everyone with toxic chemicals that do cause disease. And let's not forget those new vaccines. Over a billion dollars of government money has been recently set aside for Zika virus research and vaccines.


Why the Germ Theory is Flawed

The following quote is used by Dr. Robert O. Young in his book Sick and Tired?: Reclaim Your Inner Terrain:


“If I could live my life over again, I would devote it to proving that germs seek their natural habitat - diseased tissue - rather than being the cause of the diseased tissue; e.g., mosquitoes seek the stagnant water, but do not cause the pool to become stagnant.”

-
Dr. Rudolph Virchow (Father of Pathology 1821 - 1902)

Related: Shocking Report from Medical Insiders: a shocking amount of published research is unreliable at best, if not completely false, as in, fraudulent

Pasteur was the original scammer of the germ theory, not considered a worthy scientist by his peers. But he had good press. Media bias and corruption are nothing new.

Other scientists, especially Claude Bernard, claimed the inner terrain, which includes overall and organ specific pH levels and all facets of the immune system countered Pasteur's one germ for one disease theory with claims of pleomorphism within damaged or diseased tissue, which the Medical Mafia and Big Pharma refused to acknowledge.

Pleomorphism was proven when Royal Raymond Rife's universal microscope in the late 1930s revealed structural changes in microbes, up to 16, according their host's environment.

Microbes can start out as benign then alter themselves to survive if one's inner terrain is unhealthy.



Related: The Hypnotic Symbols Of Modern Medicine

In other words, inflammation and tissue degeneration with acidic pH levels attract pathogenic microbes or encourage existing ones into morphing as pathogenic microbes if already present and harmless or even beneficial.

The germ theory hoax is the basis of modern pharmaceutical medicine and killing good food with pasteurization and irradiation.

Not only do our highly acidic junk and processed foods with add sugars promote acidic pH levels under 7.3, so do overworking, stress, and anger.

The combination of our environmental toxic load and inadequate nutrition lead to the stagnant pools within our tissues that become the breeding grounds for existing or new pathogenic microbes to thrive.

Detoxing and seeking fresh whole foods with the proper supplements offer more disease protection from germs than all the vaccines in the world.




Related: Why Medically Caused Deaths Continue To Be Ignored

Vaccinations offer the following tradeoffs for thwarting germs: Death, lifelong disability, or most commonly autoimmune disease vulnerability.

Haven't you noticed? Autoimmune diseases and allergies have risen with the rise in vaccination schedules.

There have been studies in the USA among Amish children and in Europe among those raised on small dairy farms that demonstrate how being exposed to germs at an early age exercises the immune system and make it stronger, thus rendering natural immunization.

This is where rude, crude, over the top and hilarious George Carlin comes in:




Another Reason to Not Trust the CDC's Fear Mongering

Sharyl Attkinson was the news producer for CBS's Washington Bureau. During the Swine Flu “pandemic” of 2008-9, she was intent at getting to the truth of just how much of an epidemic it really was.

Sharyl, who is now independent with her own website and her book Stonewalled in circulation, questioned the authenticity of the CDC's reportage on incidents of Swine Flu.




Related: Sharyl Attkinson On The Hypnotic Power Of Germ Propaganda

After being stonewalled by the CDC with her Freedom of Information (FOI) requests for detailed statistics on the Swine Flu, she and her CBS Washington Bureau news staff did an end around – they went directly to state health departments and discovered only a very few flu cases, mostly single digit numbers, tested positive for Swine Flu.

Those numbers were not nearly enough to justify claims of a level 6 pandemic, considered the most severe and dangerous international pandemic level.

Then the CDC attempted damage control by announcing they had stopped counting because there were millions of Swine Flu cases and they couldn't keep up with it.



Related: A Primer For The Propagandized: Fear Is The Mind-Killer & Whistleblower: Newspaper Industry Chiefs Criminally Negligent Over Covid Scaremongering

Wow, if the first lie doesn't work then tell a bigger one, even if it doesn't make any sense at all. This incident forced Sharyl out of mainstream news. Can't question the CDC on mainstream TV.

You're better off sticking with alternative media and holistic health approaches for establishing a stronger immune system by lessening your toxic chemical load and increasing your nutritional level with organic foods and supplements.


Related Articles:

Louis Pasteur, Antoine Bechamp and the True Causes of Disease

The Deeper Reason For Drug Ads On Television & The Pharmaceutical Industry Is Largely Run By Leftists, Stunning New Research Finds… Vaccine Mandates, Drugging Of Children, Chemotherapy And More

Faking Medical Reality

Fluoride Officially Classified As A Neurotoxin In World’s Top Medical Journals & Perfluorinated Chemicals (PFCs) Found In Nearly Half Of All Fast Food Wrappers From McDonald’s, Burger King, Starbucks And other Food Retailers

Modern Medicine: How Healing Illness became Managing Symptoms for Profit


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
We All Have PTSD (Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder)
December 15 2023 | From: TheEpochTimes / Various

Two years ago, reports started appearing that compared the effects of lockdowns with post-traumatic stress disorder.



As it turns out, one of the symptoms of PTSD is forgetting what happened.

Related: Stress Hijacks Your Immune System Making You Physically Ill: Study

It’s an evolved trait that helps the human mind cope with terrible things. Our brains are good at blocking it out. I will explain the neuroscience behind this in a bit but first an anecdote from this morning.

I was speaking to the director of a childrens’ choir and he was speaking about an age gap in his singers. The lead singer just graduated high school, and the next oldest singer is 14, which creates huge problems for the choral competence.

I hesitated to do it but I finally just observed that this 3-year gap fits exactly with the lockdown period, child masking, and Zoom school.

He began to speak about what it was like to train a choir on Zoom and then conduct masked singers outdoors on winter nights. He recalled the attacks and the difficulties, and then his voice trailed off.


"Actually I’ve blocked out that whole period of life from my memory. I won’t think about it anymore. Anyway, I need to circulate a bit here but good seeing you.”

That was that.

It got me curious about the relationship between selective memory and trauma.



Related: Ten Myths Told By COVID Experts - And Now Debunked & How Far Down The Road To Tyranny Have We Come And Why Are We Still Travelling Along It?

For a long time now I’ve noticed that when this subject comes up, the response is either to quickly change the subject, which is common, or dig deeper into what seems like a bit of catharsis. Some people have so much to share, so many painful memories, so much shock and abuse to report, that once they start they cannot stop talking.

This one comment from this one choir director got me suspecting that vast numbers of people might be trying to forget it all.

This is how the political debates manage to pretend like this never happened, how the major media gets away with never bringing it up, and how people like Fauci still get high speaking fees, and so on. It’s not just that they are no-good liars; too often it’s because people really do want to forget.

This is how the number one most shared trauma of our lives is fading so fast into the national and global consciousness.

It’s a well-known feature of child or spousal abuse. The memories are so terrible and grim that the human mind develops the capacity for pretending like it never happened if only so that life functioning can continue.

This is fine but actually the trauma is still there and feeds other forms of pathologies like substance abuse and attachment disorders and so on. The point of therapy is to come to terms with the reality itself in the process of healing.



Related: Having Depression And Anxiety Means Having A Brain Constantly At War With Itself

Some years ago, a theory developed to explain this and it was tested on mice. I’m going to quote directly:


"Two amino acids, glutamate and GABA, are the yin and yang of the brain, directing its emotional tides and controlling whether nerve cells are excited or inhibited (calm).

Under normal conditions the system is balanced. But when we are hyper-aroused and vigilant, glutamate surges. Glutamate is also the primary chemical that helps store memories in our neuronal networks in a way that they are easy to remember.

GABA, on the other hand, calms us and helps us sleep, blocking the action of the excitable glutamate. The most commonly used tranquilizing drug, benzodiazepine, activates GABA receptors in our brains.

There are two kinds of GABA receptors. One kind, synaptic GABA receptors, works in tandem with glutamate receptors to balance the excitation of the brain in response to external events such as stress.

The other population, extra-synaptic GABA receptors, are independent agents.

They ignore the peppy glutamate. Instead, their job is internally focused, adjusting brain waves and mental states according to the levels of internal chemicals, such as GABA, sex hormones and micro RNAs. Extra-synaptic GABA receptors change the brain’s state to make us aroused, sleepy, alert, sedated, inebriated or even psychotic.

However, Northwestern scientists discovered another critical role; these receptors also help encode memories of a fear-inducing event and then store them away, hidden from consciousness.”

To test the theory, researchers infused the hippocampus of mice with gaboxadol, a drug that stimulates extra-synaptic GABA receptors.

The mice were put in a box and given an electric shock. When the mice were returned to the same box the next day, they played with no memory of what happened the last time they were there.

However, when scientists put the mice back on the drug and returned them to the box, they froze, fearfully anticipating another shock.



GABA: Gamma Aminobutyric Acid

Related: Finally, a Drug-Free Fix for Depression, Anxiety, Pain and Tinnitus

The lesson here is that “in response to traumatic stress, some individuals, instead of activating the glutamate system to store memories, activate the extra-synaptic GABA system and form inaccessible traumatic memories.”

Is this what has happened to humanity on a global scale, some kind of activation of our extra-synaptic GABA systems to permit the formation of huge barriers around our trauma to make our memory inaccessible? Perhaps.

At the time of Fauci’s strange deposition, I suspect that there was some brilliant madness behind the claim that he could not remember. He said it hundreds of times, again and again on every subject.

It was strange, almost like he was training the rest of us to do the same, like some mad scientist modeling the correct way to think about what happened to us. In his view, we shouldn’t think about it at all.

We know we’ve been made the subject of some insane medical and political experiments.

It’s perhaps also true that we’ve been made the subject of some malicious psychological experiments, like mice injected with drugs, put in a box, and then shocked. It’s like perhaps the ordering was different: we were put in a box, shocked, and then given drugs.



Related: The Deliberate Manipulation of the Human Nervous System via Pulsed Microwaves + ELF

In any case, it all does indeed feel like PTSD, and it affected no population cohort as traumatically as it did the children. They are owed the truth about the trauma, however, and now. We must have honesty about this.

The lies have to stop. We should not tolerate them at all. And the professional liars all need to be removed from their jobs immediately.

In our own lives, we really do need therapy that comes in the form of friendships, community, and physical fellowship with each other. Sadly, the people who need it the most are least likely to get it.

I’m thinking of the many people who are still walking around masked up, fearing getting next to others, and otherwise hiding out in their homes in a sense of terror that something bad from the microbial kingdom is going to attack at any time.

The only people who benefit from our mass amnesia are the people who did this to us. We must remember. We must discuss. We must seek justice.


Related Articles:

Feeling Upset Or Distressed? Here Are Some Simple Self-Soothing Practices To Calm Yourself Down

Neuroscience Says Listening To This Song Reduces Anxiety By Up To 65 Percent + The Miracle Of 528 Hz Solfeggio And Fibonacci Numbers

Overcoming Anxiety By Embracing Uncertainty

New Zealand Is A Crime Scene: In One Clinic, In One Day 30 People Were Covid Injected And All 30 Have Died


Researcher Uncovers What May Be The Real Cause Of Depression

The Latest Tragedy: Sudden Adult Death Syndrome & It’s Now Crucial to Understand What We’re Up Against: The COVID Pandemic is A Coup d’état, A Global Takeover Referred to as “The Great Reset” + We Need a Reset, but Not ‘The Great Reset’


Ten Sure-Fire Ways To Live A Stressful Life


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Inflation: The Most Evil Threat = Governments Robbing Their Citizens
December 14 2023 | From: FinalWakeUpCall / Various

Inflation, is an invisible, secret tax that not even 1% of common people understand. It is dangerous and most of the time a fatal disease.



If not under control in time, it can destroy society. No government is willing to accept responsibility for causing inflation. They always find an excuse; such as greedy businessmen, selfish trade unions, spendthrift consumers, Arab sheiks that have raised the price of oil, bad weather, or anything else that seems plausible.

Related: Forgotten History: US Bankers Financing US Enemies - And Why It Is Important Now

Although all these can temporarily produce higher prices for individual items; they cannot produce continuing inflation for one very simple reason; None of the above alleged culprits possesses a printing press, to turn out pieces of paper called money; None can legally authorise a bookkeeper to make entries on ledgers that are the equivalent of those pieces of paper.

Over time, the result will be an immensely lower standard of living, resulting from the declining purchasing power and increasing commodity prices. Real wages will be much lower, as employers will not readily increase wages to keep up with inflation.

Under a paper system without backing, the entire monetary system is controlled by the political class, which has the power to allocate capital or to deny it.

This implies that the people heading the world’s capital markets, rather than acting as capital allocators, have become mere speculative marionettes, whose strings are controlled by the well connected and the influential.


Inflation is a printing press phenomenon. The two important basic questions are:

Why do governments increase the quantity of money?

Why do they produce inflation when they understand the potential harm?

If the quantity of goods and services available for purchase – for short-term ‘output’ – were to increase as rapidly as the quantity of money, prices would tend to be stable.

Prices may fall gradually, as more became available, while people keep their wealth in the form of money. Inflation occurs when the quantity of money rises more rapidly than output and the more rapid the rise in the quantity of money, the greater the rate of inflation.



Related: Bankers Beware: The First Of Many Salvos

Output is limited by the physical and human resources available, and by the improvement in knowledge and capacity to use them. At best the output can grow only fairly slowly. The same is the case, although always temporarily and for a brief period of time, for money backed by a commodity. While, paper money has no limitation as does commodity-backed money.


Inflation is a Monetary Phenomenon:

In short; Inflation is primarily a monetary phenomenon, produced by a more rapid increase in the quantity of money than in output. Excessive monetary growth produces inflation, caused by governments. – In general, inflation is worse than a financial crisis.

Taxpayers’ money is spent for nothing without reform in sight; Increase in unemployment, as businesses go bankrupt. – Bankers that caused the 2008 financial crisis were bailed out with people’s money and their managers were left in charge who in turn were taking on even more risks with taxpayer’s deposits
in order to rake up even larger bonuses.

Eventually these schemes will result in a massive inflation, never witnessed before. The debt is structural; it’s irresolvable, there is no way to repair this economy.



Inflation is Legalised Theft:

Inflation is nothing more than legalised theft by your government; inflation is only two percent, is what the Statistics suggest. But these numbers don’t show the truth. Today’s real inflation rate is probably closer to 9 %, maybe even higher.

 Who knows? All published inflation data are a blatant lie, as these numbers are made up to suit the government.

Showing lower inflation in statistics looks better. The theft committed by governments is concealed.

When central banks print reserves far in excess of domestic savings, the result is inevitably inflation. The more they print, the more capital is available forinstitutions – central banks – to invest.



Related: Who Owns New Zealand's Banks - And Australia's Banks - Anyone's Banks?

This creates massive asset inflation, in the price of assets, as central bankers buy – bonds, stocks, and real estate – to push economies upwards all around the world. – Instead of triggering an immediate currency flight, as seen in Argentina or Zimbabwe, this inflation has produced an investment-generated boom.

The ongoing ‘financial boom’ is a fallacy of historic portions. Nobody knows exactly when, but eventually the world will lose faith in central banks’ ability to boost markets.


A Better Way Than Creating Inflation:

If additional government spending was financed either by taxes or by borrowing from the public, that would not lead to more rapid monetary growth. In this case the government would have more to spend, while the public would have less.

But the easy way out is increasing the quantity of money, because that’s more attractive since the public doesn’t understand the severe implications, and it seems like magic, like getting something for nothing! But the fact of the matter is that the holders of the money pay for the extra spending, as the extra money raises prices when it is injected into the economy.



Related: Anna von Reitz: The Banking System Including Specifics On The World Bank And Karen Hudes

Moreover, inflation indirectly yields extra revenue by automatically raising effective tax revenues, as income from the people goes up to compensate for inflation, and people are consequently pushed into higher tax rate brackets.

Additionally, there is the benefit of paying off debt with less valuable currency – less purchasing power – as less valuable units are paying for original units that were more valuable.


Reduction of Monetary Growth:

The cure for inflation is the reduction in the rate of monetary growth, as this is the cause of inflation. Eventually it is a curable disease. Although the bad effects – a temporarily lower economic growth, and higher unemployment would be felt first, the good effects – a lower to zero inflation – would come later.

This would result in a healthier economy, with the potential for rapid noninflationary growth.



Related: The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

But as usual there is the lack of a true desire to cure the addiction of free money, resulting in this disease. In a sense people enjoy inflation. Although they would like to see the prices of goods they buy go down, or at least stop going up, they are more than happy to see the prices of the things they own or sell go up.


Inflation is Destructive:

One reason inflation is so destructive is because while some people benefit greatly, other people suffer. Society is divided into winners and losers. The winners regard the good things that happen to them as the natural result of their own foresight, prudence, and initiative.

They regard the bad things; the rise of prices of goods purchased, as caused by forces outside their control. Almost everyone will say they are opposed to inflation.

What they generally mean is that they are opposed to the bad things that have happened to them due to certain effects of inflation.



Related: A Discourse On The Little-Known History Of The Global Banking System

The paper value of homes is rising. With a mortgage, the interest rate generally is below the rate of inflation. As a result of this, inflation in effect is paying off the mortgage interest payments as well the principal. This effect is an advantage to the home owner, as his equity in the house goes up rapidly. The flip side of the coin is that an interest rate below inflation results in a loss for savers.

As inflation accelerates, rather sooner than later, it is causing so much damage to the fabric of society, by creating so much injustice, and suffering.


The Side-Effects:

Everywhere one looks it is repeatedly published that unemployment and slow growth are cures for inflation; that all alternativemeasures taken will result in more inflation or higher unemployment, which is nonsense. The truth is that slow growth and high unemployment are not cures for inflation. They are the side-effects of a successful cure of a diseased economy.

The general signal of increasing demand will be confused with the specific signals reflecting changes in relative demands.That is why the initial side effect of faster monetary growth is the appearance of prosperity and greater employment.

– When it is discovered that the rise in wages does not coincide with higher demand, the flaw in the system is discovered. Wages and prices are higher not because of higher demand, but primarily to allow for the rises in the prices of goods they buy.



Related: The Great Transition: The Shadow Ruling Force Behind The Central Banks Secrecy Is Repugnant In A Free And Open Society

Subsequently people are off on a price-wage spiral that itself effectively is inflation, and by no means the cause of it. If monetary growth does not speed up faster, the initial stimulus to employment and output will be replaced by the opposite; both will go down in response to the higher prices and wages.

By the way; governments can actually not create jobs, they can only steal from people and give it to others.

If it were politically profitable and feasible to generate a 10% inflation rate, the temptation would be great if inflation indeed reached this level, to raise it to 11, or 12 or 15 %. Zero inflation is a politically feasible objective; 10% is not.

This is the verdict of experience. Nevertheless, central bankers create excessive quantities of money, as they tell us the world needs more inflation to fight deflationary forces, which basically is nonsense as the deflationary forces are the result of the increase of monetary supply.



The Best Solution to Create Inflation:

Moreover, if they want to create inflation, there is no need for excessive money printing. They can create inflation instantly byraising the price of gold, which is the easiest way to create inflation.

A higher dollar price for gold is practically the definition of inflation. The Fed would just declare the price of gold to be, say, $5,000 an ounce and make the price stick using the gold in Fort Knox – assuming it is still there? – Their printing press would maintain a two-way market.



Related: Central Banking Exposed: Central Banks Only Care About Debt, Profit And Control

The Fed could sell gold when it hits $5,050 an ounce and buy gold when it hits $4,950 an ounce. That’s a 1% band around the target price of $5,000 an ounce. The band and the use of physical gold would make the target price stick.

A higher price for gold is the same as a lower value for the dollar. The world of $5,000-per-ounce gold also means $10 per gallon gas at the station and $40 for a movie ticket. Nothing happens without consequences.


Santa Claus Doesn’t Exist:

Inflation, in contrast to what economic leaders lead us to believe, is not equivalent to Santa Claus. It can’t bring gifts to everyone. All it does is shift the benefits of the economy around. In the immortal words of President Obama: “inflation spreads the wealth around a little.”

Inflation penalises wage earners, savers, and retirees to the benefit of asset owners. It benefits debtors at the expense of creditors. There’s no net increase in the nation’s wealth. One group is merely taxed for the benefit of the other. This is sold as a benefit to the country by governments. They have to sell it to the people because without inflation they won’t be able to pay their bills.



Related: The Three Varieties Of Money

However, wealth cannot be created by a printing press. This will cause price inflation, asset inflation, credit collapse – or a mixture of all three. Everyone knows this. Nevertheless, our leaders pretend otherwise.

If credit is expanded in excess of savings, it historically always ends in a collapse. So there should be no surprise. When creditors begin to ask the critical question: Can these debts really be financed? Will we get our savings back? If credit has been expanded radically beyond savings, as is the case today in the developed world, the answer is always NO.

It is true that dramatic increases in the money supply eventually lead to inflation. But the key word here is “eventually.” Sometimes it can take a while. The extent of the delay depends on general conditions, and a very important concept known as “monetary velocity.”


Velocity of Money:

Inflation and deflation are not purely products of how much money is in the system. They are products of how fast this moneyis moving through the system.

When banks are lending, businesses are borrowing, and consumers are spending, money changes hands quickly. Under these conditions, the monetary velocity is high.

Conversely, when banks don’t lend the money, businesses are hunkered down, and consumers are saving or paying down debt, money does not change hands quickly. It moves slowly. If the economy grinds to a near halt, as is the case today, eventually money stops changing hands completely.



Related: The US Federal Government Replaces Twitter As Our Ministry Of Truth & Reality vs. Illusion: People Have Been Robbed Of Their Ability To “Decipher Between Fact And Fiction”

Inflation is not purely from an increase in the money supply. Sufficient monetary velocity is required to spur a general and persistent increase in the price of goods and services. Without velocity – if money doesn’t move through the system – there is no reason for prices to rise.

The point is that it’s not just about how many units are being printed. It’s about where those units go and how fast they are moving through the system.

The end game may indeed be accelerating monetary velocity.

The cumulative effect on the rise in prices and a spectacular loss of faith in the system will result in a decline in the desire for owning dollars will plummet, and that means hyperinflation.


How Much Money is in Circulation?

Ever wondered how much money exists? This video compares the world’s richest people, the biggest companies, physical currency, the gold market, the stock market, global debt, and more to give you a sense of the quantity of money that actually exists.





Related Articles:

Financial Fraud: Easy Money Corrupts The Monetary System

For ANZAC Day: All Wars Are Bankers' Wars

Governments Are Corporations & The Gold Standard Will Break Up The Banking Cartel

Hell's Top Banker Explains "How To Destroy The Global Economy"

How The Oil Industry Conquered Medicine, Finance And Agriculture

The Money Changers

Everything Is Rigged: Medicine, Science, Elections, The Media, Money, Education, Search Engines, Social Media... You Are Living In A Fabricated Fairy Tale

The Truth About Money Is Out & Austerity In 8 Minutes: Why It Does Not Work, Why It Is Still Practised



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Electronic Torture + 21st-Century Bio-Hacking And Bio-Robotizing
December 13 2023 | From: ElectronicTorture / Various

Electromagnetic torture, Microwave torture, Electronic murder, Electromagnetic murder, Microwave murder, Organized murder, Cooked alive, Electronic mind control, Electronic mind reading, Brain zapping, People zapper.



What is electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder? In short - "soft kill" techniques to interfere with and kill, by the Cabal and their minions - those who get in their way.

Related: Scalar Weapons - Read It And Weep

Electronic harassment / electronic torture / electronic murder is about harrasment, torture and murder using electronic weapons based on radio waves.These weapons have been very refined and can cause effects comparable to many illnesses and/or injuries.

These weapons are not science-fiction but used today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.



Mark Rich, known for his website Thehiddenevil has put up a new site with much more background information www.NewWorldWar.org.

Must read for targets and people who are seeking the truth: SurveillanceIssues

If you want to read about symptoms, then check the article below Electronic harassment and electronic torture list.


If you do not know much about electronic harassment, electronic torture, electronic murder then you may want to start reading:

The people cookers - cooking people like a microwave oven cooks meat

T
ortured - wwwguantanamocom

Electronic weapons already control our lives!

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - electronic weapons arrangers and operators burn people

Torture and murder without evidence - educate yourself

Electronic torture / electronic weapons: people burners and people cookers (speed cookers)



What is Electronic Mind Control / Electronic Mind Reading / Brain Zapping / Synthetic Telepathy / Remote Neural Monitoring?

Electronic mind control is about forcing thoughts into your brain using invisible radio waves (this can be done long range). Your attackers can make you think about a certain person at a certain moment, force a song into your brain (so you will start humming / singing it).

Your attackers can also make you stand up and walk to your kitchen. If you do not know about this then you will be just following the thoughts that were planted into your brain. In other words: You are robotized.



Related: Ten Ways To Protect Yourself From NLP Mind Control

Electronic mind reading is about reading your thoughts using invisible radio waves (this can be done from long ranges). Already it has become 'easy' to decode received brain signals into words spoken to oneself without talking.

At the moment they also make progress with decoding images from what you look at (as seen by you through your eyes).

This is not science-fiction but done today illegally by your national secret services on mostly random innocent victims not knowing what is being done to them.


If you want to read more:

Warning: you no longer can trust your own thoughts

Secret service: mind rape targets to steal, torture, murder, create enemies (and call them terrorists) or here

Secret service: Electronic Mind Control, Electronic weapons used on people surrounding the target WITHOUT them knowing this or here

Brain zapping by Jason Jeffrey or here

Synthetic Telepathy and Psycho-Electronic Weapon Attacks on hundreds of thousands by a combined 100,000 FBI and NSA psychopath spies in the US, or google

Remote Neural Monitoring




Recent documents about mind reading:

Mind Reading: Technology Turns Thought Into Action - Jon Hamilton (May 12, 2011)

Mind-Reading Experiment Reconstructs Movies in Our Mind - Associated Press (Published September 22, 2011)

We're closer to mind-reading than you may think - Emi Kolawole (October 31, 2011)

Can A Satellite Read Your Thoughts? - Physics Revealed



Stalking, Electronic Torture, Shooting with Directed Energy Weapons From the Sky

A video and two victims reporting the horrible details. Like many other victims they can only conclude that the attacks also are coming from military aircraft.



Related: Team investigates Active Denial System for security applications

From: Comment accompanying video:

Microwave weaponry systems like the Active Denial System are used in tandem to deliver physical attacks designed to stress targets, torture them physically, and turn their homes into places of extreme distress. Hoping to drive the target from their home or workplaces.

The pain is unbelievable. It involves tones, harmonics, hissing, stabs, blows, voice to skull transmissions, induced dreams (nightmares), burning sensations in the body and head, internal burning sensations inside of the body and head, crawling sensations on the body (phantom touch), electronic rape, induced and unwanted urination or orgasms, holographic inserts, and many other horrible tortures. My thoughts seem to be scanned every second. -

From: webpage about next victims of electronic "mind control" torture:

(Carolyn Palit) I thought I was dying. I thought that I would spontaneously combust into flames. Either it came from a base in the hills, or Commander Solo*, or it came from the heavens. It attacked me for two years. -

From: webpage Carolyn Palit talking to Jesus Mendoza

Some of his attacks are coming from the direction of the houses of the defendants that he has named in a law suit against these kinds of attacks. But . . . mostly . . . the attacks come from . . . "straight up."


More Information about Electronic Weapons Attacks, Including Mind Control and Mind Reading

On the STOPEG.com website www.stopeg.com there is an CBS News video of the Active Denial System (ADS), a microwave laser weapon. Although the DoD wants us to believe this is a safe weapon (that is why they showed it to us), experts agree it is not!



This video shows a big installation, but there are many kinds of laser weapons. Some are very big and mounted in trucks, ships, aircraft, or even in satellites. But there are also much smaller, portable versions, that can be very effective.

Of course military and secret services have equipment based on the most advanced technology available. Their equipment is not available to the public. But now advanced commercial devices are being shown on the internet giving an idea of how easy it must be for the attackers to cook, burn (torture) a person.

One is a portable (hand-held) laser, the S3 Spyder III Arctic laser. Although it may appear not very sophisticated, imagine someone pointing this at your back when you are in a restaurant or at the movies. To look at people through wall take a look at the XAVER 400 Compact, Tactical Through-Wall Imaging System.


Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing

Rohinie Bisesar, the strikingly beautiful and accomplished financial services analyst and York University MBA with no previous criminal record was charged with first-degree murder in the sudden stabbing death of a young woman.

While Rohinie Bisesar is considered by mind-control activists in Canada to be a possible victim of neuro-experimentation, the new frontier of absolute human control being covertly explored by military / Intelligence agencies (as per the accounts of victims, scientists, and whistleblowers), for a long while it was not clear to activists whether her defense attorney, David Connally, had indeed conveyed to Ms. Bisesar that there are others in Canada familiar with the symptoms of neuro-experimentation, sympathetic of her situation, and interested in helping her.

Read More: 21st-Century Bio-Hacking and Bio-Robotizing in the Case of Rohinie Bisesar: Breakthrough as Defense Attorney Confirms Her Receipt of Letter from Human Rights Activists



Many targets wonder how they can be attacked so easily when they move to a different location, e.g. a family member, friend, or go to a hotel. The attackers stuff their portable laser weapons and through-wall imaging devices into their suitcases, book rooms close to yours, and often will attack you from two different angles to confuse you.

In case you prevent them to attack the body area the want to attack, e.g. by putting your back against an outside wall of the hotel, they call in military aircraft that will blast you with very high power microwave (HPM) bursts, cooking your inside. (this happened several times to me, last time on July 6, 2011, while staying in a hotel in Westkapelle, Netherlands, the aircraft arriving around 1 am about 15 minutes after they concluded they could not perform the attacks on my back).

Many people have a problem thinking that others can read their mind, their thoughts. Again, the advanced technology used by military and secret services is not available to the public, but today more and more commercial devices are becoming available.

One company delivering a mind reading headset is Emotive, for USD 299,-. With this device you can control your games, your tv set, etc. with you mind! They also have an API (programming interface) to create your own mind reading application.

Even rudimentary electro-pulse mind reading technologies are publicly reported in the media

I cannot emphasize enough that not all but many attacks are from the sky. When driving your car they may burn your back (from the sky or from some equipment in your own car) when another car is driving behind you and make it go away when the car goes away.

If they do this every time then you probably will think it has to do with the car behind you. When driving your car, walking outside, riding your bike, they may burn your head and make many people you look at scratch their head.

Sometimes people are part of the sick network but many others may just have been beamed the same way you are, having no clue about what is going on (your attackers want you to attack other people, they don't care about anything because they are psychopaths, murderers. child abusers).

Another warning is for a much more confusing type of attack: electronic mind control.



In this case your attackers will plant thoughts into the brain of people surrounding you. Of course these thoughts relate to your life in one way or the other.

They may even plant your (!) thoughts into the heads of people surrounding you. If you do not know about this then you may start to think that these people can read your mind, which can be very depressing. I wrote several article about electronic mind control, if you are a target and do not know about this capabilities you may want to read this.

Links, portable laser weapon, portable through-wall vision, mind reading headset, voice-to-skull:

The S3 Spyder III Arctic

XAVER 400 Compact, Tactical Through-Wall Imaging System

Emotive, mind reading headset and API

The SwiMP3 waterproof MP3 player, underwater sound without ear buds, using bone conduction


Hearing Voices

If you are hearing voices you may be a mental case but it is also possible that you are a target of (highly illegal) mind control activities by some sick bastards.



In your country secret services including military are developing weapons that make you hear voices and covertly testing these weapons on random human beings or groups of people.

Some terms used to describe this phenomenon:

Voice-to-skull

Microwave hearing

Silent sound

Perhaps the most easy (and cheap) way to attack a person this way is by the Audio Spotlight.




This device makes you hear words etc. spoken by a someone, but the persons around you do ot hear this.

Check the links below for more information:

Microwave auditory effect (Wikipedia)

Hearing Microwaves: The Microwave Auditory Phenomenon by James C. Lin

Microwave hearing by Mark Rich

Sound from ultrasound (Wikipedia)

Audio Spotlight (Holosonics company website)



Youtube video on AudioSpotlight, Subvocal Speech and Microwave hearing:





Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List

[Published: February 26, 2009. Updated: February 28, 2009, April 11, 2009, June 10, 2009, June 13, 2009, June 25, 2009, September 6, 2009, December 24, 2009]

Almost anybody can become a (temporary) target of these horrible electronic weapons. Please read what can be done so you are prepared. This is not science fiction but happening right now in our 'democratic' society.

Below is a list of all possible attacks by electronic weapons that I know of by experience. I know more attacks exists. Female targets write about sexual attacks, others mention continuous ringing in the ears, etc. I may add these later. I decided to keep this list personal, i.e. in this blog I write down only what has/is being done to me, not what is being done to others.


Electronic Weapons

These attacks are done by the following kind of electronic weapons:

Directed Energy Weapons (laser weapons), like ELF (very low frequency), ultrasonic, lasers, (high power) microwave weapons

Through-wall vision

(Sub-vocal) Mind-reading

Microwave hearing/Silent Sound (letting you hear sounds/things in other ways then hearing by the ear)

For another introduction you may want to read:

The people cookers - Cooking people like a microwave oven cooks meat.

Or, read the summary of my previous blogs:

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed!(24) - Gang stalkers and people cookers are murderers, the crimes they commit belong to the worst crimes in history - part 2


A List Including all Horrible Details

On the internet already a lot of symptoms and attacks by these weapons can be found. Most of these lists do not detail these attacks and that is exactly what I am trying to do here. In my opinion it is not enough to read that such a weapon gives you a burning feeling, instead the horrible details must be exposed!

Description of a (continuous) high intensity microwave weapon attack:

This weapon makes your skin really burn like a very heavy sunburn and cooks your inside, you really feel being cooked alive, you are heated like meat in a microwave oven, with intensities that exceed those of a microwave oven.

Gal is coming out of your throat and fluids inside your body evaporate making you instantly burp. In case of high intensity there is also a burning sensation on the other side of the body, where the beam, of approximately 10-30 cm diameter leaves the body.



If they cook you long enough cooked body cells explode inside you, when aimed at your upper body, lung cells explode / are destroyed and reducing lung capacity immediately noticed when walking stairs or running.

The burning sensation and the cooked-inside feeling will go away after 5-30 minutes or 1-2 days depending on the duration and intensity, it may take a day or more to recover from high power microwave bursts with durations of 5-60 seconds (but can you recover from these amounts of irradiation?).

A cup of milk is heated and starts evaporating after 5-10 seconds. The electronic weapons aimed at you can make you burp or fart within 1-3 seconds, hence the intensity of electromagnetic irradiation is not only used to torture a person but murder as well.



Covert and Intended-to-Notice (or Noticed) Electronic Harassment / Torture

Electronic harassment is called covert if the target does not know about these weapons and methods. If you do not know about these weapons you may think you have all the bad luck in the world, you will wonder what strange things are happening to you, to your body, and accept you do not control your life anymore.

If intended-to-notice (or noticed), electronic harassment is torture in its most horrible form. What would you do if your body is made to react every time to events occurring in your life, e.g. by making you burp or fart, your legs are cooked every night, your ankle is cooked during daytime when working behind your computer, your knee is beamed to cause maximum pain, etc.


Some examples
:


To delay you:

They make you go the toilet to urinate when you want to leave your house

They cook your legs before running

They burn and cook your body high power to prevent you doing you work

Note that this delaying is often done together with gang stalking methods like cars blocking your road, phone calls when you are to leave your home, etc.


To make things worse:


They make you sneeze extra times when you have a cold

They cook your throat become sore when you have a cold

They attack your eyes until red with blood

The cook your legs after running

They cook or burn where you have pain already


To torture you:


They cook and burn your body everywhere

They cook your family, your children, friends, …

Note that this torture is often done together with gang stalking methods like synchronizing saw machines, honking horns of cars, screaming birds (pigeons, crows), etc.


The Maximum Pain Business, Beyond Imagination Horror and Cruelty Without Evidence

Special methods have been developed to make you think you have a heart problem, erection problem, toothache, etc.

For the ones exposing these horrendous crimes they developed methods to inflict maximum pain, e.g. by cooking such a person alive with a high power microwave weapon, or burning the skin of the target or making the target burp or fart every few minutes to events occurring in the life of the target (including e.g. opening a website on a computer, saving a file, cars passing by the window, etc. ).



Related: Who Really Owns and Controls the Military-Industrial Complex and What Are They Doing? – An Extensive Research Report

Some authors refer to the development and use of these weapons as the pain business. I would like to make a correction, please call it the maximum pain business.

After accepting that there are really such sick and disgusting creatures actually developing and applying these methods and torture, you also have to accept that it is not about just pressing a button, but also about the way how this torture is applied.

Zapping your eyes red to make you look bad, cooking biceps to prevent you from swimming, cooking your throat to prevent you from singing, inducing heart problems and toothaches to prevent you working or sports. More horror, these methods and procedures could not have been highly developed without being tested on humans, on real persons.

And again more horror, these methods are often used with gang stalking (organized stalking) methods.



Like they cook your ankle with insane intensities making your foot very painful, and when you go outside all kinds of people with leg problems are crossing your path, people limping, in a wheelchair, sometimes even someone without a leg.

Or, they start sawing wood somewhere and when the saw enters the wood cook your body with high intensity microwave.
This torture is applied 24/7, not once every hour but more like once every minute/every 5 minutes. Horrible torture that can be called torturing a person to death.


Special Case: The Heart Attack

Damaging your body can be done in several ways. One vital organ is the heart. They can attack the heart very effective with:

Microwave weapons, cooking the heart area slowly

High Power Microwave (HPM) weapons, cooking the heart area in a second

Ultrasonic weapons, pressurizing the heart area

Heart frequency manipulation weapons

These weapons can damage your heart in a split second, you may not survive such a attack, but can also be used to slowly damage your heart. Slowly cook your heart area so will get a strange feeling and in fact your heart is really damaged.



This makes the Heart Attack Gun that the CIA was forced to admit having look positively archaic: During Senate testimony in 1975 into illegal activities by the CIA, it was revealed that the agency had developed a dart gun capable of causing a heart attack

Then there is also the frequency manipulation attack, your heart may feel pulsing, blobbing like crazy.

Cook heart area from the front, often together with a cook beam from left behind. Slow damage, horrible feeling

Flash your heart with very high power microwave. Instant damage.

Pressurize your chest, even takes your breath away if applied with enough power

Pulsate your body/heart area with low frequencies

These effects will give you a very realistic heart attack or heart problem feeling feeling. Your heart may start pounding very loud, may feel very painful, the heart area may feel strange, cooked.

If applied with enough power, this really damages your heart and heart area. Your heart is cooked like meat in a microwave oven.

Can you recover from these attacks? In general they will not murder you or leave evidence, your heart may feel very painful for several days after they stop their attacks.

It can take weeks until all pain in the area has disappeared. I am not sure about permanent damage caused by these attacks.

Can you die from such an attack? Yes, if the intensity of the beam is high enough your heart can be damaged or temporarily disturbed in such a way that you will die.

How can you recognize a ‘normal’ heart problem from a ‘induced’ heart problem? You yourself are the best judge of what you feel. If you believe something really is wrong with your heart then visit a doctor. If you are certain your heart is attacked then avoid visiting a doctor as this will confirm a heart problem in case you collapse or die, case closed.

Impossible to Protect Yourself

The human body appears to be extremely vulnerable to electromagnetic irradiation of all kind of frequencies. The human body also is a electromagnetic transmitter and sensitive (radio) equipment can pick up and decode the signals that are generated e.g. when speaking, thinking.

In contrast to a knife or a bullet, electromagnetic signals are not blocked by walls, compare your cell phone.



Related: Patent for nervous system manipulation by electromagnetic fields from monitors and TVs

Limited protection is possible using sheet metal, metal plates, water, vacuum, but if you really are a target the attackers increase intensities (if necessary to insane levels), change frequency, attack from different angles etc.

Also remember that these weapons can hit a person without hitting the person sitting next to this person. They can be aimed and the diameter of the beam can be made small enough to hit only the target.


Anybody Can be a Target

Electronic weapons make it very easy to eliminate persons, to get persons (temporarily) out of the way, to murder persons, etc. all without evidence, and most of the time even the target does not know he is zapped, cooked, burned with electronic weapons. The ones owning and controlling this technology now can get everything they want in a very easy way.

They can get their football player into the national team by temporarily cut out the competitor for the same position in the team.

This could be done with other means as well but it is very easy with electronic weapons. Just cook a person’s ankle and foot during the night and the damage is done. To influence a tennis match you could cook a player by heating the body with microwaves (compare microwave oven).



He will just feel overheated and sick and loose the game.

These are just two examples to demonstrate what can be done. You can imagine almost anybody can become a target. Some people because they are more visible then others, because they have something the sick network wants, because they know something the sick network does not want to be exposed, because they are too intelligent for the sick network, ust for personal reasons because may be they made a remark about someone, etc.





The Phoenix Program Continues Today


The Phoenix Program was a program designed, coordinated, and executed by the United States Central Intelligence Agency (CIA), United States special operations forces, US Army intelligence collection units from MACV, special forces operatives from the Australian Army Training Team Vietnam (AATTV), and the Republic of Vietnam's (South Vietnam) security apparatus during the Vietnam War.

The Program was designed to identify and "neutralize" (via infiltration, capture, counter-terrorism, interrogation, and assassination) the infrastructure of the National Liberation Front of South Vietnam (NLF or Viet Cong).

The CIA described it as "a set of programs that sought to attack and destroy the political infrastructure of the Viet Cong". The major two components of the program were Provincial Reconnaissance Units (PRUs) and regional interrogation centers. PRUs would kill or capture suspected NLF members, as well as civilians who were thought to have information on NLF activities.

Many of these people were then taken to interrogation centers where many were allegedly tortured in an attempt to gain intelligence on VC activities in the area. The information extracted at the centers was then given to military commanders, who would use it to task the PRU with further capture and assassination missions.

The program was in operation between 1965 and 1972, and similar efforts existed both before and after that period. By 1972, Phoenix operatives had neutralized 81,740 suspected NLF operatives, informants and supporters, of whom between 26,000 and 41,000 were killed.






Electronic Weapons Can Kill a Person

Besides using electronic weapons to monitor, drive into suicide, cause temporary injuries, they can also be used to kill a person.

Killing is possible by sending wrong signals to the heart making it pulse in abnormal ways, or by increasing intensity and cooking the heart area, damaging the heart slowly. Very high power laser weapons or HPM (= High Power Microwave) weapons can damage your heart in a second.



Although little is known at this time about the effects of long term irradiation, it is not difficult to imagine that this will cause all kinds of diseases as electromagnetic irradiation destroys your DNA (cell with damaged DNA are called cancer). Again all these horrible things can be done, and are done today, without evidence.


How do You Know You are a Target of Electronic Harassment?

It is often very difficult to distinghuish between normal body behaviour and induced body behaviour if there no signs of burning or cooking. For example, would you know the difference between normal diareah and induced diareah?

Yes, you are able to decide what is not normal by comparing your diareah with previous experiences.



It may start and disappear very sudden, may cause other effects like water bubbles leaving your anus, etc. Also, the diareah may be linked to a certain event, like picking up your child, appearance in court, etc.

Always ask yourself what it is you are feeling, did you feel this before? Does it go away when you turn your body 180 degrees? Does it go away when you walk in the streets or drive your car? You are the best judge of what you are feeling.


Your Car May be Tagged

When you are a target you will experience harassment everywhere every time. If you have a car they will tag your car (these are words I learned from a ’so-called target’).



This means they will equip your car with electronic weapons not only to monitor you but also to cook and/or burn your body while driving.

They may also harass the target covert and use the following beams:

Sleep beam, to make the driver very sleepy

Eye beam, slowly cooking they eyes, so tears come out and visibility reduces

Just to confirm, all this is done to cause the (mental or physical) death of the target.


Harassment from (Neighbour) Houses, Cars, Handbags, Airplanes, Satellites

Most of the electronic harassment comes from close neighbor houses. When you walk in the the streets you are probably attacked by electronic weapons (directed energy weapons) from houses (they may be remote controlled or controlled by operator at these locations.



Related: Electromagnetic Radiation And Other Weapons Of Mass Mutation

If there are no locations for their equipment, they use these weapons from their cars. You may also be hit from airplanes. This is not difficult to believe if you accept a reach several hundreds of meters. Some targets write about satellites being the source of their electronic harassment. In general I do not believe this is true.


Example of Current State-of-Technology:

You can be hit by very accurate equipment. For example, when you are running on the streets or in the woods you may be ’shot’ with a very high power microwave weapon in your calf from an airplane. The intensity can be such that this causes instant injury.

Your calf is cooked within a split second and your muscles almost instantly tear apart. Making running / walking almost impossible.

Electronic harassment can also be done from small devices carried in e.g. shopping bags in shops or on the street.

You need only a small battery to give the target a single burst that makes him burp or fart. This is enough to depress the target: nowhere safe from this horrible harassment.

Satellites probably play a big role in exchanging information about a target, e.g. you can have a subvocal speech decoding PC in the house next to target, but it is more easy (and safe) to transfer the undecoded information to a central computer system, and return the decoded words. But it may be done on site, PC’s have enough power today to do this decoding themselves.


You May be Attacked by Persons (Family, Friends, co-Workers) Who are Covertly Attacked by Electronic Harassment

The aim of the attackers is to drive the target insane. To speed up things they aim their electronic weapons covertly at family, friends, co-workers, etc. to make them react in several ways to what the target is doing or saying.


Some (easy) methods used to covertly attack other persons:

Scratch beam, to make a person scratch his head

Sneeze beam, to make a person sneeze

Cough beam, to make a person cough

Urge to urinate beam, to make a person go to the toilet

Examples:

They beam persons around the target on the head so everywhere around the target people are scratching their heads

They beam the target’s head very hard and then beam the head of a friend so that this friend will start scratching his head immediately very visible for the target to see

When the target and partner are in the same, then every time the target opens a website on his PC (not visible for the partner), they beam the throat of the partner causing the partner to cough almost immediately

When the target is beamed in the stomach during work, they make a co-worker sneeze at the same time

When the target is beamed in the stomach, they beam her child in the stomach as well, making the child cry and saying it has stomach pain (this is confirmed by multiple victims)

Once again illegal and (beyond imagination) horrible crimes by our national secret services.


Elite and Secret Services Control our Politicians

It is not amazing that these weapons exist, I studied computer science myself, if you have enough money it is not that special. It is also not amazing that there are actually sick and disgusting creatures walking around free applying this kind of electronic harassment to cause the physical or mental death of a person.



What is amazing is that a lot of high ranked politicians and other influential persons are fully aware of the existence and use of these weapons but do not speak out. What does this say about these persons? I believe you can say that the idea we live in a democracy has disappeared completely.


Elite and Secret Services are Trapped by Their Crimes in Vicious Circles of More Violence Against the People of the World

The ones facilitating, outsourcing and performing this cruel electronic harassment and torture is not just a group of people, these attacks are very well designed and applied by people trained to cause maximum pain but leave no evidence.

The ones I am referring to are our secret services, including military. They are tightening their grip on society, not because they have to protect us against the terrorists in the world, but because they are getting more and more afraid what will happen when the truth about them is exposed.



They are trapped in some sort of vicious circle. To maintain themselves they must commit more and more horrible crimes. And to avoid their crimes are exposed they have to perform new horrible crimes, etc. etc.

So here we have the elite, creating wars to maintain themselves, and their armies, the secret services both trapped in their own lies and deceit. And the horror for us, the people of the world is that we will be taken from (created) threat to (created) war because that is the only way out for the (criminal) elite and (criminal) secret services.


People Cookers and Secret Services

I introduced the word people cookers in 2007 for the creatures facilitating, outsourcing, performing electronic harassment and electronic torture. Main reason is of course that people cooking comes closest to what they are doing.

Most of the harassment and torture is done by microwave irration which causes heating of the skin and your inside just like a microwave oven cooks meat.



Related: Weaponized Cell Towers Are Directly Related To Why Chemtrails Are Sprayed

There are no words to justify these illegal and horrendous crimes. The ones involved are disgusting creatures, an author called them ‘the failed human beings’ and that is just what they are. They were born human, choose the wrong path in life and degenerated into pieces of shit.

I believe people cooking and gang stalking (organized stalking) are the perfect example of how sick our national secret services have become. They now commit the perfect murder, in their language meaning murder without evidence. And they now steal, torture and murder just because it has become so easy to steal, torture and murder.


Electronic Harassment and Electronic Torture List - December 24, 2009

Below is the list of all (most) effects I experienced from these horrible electronic weapons. Few times I may not correctly describe the source of the effects. It is sometimes difficult to point to microwave or ultrasound.

Both can be very damaging. High Power Microwave cooks your body cells while high power ultrasound simply destroys your body cells. But in the end the result is the same, a damaged body.

MIND-READING
Subvocal speech Special equipment is used to detect muscle contractions like the ones a person uses when speaking out loud. When spoken to itself these muscle movements can be detected by advanced equipment and translated into words and sentences. As most people talk to themselves when ‘thinking’ this resembles mind reading.

How it is applied
They read your subvocal speech and react to it

Feeling
Unbelievable at first, then you get depressed because the last thing you thought was private appears not to be private anymore. Then you accept that you probably are even more popular and watched then the big stars in the world and sometimes use it to deceive the bastards. Horrible torture

Why it is applied
To drive you insane

Seeing through your eyes Although some targets claim that they can see what you see. I have not (yet) experienced this. But they do everything to suggest that they can do this. E.g. on the highway you are bursted with the burp beam every time a favorite model car passes in the opposite direction. They are looking at you from some camera build inside your car or from another car. They are looking at your eyes to see what you are looking at. I experienced a few times I was bursted BEFORE I saw the favorite car. A lot of research in this area is going on, I will keep you updated.
HEARING VOICES
Voice-to-skull Special advanced equipment is used to beam voices, or in fact any sound, into your head.

How it is applied
They make you hear voices that you should not hear. For example, they let you hear voices from people far away very clear as if they are standing next to you. This an amazing experience. There are a lot of reports of people who claim they are attacked by voices

Why it is applied
To drive you insane

HEAD
Top of your head beam The top of your head is very sensitive. They will burn the top with some laser or microwave weapon

How it is applied
They put the beam on your head and wait for you to move

Feeling
Can be very painfull if applied with enough intensity. You cannot do much with this beam on your head. Horrible torture

After effects
If applied with high intensity it may take several days for the painful feeling to disappear

Why it is applied
Prevent you from working, doing your thing

Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause brain damage, tumors

Scratch beam They just beam your head somewhere. The normal reaction is your will start scratching your head.

How it is applied
Mostly applied when other people can see you. If they do this everytime with the same people they may wonder whats wrong with you. They also apply this and have random people scratch their heads and then burn you

Feeling
Not very painfull, mostly a short pulse, although they may keep the beam on your head and remove it after you start scratchin your head

Why it is applied
Drive you out of your mind, drive you into attacking other people

Headache beam This beam gives you a headache. It is some kind of high intensity low frequency beam. The headache appears suddenly and also disapears suddenly

Feeling
Can be very painful

Sickness/Alcohol beam The feeling is that you feel a little bit dizzy, see thing a little foggy.

How it is applied
They may apply this when you drink your first glass of beer, wine, etc. or when you have a cold, or are sensitive to hay fever

Cooking They put the microwave beamer on your head and your head is heated. They may do this after you drink a glas of wine, but also after you turn on the central heating of your appartment. You will feel hot, sick, slow.
Ear short burst Your ear is bursted, the idea is to hit your eardrum. With your eardrum cooked/damaged you have a strange feeling.
Ear continous beam Your ear is beamed for very long time just to present you pain, they want you to move.

Feeling
It appears your eardrum and surrounding area is very sensitive. This is very painful.

Eye blur Your eye is bursted and you have instant blurred vision. Often your eye will start tearing

How it is applied
Some kind of miocrowave burst, see also Phasr and other similar military weapons used to blind the enemy

Feeling
Not really painfull but you cannot do much as you are used to two eyes.

Why it is applied
Prevent you from working

Should you worry
Yes, this is very damaging for your eyes

Eye sting Your eye is bursted with some kind of laser beam

Feeling
Like they drive a needle into your eye. Very painful

Why it is applied
Stress discomfort

Just below eye, tremble They beam at they area below your eye and the flesh below it starts trembling. They can do this in shops and through wall
Burn (beard) hair They burn away hair at certain locations, e.g. your moustache hair just below your nose holes to create the illusion of a leaking nose

How it is applied
This is just a laser hair removal procedure, like performed in many beauty parlors

Sneeze burst You are bursted and must sneeze. This is a tinglin sensation that can make you sneeze in an instant

How it is applied
You can turn your head in the other direction or hold your hand before your nose to make sure the attack is caused by electronic weapons

Why it is applied
To make your body react to something

Runny nose You have a runny nose but do not have a cold. You may start thinking you have some kind of strange cold but you have not. Once you are out of the beam, the runny nose disappears.

How it is applied
I am not sure if this is done only by electronic weapon or by a combination of some drug and electronic weapon

Cough burst Your throat is bursted with a high intensity burst and you start coughing instantly. This coughing does not look like normal coughing. You will have a sore throat immediately afterwards.
Dry cough Like something fluid/moisture sticks in your lungs, or sometimes your throat. When you breath you hear/feel a rasping sound. You must cough very hard to throw it out.
Toothache Using a low frequency beam they induce a toothache, this really is a horrrible feeling. It is like a true toothache but now when you move out of the beam it disappears.

Why it is applied
Prevent you from doing anything, just plain torture

Sore throat Your throat is sowly cooked and you will almost immediately notice less volume and after some time pain while speaking

How it is applied
They can do this in just one or two hours by aiming a high power beam at your throat.

Why it is applied
Prevent you from speaking loud, prevent you to sing

Blackout beam This is very high intensity burst on your head. There is no pain but it feels like the result having been hit on the head very hard. You feel a bit dizzy and your ears are ringing
UPPER BODY
On top of shoulder A very painfull beam on the top of your shoulder

Why it is applied
Just torture

Cook chest/lungs I call this beam: through-body-beam. You are really cooked by this beam. If applied with enough intensity you will feel a burning sensation on the back (where it enters), then feel the beam cook your insde, then you start burping, then you feel a burning sensation on the other part of your body where the beam leaves your body

How it is applied
This beam can be applied everywhere, form the house next to yours, from cars. When they beam you outside the intensity often is higher as they want to make sure are hit properly

Feeling
You feel like being microwaved. Very painfull, horrible torture

Cooking They put the microwave beamer on your body for a long time and you have the feeling you are cooked alive which in effect is a very accurate description of what is being done

Feeling
You feel like being cooked alive, horrible torture

Burp beam This is a low power sophisticated version of the chest/lungs cook beam. It is difficult to locate the source direction.

How it is applied
It takes approx. 2-3 seconds to make you burp, make your body react to events. They also may apply low intensity, so you get an irresistable urge to burp but cannot

Feeling
Horrible torture

Why it is applied
To make you suffer. This applied sometimes once every five minutes, but sometimes also several times a minute to let your body react to events like cars passing your window, etc. Horrible torture.

Heart attack incl. extra beam from left behind This is a low frequency high power beam aimed at your heart, mostly from a position somewhere in front of you. To maximze the effect they simultaneously beam you from the left behind position with a microwave cook beam.

How it is applied
As they may apply the from behaind beam for a long period your flesh around the heart area may get cooked and the whole area may feel painfiul and stiff

Feeling
This really gives you the feeling of having a heart problem, and in fact you have! The difference is that this one is applied by murderers. Horrible torture

After effects
It may take several days before you recover (if they stop the beam)

Should you worry
Yes, your heart is vital

Heart attack high power burst This is a very high power burst of very short duration, 1 second or less, that will give you immediately an extremely painful heart (area). This beam is really amazing: I believe it can kill you in an instant

How it is applied
They can do this through wall anytime

Feeling
Horrible torture

After effects
It may take several days before your body recovers and it all feels normal again

Should you worry
Yes, your heart is vital

Heart attack blobbing feeling, heart pulsing strangely, randomly This may be done seperate from other heart attacks. Your heart may start feel pulsing funny, the feeling is very massive, it also feels like bubling, like the heart lost control of normal operation and just pulses somewhat

How it is applied
Not only frightening but also very painful

Pressure beam They put a pressure beam on your chest this will take your breath away and you may think your are having a heart problem. This can have various intensities
Back burning They burn the skin of your back. This can be low intensity or high intensity. The feeling is you have a sun burn, in case of high intensities it will also color your back a little red.

How it is applied
This almost instant skin cooking. Refer to ADS (Active Denial System) for details

Why it is applied
Present pain. To move you out of the way, to make you leave the swimming pool, etc.

Electric shower This is an overwhelming effect. This is like a shower but not with water but with electronic pulses.
Heating The temperature of your body is increased giving you the feeling you have a flu or some kind of illness.
Spleen beam Beaming in your side gives you the idea you have spleen pain

How it is applied
They often do this during high intensity sport activities. The idea is to make you belive you have real spleen pain and will stop your exercise

ARMS
Biceps They cook your biceps to reduce their power , make them feel painful when you load them during e.g. swimming. This may be done to prevent you from doing your sports.
muscle weakening in hand They beam your hands. The result is that you can not hold a pen between thumb and finger like you used to, also you can not put you fingers against each other (like making a cup with your hand). They may do this to prevent you from working or doing your sports e.g. swimming.
LOWER BODY
Stomach cooking They put a beam on your stomach and the stomach begins to bubble like something is cooking inside.

How it is applied
They often do this at night.

Should you worry
Yes, long term irradition may cause stomach cancer, tumors

Kidney damage With some kind of ultrasound beam they attack your kidneys. The feeling is like you have been kicked over and over in your sides. This is like the feeling that is described by patients that have their kidney stones crushed by ultrasound.
Intestines cooking, urge to defecate They cook your intestines and you feel you have to fart but cannot.
Fart beam They cook your intestines and it will start bubbling. After some time you will have to fart
blind gut attack they cook the area around your tail bone. After a short period, depending on the intensity this may take 60 seconds or more, you will feel horrible cramps.

Feeling
This pain makes you crawl on the floor. Horrible torture

After effects
It takes at least one hour before the horrible cramps get a litle less painful.

How to detect
With normal cramps you will have other parts of your body react as well, like heavy sweating. In this case there is just intense pain.

Diarreah They cook your intestines and you have a very strong feeling to go to the toilet. By continously beaming you have very heavy diarreah

Why it is applied
Keep you out of important events, e.g. A lawsuit where you havve to defend yourself

Erection termination This beam makes your erection go away, if you are a man of course. This can be done in 20-30 seconds. Depending on the direction of the beam your intestines may start bubbling though not very loud
Urge to urinate They beam your lower body so you will feel the urge to urinate. It is difficult to ignore and there will come a moment you will have to do this when the beam continues.
UPPER LEGS
Block burst The feeling is that your movement is blocked. You must take care not to fall or make a strange move
KNEE
Short beams This will cause pain to your knee
High intensity beaming The put the beamer on your knee and make sure it stays there for hours. The location may vary ut just above the knee cap can cause a lot of pain. This will result in very much pain and a very sensitive knee.

How it is applied
After a few days your knee hurts a lot when walking. They may apply this also when biking to make you think something is wrong with your knee

Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture

LOWER LEGS
Calf cooking They apply low intensity, low power beam to your legs, e.g. When you are in bed. Your muscles, legs feel stif the next morning. They may start cooking the calfs after you finished running, and after some time before you want to go running to prevent you from running

How it is applied
What happens when you increase load on cooked muscles? They tear apart

Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture

Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports

Calf bursting This beam is in fact a very high power burst and can cook your calf from hundreds of meters in a split second. If you are running your cooked muscles will tear apart and you have instant injury. See also Heart attack high power burst. You may notice the following feeling: a needle going in and out of your calf within a second

Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture

Why it is applied
Prevent you from runningm, other sports

Shin cooking They cook the skin of your shin with very high intensities. When you are running, the shin injury is a well-known. They may start cooking the skin of of your shin after you finished running, and after some time (days) before you want to go running to prevent you from running

Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture

Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports

Heel muscle The cook your heel muscle. This muscle does not contain much nerves so it is difficult to detect before the damage has been done. Then you will think back and remember there was something wrong the previous day or days.

Feeling
Walking can be painful.

Why it is applied
Prevent you from running, other sports

Ankle They cook your ankles, just to cause you pain. You feel the beam and it is difficult to keep your leg in the same position because of the pain. This is often a applied for a long period of time, several hours.

Feeling
Very painful

After effects
May take several days to disappear when applied with high intensities

Foot They beam very hard in the center of your foot

Feeling
Very painful, horrible torture

Foot insane They burst the center of your foot with max power very short burst beam, only once while walking even in a crowded place. This causes insane pain and you may fall immediately, because the foot is not functioning anymore.

Feeling
Extremely painful, horrible torture

Toes They pick a single toe and beam it for several days in a row

Feeling
Painful

Toes insane They burst your toes with with max power very short burst beam, and do this several times. This causes insane pain.

How it is applied
They may do this while riding your bike, horrible torture

Foot block Ultrasonic beam to block the movement of a foot. If you are not prepared for this block you may fall.
BODY
Shaking Your whole body starts shaking like being in a aircraft in bad weather. The frequency is around 5 Hz. The intensity may amaze you.
Scratching They apply a scratch beam to any part of your body. This beam is very hard to resist. Before you know it you may start scratching yourself like crazy

Feeling
Horrible torture

LEG
Tremble apart Some high power acoustic beamer is aimed at your leg and after some time your leg feels non-cooperative, not part of your body anymore
MOOD
Sleepy feeling They beam you with a frequency that makes you really feel sleepy. You will start yawning and cannot keep your eyes open. This efect starts very suddenly and often ends very abrupt.

How it is applied
They may also do this by devices built into your car

Nausea Not a very pleasant feeling but not veru disturbing or damaging
See the world turning You feel dizzy and see the world turing like when you are very very tired. This effect is not really very real. The moment you are out-of-the-beam you are not turning anymore. Still it is amazing that this can be done.
fatigue attacks  
Force awake With this well-known beam they will keep you awake, prevent you from sleeping. This way they wear you out, may be the next day you have an important meeting or must finish important work.
Sweating, nauseous, vomit feeling You start sweating suddenly, you feel dizzy, you think you may have to vomit. When applied with enough intensity you will start to vomit, you will need at least 30 minutes to recover a little bit from this attack, but it will take hours before your body is acting a bit like before the attack.

How it is applied
They may do this when you are with a friend. Google: navy vomit beam

Feeling
Horrible torture

SLEEP
Induce dreams You have strange dreams about things but the dreams are not like dreams you had before. The dreams may refer to very recent events in your life, like a person you met, a movie yu saw, it is another form of reacting to events in your life

How it is applied
Some people in your environment might tell you they have wild dreams that night trying to get you talking about your experience


Additional Links

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - Gang stalkers and people cookers are murderers

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - A new category murderers: people cookers

The Hidden Evil

Microwave Mind Control

Peoplecooker.com

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - start independent investigations

The normal people at war with the mentally ill (the murderers and psychopaths)

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - normal people are murdered to keep the system running

Secret service: fear for the truth to be revealed - use of electronic weapons to infer psychiatric problems, schizophrenia

Bioeffects of Selected Non-Lethal Weapons

Electronic Torture


To All Politicians of The World

The only way to save the world is to stop your national secret services. Breaking laws and violating human rights in horrible ways has become a way of life. They are responsible for most problems in your neighborhood, in your city, in your country, in the world. Make them responsible for what they are doing.

Let them account for in detail, force them to open up their organizations for thorough investigations. Stop their funding if they do not co-operate. Replace directors and staff immediately by normal people for starters.

Please help to spread the message or donate:

STOPEG foundation - STOP Electronic weapons and Gang stalking


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

How To Become A Freethinker: A Practical Guide + 7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life
December 12 2023 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / AustralianNationalReview

We humans like to think that we are freethinkers, but how many of us truly are?



How many people actually think for themselves, without falling victims to beliefs or ideologies?

Related: The Three Trigger Terms Being Used To Stop Critical Thinking

How many are not heavily influenced by the biased information that the media is presenting them with? How many are choosing to have certain opinions just because an authority figure told them to or because tradition holds them to be true?

The reality is that most people don’t know how to think critically, and blindly accept the beliefs that were handed to them by society. But unless one learns to think for oneself, how can one grow into a more conscious, wise person? It’s impossible.

So how can one learn to think for himself or herself? Well, here’s a small yet concise practical guide on how to become a freethinker that will help you to break free from the prison of belief and arrive at your own conclusions in your quest for truth.


How to Become a Freethinker?


Doubt your beliefs.

The first and most important step to become a freethinking individual is to doubt the beliefs that have been forced upon you by others. Whatever your beliefs are - whether religious, political, philosophical and so on - be sure to question them, scrutinize them, and discard any of them when you find no solid evidence supporting them.



Question authority. 
Most people choose to obey and follow what authority tells them is true and right. They don’t think for themselves- they let others do the thinking for them instead. A freethinker never accepts anything on authority. He/she asks questions and is open to accept any answers that point to the truth, even if they go against the opinions and beliefs of authority.

Observe your behavior. Although we tend to think that we have free will, most of our actions are actually carried out on an unconscious level. In a sense, we are victims to our habits.

To become a freethinker, you need to become more aware of your thoughts, actions, and overall behavior. Once you do so, you’ll be able to better understand yourself and make more conscious choices in life, without behaving in certain ways just because you feel compelled to.

Stop conforming. Another important step to become a freethinker is to detach yourself from group thinking. People choose to conform in all sorts of ways just in order to feel accepted and liked by others. To achieve that, many people unquestionably accept what others tell them out of the fear of being left out.





By escaping the herd mentality you’ll be able to think more clearly, without feeling the pressure to comply with others.

Use critical thinking. Learning how to use critical thinking is of utmost importance to freethinking. If you can’t analyze and critically assess the information that you come across, you’ll be an easy target for manipulation and thought control.

Critical thinking will assist you in your search to discover the truth, by helping you to avoid being influenced by biased opinions and false information.


Voice your mind. A freethinker is a rebel. It’s a person who is not afraid to speak his/her mind, no matter how opposing his/her ideas are to the establishment. Whatever you consider as true, right and of importance to be communicated to others, do openly talk about it, even if you are the only person who has the guts to do so.



Research.
 A freethinker cares about truth like nothing else. In the journey to finding truth, there are guides that can help one approach it easier and quicker. If you’re searching for truth, it would be beneficial if you gathered knowledge from as many sources as you can, whether that is books, documentaries, podcasts, and so on. Do whatever helps to expand your consciousness.

Keep an open mind. Last but not least, a freethinker is a person with an open mind. That means, a person who is open to learning new things and ready to change his mind when presented with evidence that contradicts his opinions and beliefs. A freethinker doesn’t accept anything blindly but at the same time doesn’t shrink from considering emerging perspectives and ideas that may challenge his/her worldview.




7 Lessons You Should Learn Early In Life

Most people experience a crisis at some point in their lives. It’s different for every individual and it is even harder to predict what that crisis may be.



However, at times like these we often regret not learning some key lessons in our earlier years.

Related: Critical Thinking Has Never Been More Important

Here are 7 such things that we should realise while we are still young.

Live In The Present

We often spend hours pondering about our past experiences and what the future holds for us. However, it’s important to realise that we can be happy only if we live in the present.

If we get too bothered with our past or too worried about the future, we miss living in the moment. The present belongs to us and we need to make the most of it.

Don’t live your life based on other people’s expectations

Our friends and family expect a lot from us. We shouldn’t always give priority to their expectations, especially when it contradicts our personal dreams and goals.

All your life there will be people who will tell you what you should and shouldn’t do. It is important for you to introspect and comprehend what is best for you.

Don’t make your problems bigger than they really are

Hurdles are inevitable. However, it is human tendency to magnify the scale of our problems by simply over-thinking.

Stop thinking too much because that’s not the solution to your obstacle. On the contrary,  over-thinking actually makes it harder to resolve issues.

Get out of your comfort zone

Most of us are intimidated by something or the other. To reach our highest potential, it is important to deal with these fears and nip them in the bud.

If you tackle your fears with a straight head, you may realise that they perhaps weren’t so scary in the first place.

Don’t Race

Young people want to achieve everything and often they want to do it before everyone else. We must realise that one of the most essential aspects of life is tenacity. We should have patience and faith, and only then can we become truly successful.

Don’t assume what others think of you

Realistically, the harsh truth is, you matter much less to other people than you think. You are not the centre of the universe and not everyone has an opinion about you or your opinions.

Stop fretting over your impression on others and live your life to the fullest.

Be Appreciative

Appreciate your life experiences and most importantly, appreciate yourself, your friends and your family. Give a 100 per cent to those who deserve it because it will make you happier in the long-run.


Related Articles:

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists


The Bullshit Philosophy Of Positive Thinking

Three Reasons Why Positive Thinking Is Making You More Miserable, And How To Have True Happiness In Life

A Zen Master Explains Why “Positive Thinking” Is Terrible Advice



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

MMS Does Not Cure Stupidity
December 11 2023 | From: JimHumble / MMSnews

You might say to yourself, “well, that is a different topic”. Yes, it is and let me explain to you why I feel I needed to write about this topic.



First of all, we at the Genesis II Church have the ability to “cure”, “heal” and “treat” 95+% of the world's diseases effectively and permanently! This is contrary to the “mainstream medical” procedures which only “treat” symptoms and are not in the business to cure anything!

Did you see what I just wrote? Did it sink in? If what I am saying is true then the people that trust the medical system to “cure” them of any disease are wasting their time! The whole system is set up to keep you as a client, i.e. “sick your entire life and dependent on their system”. To me, for a person to trust a system like that is pure STUPIDITY. MMS cannot cure stupidity!

The definition of “stupid” is lacking thought or intelligence.  Example: I just made another stupid mistake.

Another definition of “stupid” is silly or unwise; showing poor judgment or little intelligence: Example: She was really stupid to quit her job like that. (Source)

I am not calling anyone stupid but, the action of trusting a system that cannot, will not and does not want to cure anything, is plain stupid!

Now, you might say, well, that is a little harsh and people just don't know, so they are not stupid but “ignorant” of the truth. Well, that might be correct in principle but in reality, if a person is trusting his or her life to a system that is profiting by people being sick then that is not ignorance but stupidity to me.

Every day people see the population worldwide becoming sicker and sicker. How many of us have seen friends and relatives die slow painful deaths due to mainstream medical procedures? It is not ignorance when we all see it every day.

The problem is people are lazy and do not want to take control of their own health so, they transfer the control of their most precious gift and commodity they have -LIFE- to a “medical doctor”.

The words “medical doctor” are not synonymous with truth and science.



In our world people today  “revere”, “respect” and even “worship” anyone that is called a “medical doctor”. Although, I believe people that have worked hard to achieve a certain degree deserve the recognition for their hard work, I don't believe that they should be “blindly” followed or believed as having all truth when it comes to health.

I am NOT saying that a man or woman that is studying “medicine” are not smart individuals. No, just the contrary. They are some of the smartest people I have known on an intellectual level. The “truth” is they  “sincerely” believe what they have been taught is the truth, but they are “sincerely wrong”!

The sad story is a medical doctor has been trained in a profession that DOES NOT have, as its goal, to cure ANY disease but to control symptoms of disease. This is taught in every government approved medical school in the world. “Government approved” medical schools are nothing more than medical schools that are controlled by the same people that own the pharmaceutical companies!

Medical Mafia

Paid for fraudulent research science papers: WakingScience Look at the billions pharmaceutical companies are paying for negligence and fraud by drugs “approved” by FDA! • GSK sued for 3 billion!

Pharmacuetcial heads telling the truth

HPV Vaccine

Brain damage, death and other horrors

Circleofdocs.com

High cholesterol scam

High blood pressure

Create-diseases-for-profit

Pharmaceutical package inserts





You see all the above facts and you still trust the pharmaceutical / medical industry? How about the fact that the Rockefeller family has ownership of every drug company in the world

There is a controversial movie called, “Vaxxed” that exposes how the MMR vaccine is linked to autism. The information is good about the CDC hiding data but the message from the producer is just plain “stupid”!  

He states that parents should wait until the 3rd year before their child receives the MMR vaccine. A child should never receive this vaccine no matter what the age!  This idea of getting the vaccine in the 3rd year is STUPID!  MMS cannot cure this kind of stupidity!

Links between MMR vaccine and Autism.

Again, I am not calling anyone stupid, only the actions of people I am calling stupid. Can you see why I would say this? Ask yourself if you are acting stupid in regard to your health?  Every person on earth needs to “take control” of his or her health! Each person needs to do their “due diligence”, meaning research it out and see what is best for his or her personal health.

I guarantee that poisoning the body with medicines, toxic chemicals and unhealthy foods is not the way. This is the “allopathic” method taught and used in 95% of the world's medical systems! You have to look elsewhere to find how to restore and maintain health. Here is a guy, Donald, that just left our Colombia Health Restoration Center. He had done his due diligence and after 10 years finally found what helped him when all other methods he tried failed!

Donald's 30 day experience at the G2 Colombian Health Restoration Center.

Another way to do your own “due diligence” and “take control” of your own health is to take the Genesis II Church On line Video Course.

Here you can not only learn how to start using MMS and the G2 sacraments that “cure” 95% of the world's diseases but learn “how to make MMS” in your own home! We now have over 1750 “health ministers” worldwide in over 120 countries! Join us and help us change the world!

Send your family and friends this link to help them understand what the Genesis II Church of Health and Healing is doing worldwide with MMS and its Sacramental protocols: www.QuantumLeap.is



It has helped a lot of people decide to do their own “due diligence” in regard to restoring or maintaining their health!

We are changing the world by the 10's of 1,000's

Archbishop Mark S. Grenon

Have you or anyone you know had good results with MMS? Please share a testimony at our MMS Testimonials site: Write a testimony.


Where to find MMS Testimonials:

MMS Video Testimonials

Written MMS Testimonials

Written MMS Testimonials - G2CFORUM.ORG

MMS Video Testimonials on YouTube

MMS Video Testimonials on Twitter

MMS Video Testimonials on Facebook





Jim Humble Interviews:

Jim Humble Talks to Freedom Central About MMS

More Jim Humble Interviews, Audio, Video


Responses to MMS Critics:

Jim Humble Responds to Rita O'Reilly RTE Current Affairs TV in Dublin Ireland (04-02-2015)


Collection of responses to MMS Critics at the Genesis II Forum

Archbishop's Response to (ABC)'s Lisa Barley Undercover Reporter (03-08-2015)

England Attacks Religous Freedom


Guides - Tutorials - Howtos:

How to make MMS: Sodium Chlorite 22.4% (YouTube)

CD Autism recovery statistics:

The book: 'Healing The Symptoms Known as Autism'.

A total of 223 children have been recovered (ATEC score of 10 or below,) using the CD Autism parasite protocol published in Kerri Rivera´s new book Healing the Symptoms Known as Autism available here. CD stands for Chlorine Dioxide, which is an inexpensive, broad spectrum, gentle, anti-pathogenic.

Undeniable proof that the Red Cross cured 154 Malaria cases with MMS, in their water purification study in Uganda, 2012: This video was leaked and released 1st of July 2013 and makes it impossible for the Red Cross to keep claiming that the study never took place, as was their response to the 2nd of may video.

Red Cross cures 154 Malaria cases in Uganda with MMS: This video was released 2nd of May 2013.

Autism Moms with MMS miracle stories (videos).

Basic Science of MMS: Read more (MMS wiki)

MMS Truthful Wiki: mmswiki.is


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

The Incredible Hidden Life Of Trees
December 10 2023 | From: UpliftConnect

Seven amazing facts you may not know: Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time. Watching their cycles of growth, shedding of leaves, and re-flowering in the spring, people have long perceived trees as powerful symbols of life, death, and renewal.



We look to them for inspiration when we need grounding energy, as their roots descending deep into the Earth remind us of our own connection to and dependence on our planet for stability and life. Trees live for hundreds or even thousands of years, and so we revere them as keepers of past secrets and sentinels of the future.

Related:
A Biologist Believes That Trees Speak A Language We Can Learn

Forests cover one-third of the Earth’s landmass. They provide a home to at least 80% of land-based plants, animals, and insects. Trees are one of our main defenses against climate change, as they balance our air by absorbing carbon dioxide from human activities and turning it into oxygen; they also protect watersheds by holding our soil in place.

In honor of the International Day of Forests on March 21, here are seven incredible facts about the hidden life of trees.

Trees have captured the human imagination since the beginning of time.




1. Pando, or the Trembling Giant

Pando is a grove of approximately 47,000 quaking aspen trees in Utah. This remarkable group of trees is considered a single organism, because all the trees share a single root system and each tree is genetically identical. New trees are produced by sprouting from the massive parent root system.

It is estimated that Pando has been alive at least 80,000 years, making it one of the oldest living things on the planet.

Consider that when this tree colony first sprouted from the ground, humans would still not arrive on North America for another 50,000 years. In some parts of the planet, Neanderthal people were still 30,000 years from going extinct.

The 106-acre grove of trees has seen unimaginable changes, living through the ice age and at times being completely burnt down above ground, but surviving and renewing itself below ground.



Pando treesThe stunning pando trees

Related: The Trees Will Teach You Telepathy + Now You Can Hear Chemistry?


2. More than 25% of Western Pharmaceuticals Originate in Rainforest Plants


There are 3,000 plants currently recognized by the U.S. National Cancer Institute as active against cancer cells, and 70% of these come from rainforests. Perhaps this is why the shamans of the Amazon believe that for every human ailment, the rainforest holds a cure.

And yet, only 1% of all rainforest plants have actually been studied (by modern science) for medicinal purposes. Imagine how many valuable healing plants are destroyed or even made extinct as the rainforests are cleared at a rate of 1.5 acres per second. Due to rainforest destruction, the Earth loses approximately 137 species of plants, animals, and insects per day.


3. Not All Rainforests are in Tropical Zones

The Pacific Temperate Rainforest is the largest remaining coastal temperate rainforest on Earth. It is situated along the Pacific Coast and stretches from Northern California up to the Prince William Sound in Alaska.

It is characterized by high amounts of rainfall, more than 10 feet per year in some areas; and in many places the forest grows right up to the shoreline. It includes the Great Bear Rainforest in western Canada, home to the Spirit Bear, a rare subspecies of black bear with a white coat.

A National Geographic article about the Great Bear Rainforest states: “Grizzlies, black bears, wolves, wolverines, humpback whales, and orcas thrive along a coast that has been home to First Nations like the Gitga’at for hundreds of generations.

It’s a spooky, wild, mysterious place: There are wolves here that fish. Deer that swim. Western red cedar trees that have stood a thousand years or more. And a black bear that is white.”



Alt text hereSpirit bear in the Great Bear Rainforest

Related:
Carbon Dioxide Revealed As The “Miracle Molecule Of Life” For Re-Greening The Planet & Leonardo DiCaprio’s War On Carbon Is Actually A War Against All Plants, Rainforests And Ecosystems On The Entire Planet


4. In Many Cultures, it is Believed That Hugging a Tree Releases Negative Energy From the Human Body

Many people believe that trees, like humans and all living things, possess an energetic vibration and an aura. Because trees’ vibrations are slower and deeply connected to the Earth through their roots, connecting with trees can help us to feel safe, secure, and stable.

Most would agree that a walk in the forest or even simply gazing at a tree provides a deep feeling of peace and serenity, and can be emotionally and psychologically healing.


5. People in Malaysia Maintain a Very Intimate Relationship With Trees

Among the Sng’oi indigenous people, a person and a tree can belong together, and this relationship is maintained for life. When a person belongs with a tree, they also belong with its offspring: any trees that grow from the seeds of the first tree, no matter how far they become scattered.

Also in Malaysia, trees are planted around houses so closely that the walls of the homes may give way to the growing roots. In the graveyards, the trees are allowed to take root into graves, and it is said that the trees whisper prayers to the creator asking for the forgiveness of sins of those buried in that place.

These practices speak to an ancient knowing that people and trees are intimately interconnected throughout life and forever in history.



Hugging a tree can release negative energy from the bodyHugging a tree can release negative energy from the body


6. Trees are Literally Saving our Lives Every Day


A July 2014 study showed that trees prevent $6.8 billion per year in averted health costs annually, just in the United States. It is estimated that by removing massive amounts of air pollution through their leaves, trees “prevented 850 human deaths and 670,000 cases of acute respiratory symptoms in 2010 alone.”

Studies show that trees in urban areas are removing 4 to 8 times the pollution from the air as their equivalents in rural areas.

This highlights the importance of planting trees everywhere we possibly can, and especially in highly-populated areas where pollution is highest.



Trees are saving our livesTrees are an important part of our lives

Related: The Quantum Theory On Mind-Body Connection + Morphic Resonance: The Science Of Interconnectedness


7. Trees in a Forest Communicate With One Another Through Underground Networks

Trees are connected below the ground by mycorrhizal fungi, which live symbiotically with the roots of the trees. Both the trees and the fungi need each other to survive. But that’s not all. Because the fungi essentially connect the roots of one tree to another, the trees can use the fungi to pass nutrients to one another.

So, for example, in winter when aspens are weaker, nearby conifers were found to pass additional nutrients to the aspens to keep them healthy. Similarly, older, more-established trees pass nutrients through the fungi to young seedlings which need to grow larger toward the sun’s light in order to survive.

The largest, oldest trees in the forest serve as the hub because they possess and produce large amounts of resources, and their massive roots spread out in all directions.

When one tree is attacked by insects, it distributes pheromonal chemicals through the fungi beneath the soil to warn nearby trees of a possible attack so the other trees can prepare by changing the chemical makeup of their leaves. The fungal networks also strengthen the immune systems of the trees.

So not only do different species of trees help each other out in the forest, but fungi and even other types of plants join the underground network and communicate together to support the health of the entire ecosystem.

There is documented proof that when a tree is dying, it releases its resources into the root networks so that its neighbors can benefit from the nourishment that it will no longer need - it is making the ultimate sacrifice.



Trees communicate with each other below the groundTrees communicate with each other below the ground

Related: Research Reveals Plants Can Think, Choose & Remember


Natural, Sacred and Wild

In closing, here is a beautiful poem written by Clare Dakin of TreeSisters, which will help you to deepen your connection with trees and with all of nature:

Let the birds take your clothes
Let the waves undo your holding back
Let the vines unravel your tired mind
And the earth savour your sweat and tears.

Let your stories burn off like rising mist,
As your past and the false floors of curbed self love
Dissolve into butterfly wings and fire flies
As your edges blur and your Planetary Self ignites.

Let the trees bathe your breath
Let the meadows embrace you
Let the mountains and the bees remind you
Let the sky flood in and allow the clouds to guide you.

Let your undoing be as total
As your becoming is beautiful –
And when the living world has climbed inside
Enough for you to feel four legs, scales and wings.

May you finally know yourself alive as all things –
Indivisible and responsible
Reborn into wholeness
Natural, Sacred and Wild


~ Clare Dakin


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Houston Anthropologist Reveals Irrefutable Proof That Recorded History Is Wrong
December 9 2023 | From: WakingTimes / Various

Evidence Found Across the Globe of Highly Evolved Human Species from before the Ice Age, Demand Scientific Recognition of our Past that Depicts Societies of Advanced Technology and Culture.



Does this look super advanced or what?

Houston anthropologist, Dr. Semir Osmanagich, founder of the Bosnian Archaeology Park, the most active archaeology site in the world, declares that irrefutable scientific evidence exists of ancient civilizations with advanced technology that leaves us no choice but to change our recorded history. 

Related: "Under The Carpet" New Zealand Hidden History Documentary

An examination of the age of structures across the earth reveals conclusively that they were built by advanced civilizations from over 29,000 years ago.


“Acknowledging that we are witness to fundamental proof of advanced civilizations dating back over 29,000 years and an examination of their societal structures forces the World to reconsider its understanding of the development of civilization and history,”
explains Dr. Semir Osmanagich.

“Conclusive data at the Bosnian Pyramid site revealed in 2008 and confirmed this year by several independent labs who conducted radio carbon testing dates the site at 29,400 +/-400 years minimum.”

The radiocarbon dating tests of 29,200 years +/- 400 years was done by Radiocarbon Lab from Kiew, Ukraine, on organic material found at the Bosnian Pyramid site. Physicist Dr. Anna Pazdur of Poland’s Silesian University first announced the news at a Press Conference in Sarajevo in August of 2008.

Professor of Classical Archaeology from the University of Alexandria Dr. Mona Haggag called this discovery “writing new pages in European and World history.”



Related: “Negative Hallucination” Hypnosis Experiment Demonstration Video & The Weaponisation Of History And Journalism

The C14 date of 29,000 years at the Bosnian Archaeological Park was obtained from a piece of organic material retrieved from a clay layer inside the outer casing to the pyramid. It follows a sample date obtained during the 2012 dig season on material located above the concrete at 24,800 years, meaning this structure has a construction profile stretching back almost 30,000 years.


“The ancient people who built these pyramids knew the secrets of frequency and energy. They used these natural resources to develop technologies and undertake construction on scales we have never witnessed on earth,
said Dr. Osmanagich.

Evidence clearly shows that the pyramids were built as ancient energy machines aligned with the earth’s energy grid, providing energy for healing as well as power.

Ancient historians in the US have news just as astonishing as anything found in the far corners of the globe. For instance, the Rockwall discovery outside of Dallas, Texas, is only one example of how we are now re-examining ancient mysteries to reveal more about our past, right in the United States.



Related: The Stolen History Of Australia And New Zealand

H2 (History 2) popular series Unearthing Ancient America recently filmed an episode about the Rockwall that will air later this year. The Texas site is a complex and massive wall ten miles in diameter built over 20,000 years ago and covered by soil seven stories below the ground.

The question is by whom was this structure built and for what purpose and, most importantly, how can knowledge left by these past civilizations help shape our future?

Newly-revealed or rediscovered traces of ancient civilizations have ignited an innate curiosity about human origins as reflected by recent coverage in mainstream media and TV. The November 2013 issue of National Geographic: 100 Greatest Mysteries Revealed-Ancient Civilizations Unearthed says;


“Sometimes cultures leave behind mysteries that baffle those who come after them, from standing stones to coded manuscripts, indications that ancient people indeed had a profound purpose.”

Forward-thinking scientists continue to pursue knowledge from our past that is useful to determine a better future. Renowned author Michal Cremo in his book Forbidden Archeology theorizes that knowledge of advanced Homo-sapiens has been suppressed or ignored by the scientific establishment because it contradicts the current views of human origins that don’t agree with the dominant paradigm.

Cremo’s body of work has been described as “a useful teaching resource, raising a wide range of issues covering aspects of knowledge transfer, sure to be provocative in the classroom.” It has been reviewed with widespread appraisal by hundreds of academic journals.



Gobekli Tepe in Eastern Turkey

Results clearly indicate that similar advanced civilizations of humans were present all across the globe at that time in history. For example, Gobekli Tepe located in Eastern Turkey, is a vast complex of enormous megalithic stone circles with a radius of between 10 and 20 meters, much larger than the well-known Stonehenge in Great Britain.



Related: 20 History Questions They Refuse To Answer In School

Excavations at Gobekli Tepe that began there in 1995 revealed radio carbon dating at least 11,600 years. German archaeologist Dr. Klaus Schmidt from the German Archaeological Institute, Berlin, Germany, with the support of ArchaeoNova Institute from Heidelberg, Germany, has led the excavation of these recently-discovered pre-historic megalithic circles at the Turkey location.

“Gobekli Tepe is one of the most fascinating Neolithic locations in the world,” Dr. Klaus Schmidt claims. But as he explains in a recent report, to understand the new finds, archaeologists need to work closely with specialists in comparative religion, architectural and art theory, cognitive and evolutionary psychology, sociologists using social network theory, and others.


“It is the complex story of the earliest, large settled communities, their extensive networking, and their communal understanding of their world, perhaps even the first organized religions and their symbolic representations of the cosmos,”
as reported by Klaus Schmidt.

In addition to the megalithic structures, figures and carvings have been discovered, depicting animals of pre historic nature such as dinosaurs and other wild life. Since excavations started in 1995, four of the circles have been partially cleaned, but it is thought that there are a total of up to 50 circles hidden underground. 



Related: Michael Tellinger And Jim Marrs: Suppressed Ancient History & Real History

These vast monoliths, soaring seven meters in height and 25 tons in mass at Gobekli Tepe, are situated right in the heart of what we perceive as the origin of civilization. This find offers new guidance to the true history of earth and our ancient civilizations.

“Our archaeological research goal is not to simply uncover all of the megalithic circles but to try to figure out their purpose,” adds Schmidt.


Bosnian Pyramid Now in Eighth Year: Proof of Advanced Civilizations from over 30,000 years ago

The Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids now in the eighth year of excavation spans six square kilometers in the Visoko River Basin 40km northwest of Sarajevo. Comprised of four ancient pyramids almost three times the size of Giza and an extensive subterranean pyramid tunnel complex, new discoveries each year continue to reveal proof of a much different history of mankind on earth.



Related: Disinterest In Pre-Maori History Stuns

The central pyramid of the Sun rises a colossal 420 meters in to the air and has a mass of millions of tons. By comparison the Great pyramid of Cheops (Khufu) in the Giza plateau is 146 meters high, making the Bosnian Pyramids the largest and oldest known pyramids on the planet.

Since research began at the Bosnian site, Dr. Osmanagich has amazed the scientific and archaeological community by gathering a team of interdisciplinary engineers, physicists and researchers from around the world to conduct open and transparent investigation of the site to try and discover the true nature and purpose of this pyramidal complex.


“This is an unknown culture presenting highly-advanced arts and sciences, technology capable of forming truly massive structures and we believe in that process demonstrating an ability to harness pure energy resources,”
comments Tim Moon, who has recently joined Osmanagich as lead archeologist at the Bosnian site.

The archaeological project delivered another significant finding this year in the pyramid tunnel complex known as Ravine. Tunneling deep into a ridge line leading toward the Pyramid of the Sun the team has unearthed several megalith stones. 



Oh yeah, that one was definitely made with ropes and pulleys too. Sigh.

Related: An Ancient Device Too Advanced To Be Real Gives Up Its Secrets At Last + Is This Proof Of Aliens In Peru?

In August an enormous stone estimated at 25,000 kgs was uncovered approximately 400 meters into the labyrinth. This is a hugely significant find,”comments Moon. Here we have a massive stone, possibly a constructed ceramic, buried under hundreds of thousands of tons of material.

We are locating foundation walls around its perimeter and cut stone blocks.” Large quantities of artifacts have been recovered from the associated tunnels leading to the site, including effigies painted on stone, art objects and a series of hieroglyphics or ancient texts carved into the tunnel walls.

Dr. Osmangich stresses that it is time for open sharing of knowledge so we can understand and learn from our past.


“It is time for us to open our minds to the true nature of our origin and destruction of each other as a civilization on this planet. Our mission here is to realign science with spirituality in order to progress as a species, and this demands a clear path of shared knowledge.”

Visitors are welcome to the Bosnian Valley of the Pyramids and its Foundation offers a volunteer program each dig season, running June to September.

To hear Dr. Sam’s interview on Lost Knowledge go here.

For more on the Bosnian Pyramids go to www.icbp.ba.


Related Articles:

Hidden Origins: Exposing Humanity's Ancient Secrets

Unexplainable Discovery: Ancient Indian Mandala Found At Peru’s Nazca Lines

Evidence Of Prehistoric Civilizations: 3 Pieces Of Advanced Ancient Technology Hundreds Of Millions Of Years Old

Easter Island - Ancient Links With New Zealand Maori

Mars And Earth Have Same Ancient Man Rock-Engraving: Visitors To Both Planets?



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Why The Whole Banking System Is A Scam - Godfrey Bloom MEP
December 8 2023 | From: Europarle / UKIPMEPS

The following video was recorded at Strausberg, 21 May 2013.



Joint debate: Banking Union: Single national supervisory mechanism.

Related: The Great Transition: The Shadow Ruling Force Behind The Central Banks Secrecy Is Repugnant In A Free And Open Society


Related Articles:

Governments Are Corporations & The Gold Standard Will Break Up The Banking Cartel

A Central Banker’s Plan For Your Money


Overseas Banking Villains Suck New Zealanders’ Wealth Offshore

Banks Are Stealing Our Future? How To Put An End?

Black Magic: Satanists Rule The World, Not Politicians, Bankers Or Military Heads [Although They Are Usually All One And The Same] + Another Illuminati Whistleblower Speaks Out


Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Five Damaging Lies Advertisements Desperately Want You To Believe
December 7 2023 | From: TheUnboundedSpirit / Various

Every single day we are bombarded with thousands of advertisements, whether we realize it or not.



Being accustomed to their constant presence, we don’t consciously pay attention to them and can’t realize the tremendous negative impact they have on us and the world.

Related: To Sell You Happiness, They First Make You Feel Like Shit

Below are five quite damaging lies that advertisements want you to believe and which you should be aware of so as to avoid falling into their trap.

1. You are incomplete. Advertisements do their best to convince you that you are not enough as you are. Once they achieve to make you feel bad about yourself, they provide you with a solution to make you feel well again: that of buying the products they sell.



Related: Is Subliminal Advertising Legit?


2. Everything you need is on sale. 
Advertisements want to persuade you to think that anything you desire can be bought. Do you want to feel confident? Then buy this shiny car! Do you feel you’re not attractive to the opposite sex? Then get yourselves some hip shoes! Are you stressed? Then consume these magic pills!

3. Material possessions are all that matters in life. Another damaging lie promoted through advertising is that acquiring material things is the key to living well. You needn’t search anywhere else for happiness and fulfillment, such as in pursuing your passions or building healthy relationships with people - there’s always a product that can substitute for all those things.

4. Success is measured by the stuff you own. Advertisements try to fool you into believing that if you have less and worse stuff than those around you, then you are a person to be looked down upon, and that the only way to prove your importance is to get more and better stuff than others.



Related: Brilliant Comic Of Banksy's Call To Arms Against Advertisers

Thus advertisements are urging you to constantly compare yourself to others and compete with them.

5. Consuming without end is normal. Lastly yet perhaps most importantly, advertisements are trying to convince you that your purpose in life is to consume, and that only by doing so will you fit in society.

As a result, they can immensely complicate your life by stressing you to constantly hunt for the next best thing, regardless of how wasteful that behavior is and the negative consequences it has on the planet.

As you can understand, the sole purpose of advertisements is to sell you stuff so that companies and corporations can make an economic gain, and the tactics they use to achieve that are hideous and deceptive.



Related: The Best News Of Our Time: Materialism Is A Busted Philosophy

The quicker you realize this fact and stop buying into their lies, the more you’ll be able to live free, without feeling the constant pressure to mindlessly waste your time, energy, and the earth’s finite resources to satisfy your artificial needs.


Related Articles:

Advertising Watchdog Partially Upholds 5G Advertisement Claiming Wireless Tech Is Harmful & Wifi, 5G And EMF Pollution Can Cause Psychiatric Effects In Humans, Plus Spontaneous Abortions, Infertility And Cellular DNA Damage

Former CNN Host Piers Morgan Blasts The Crazy Left: “Liberals Have Become Unbearable” Which Is Why Trump Populism “Is Rising” + Subliminal Messages In Advertising: How They Affect Your Mind

Google, Facebook And Amazon Are Just Extensions Of The Surveillance State; Dangerous Mafia Heads Of A Fascist Corporate Regime + Internal Facebook Documents Reveal Zuckerberg Discussed Selling User Data To Developers, Advertisers

The Mainstream Media Lies



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Are You A Mind-Controlled CIA Stooge? + The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories
December 6 2023 | From: PaulCraigRoberts / Various

Do you smirk when you hear someone question the official stories of Orlando, San Bernardino, Paris or Nice? Do you feel superior to 2,500 architects and engineers, to firefighters, commercial and military pilots, physicists and chemists, and former high government officials who have raised doubts about 9/11?



If so, you reflect the profile of a mind-controlled CIA stooge.

Related: How Conspiracy Theorising May Soon Get You Labelled A ‘Domestic Terrorist’

The term “conspiracy theory” was invented and put into public discourse by the CIA in 1964 in order to discredit the many skeptics who challenged the Warren Commission’s conclusion that President John F. Kennedy was assassinated by a lone gunman named Lee Harvey Oswald, who himself was assassinated while in police custody before he could be questioned.

The CIA used its friends in the media to launch a campaign to make suspicion of the Warren Commission report a target of ridicule and hostility. This campaign was “one of the most successful propaganda initiatives of all time.”

So writes political science professor Lance deHaven-Smith, who in his peer-reviewed book, Conspiracy Theory in America, published by the University of Texas Press, tells the story of how the CIA succeeded in creating in the public mind reflexive, automatic, stigmatization of those who challenge government explanations.



This is an extremely important and readable book, one of those rare books with the power to break you out of The Matrix.

Professor deHaven-Smith is able to write this book because the original CIA Dispatch #1035-960, which sets out the CIA plot, was obtained through a Freedom of Information Act request. Apparently, the bureaucracy did not regard a document this old as being of any importance.

The document is marked “Destroy when no longer needed,” but somehow wasn’t. CIA Dispatch #1035-960 is reproduced in the book.



Related: American Pravda: How The CIA Invented "Conspiracy Theories"

The success that the CIA has had in stigmatizing skepticism of government explanations has made it difficult to investigate State Crimes Against Democracy (SCAD) such as 9/11.

With the public mind programmed to ridicule “conspiracy kooks,” even in the case of suspicious events such as 9/11 the government can destroy evidence, ignore prescribed procedures, delay an investigation, and then form a political committee to put its imprimatur on the official story.

Professor deHaven-Smith notes that in such events as Kennedy’s assassination and 9/11 official police and prosecutorial investigations are never employed.

The event is handed off to a political commission.

Professor deHaven-Smith’s book supports what I have told my readers: the government controls the story from the beginning by having the official explanation ready the moment a SCAD occurs. This makes any other explanation a “conspiracy theory.” This is the way Professor deHaven-Smith puts it:


“A SCAD approach to memes assumes further that the CIA and other possibly participating agencies are formulating memes well in advance of operations, and therefore SCAD memes appear and are popularized very quickly before any competing concepts are on the scene.”

The CIA’s success in controlling public perception of what the Founding Fathers would have regarded as suspicious events involving the government enables those in power positions within government to orchestrate events that serve hidden agendas.

The events of September 11 2001 created the new paradigm of endless war in behalf of a Washington-dominated world.

The CIA’s success in controlling public perceptions has made it impossible to investigate elite political crimes.

Consequently, it is now possible for treason to be official US government policy.



Related: Summary On 9/11 And Inconsistencies Regarding The Official Story

Professor deHaven-Smith’s book will tell you the story of the assassination of President Kennedy by elements of the US military, CIA, and Secret Service. Just as the Warren Commission covered up the State Crime Against Democracy, Professor deHaven-Smith shows why we should doubt the official 9/11 story. And anything else that the government tells us.

Read this book. It is short. It is affordable. It is reality preparation. It will innoculate you against being a dumbshit, insouciant, brainwashed American. I am surprised that the CIA has not purchased the entire print run and burned the books.

Perhaps the CIA feels secure from its success in brainwashing the public and does not believe that American democracy and accountable government can be restored.


The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented By The CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief Of Official Government Stories

The Term “Conspiracy Theory” Was Invented by the CIA In Order To Prevent Disbelief of Official Government Stories

Ron Unz reports on the cold shoulder given to an extensively researched book that concludes that World War II hero General George Patton was murdered by the CIA because he became a powerful critic of Washington.

Related: Five So-Called “Conspiracy Theories” That Are Actually Supported By Mainstream Science

The book was ignored because the US media and public have been programmed to regard the US government as a truth-teller and those who expose government crimes as “conspiracy theorists.”

In 2013 Professor Lance Dehaven-Smith in a peer-reviewed book published by the University of Texas Press showed that the term “conspiracy theory” was developed by the CIA as a means of undercutting critics of the Warren Commission’s report that President Kennedy was killed by Oswald. The use of this term was heavily promoted in the media by the CIA.

It is ironic that the American [Western] left is a major enforcer of the CIA’s strategy to shut up skeptics by branding them conspiracy theorists.


Related Articles:

Nine Indisputable Truths About “Conspiracy Theorists”

How To Get Rid Of Paranoid Conspiracy Theorists

Everywhere In The Western World, Government Is A Conspiracy Against The People & Cartels That Run The World

The New mRNA COVID Vaccines Inject An Operating System Into Your Body - Not A Conspiracy Theory, Moderna Admits It & Open Letter to NZ MPs - Lockdown Is A Disastrous Error

The Business Of Journalists Is To Destroy The Truth & Americans Think The Media Is More Destructive Than Banks & Corporations + The Normals vs. Conspiracy Theorists

Mainstream Media Is Trying Hard To Convince Us That “Plandemic” Is A “Conspiracy Theory” + The New Normal

Obamagate Is Not A Conspiracy Theory & Disinformation From Schiff, Media Damaged America

People’s Skepticism About Covid-19 Is The Fault Of The Lying Mass Media & A Personal Take On Covid-19 “Conspiracy Theories”

A Country Without An Honest Media Is Lost: The Largest Conspiracy Theory Peddlers Are Mainstream Media And The US State Department

New Study Reveals Surprising Truths About Conspiracy Theories



Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi

Wake Up Kiwi Wake Up Kiwi
Creepy Globalist Bastards Going All In On Mass Surveillance & Why A Global Government Is The Ultimate Goal Of Billionaires
December 5 2023 | From: JordanSather / GlobalResearch / Various

"If you have nothing to hide, you shouldn't be afraid."



If anyone was going to play the super villain in the next James Bond film, it should probably be Klaus Schwab.

Related: Why a Global Government Is the Ultimate Goal of Billionaires. “The Goal Is for You to Own Nothing”

Here’s what he had to say the other day about governmental surveillance programs:





Related: Responding To The “Nothing To Hide” Argument In Support Of Mass Surveillance + We Are All Targeted Individuals Now with Dr. Katherine Horton

Ah, yes, the good ol’ “nothing to hide” argument promoted by globalists and their bootlickers trying to convince us that mass surveillance programs are good for you, they’ll root out the evil in society and spur progress - you shouldn’t be scared of this as long as you aren’t going anything bad!

Okay Klaus Schwab, why don’t you and your Illuminati buddies operate in total transparency, too?

I want to know about you and your friends financials, I want recording from all the secret backroom meetings in Davos, and I want to know about what happens on those private islands in the Caribbean you guys like to frequent.

Quite incredible that they demand total transparency from us and tell us to “not be afraid” while they operate in total secrecy.

Hypocrisy rivaling their demands for gun control while being protected by armed guards, or pushing “Green Energy” while flying on private jets.

So it appears that mass surveillance and data mining is priority #1 for the globalists heading into 2024.


“To combat future pandemics that we create, we need to track everyone who hasn’t taken our vaccine and make their life a living hell!” - WEF, probably

Related: Information And Disinformation & WHO’s Worldwide Power Grab: Beware Of The New International Health Regulation And Pandemic Treaty, A Health Tyranny Never Heard Of Before In Human History

Although, looking back over the last decade it’s apparent that mass tracking has been at the top of their list for a while.

These globalists are real stage 5 clingers.

Soon they’ll demand to know how many times you breathe per day and how big your shits are so they can carbon tax you. Maybe that’s what those Google FitBits are really for.

The creation of Big Tech social media platforms is a prime example of the shadow government surveillance state working to track our every move.

We are sold this idea that platforms like Amazon, Google, and Facebook were started out of a garage by an aspiring tech genius, but deeper digging into the creation of these platforms shows that organizations like the CIA, through their In-Q-Tel venture capital initiative, and DARPA were instrumental in helping these corporations get going.

The CIA is quite active at Stanford in the Bay Area.



Related: Divide et Impera: Divide and Rule

So for two decades [they] have already been gathering shitloads of data from billions of people around the world.

What a perfect way to know everything about everyone - get them to willingly and happily upload everything about their lives to their social media profiles themselves! Let’s call it.. “Facebook”..

Little do people know that DARPA (the military’s advanced technology R&D agency) had a project called “Lifelog” in the early 2000s that was designed to create databases about a person’s entire existence.

From 2003 NYT article on Lifelog:


"The projected system, called LifeLog, would take in all of a subject's experience, from phone numbers dialed and e-mail messages viewed to every breath taken, step made and place gone.

The idea is to index the material and make patterns easily retrievable, in an effort to make machines think more like people, learning from experience.”

Every breath taken. Ha! They really do want to know!


"…the system must index the details of daily life and make it possible ''to infer the user's routines, habits and relationships with other people, organizations, places and objects, and to exploit these patterns to ease its task.”

Oh, and how coincidental! The same day the Pentagon killed their Lifelog project, Facebook was created!

Check those dates.





If only people knew.




Related: The Elite’s 5,000-Year War on Your Mind Is Climaxing. Can We Defeat It?

Acquiring a mass database about the movements, shopping habits, and general behaviors of every person is a globalist wet dream - imagine the power and control they could have with a dragnet like that.

The COVID Scamdemic was a major step in their push for a mass surveillance state all in the name of “healthy and safety”.

Vaccine passports and digital health certificates were installed in many western countries, with some governments and corporations going so far as to deny people access to business and events based upon their vaccine status.

This is only a taste of what would be accomplished by the shadow government if they were able to expand the tracking of citizen to all other aspects of our lives.

You already notice when you speak about something in a conversation with your phone around, and the next time you log into Instagram there’s an ad for what you mentioned 5 minutes earlier?

That, on steroids.

Ads are completely customized to suck you dry of money, and your conscious mind will barely notice it.

Social media posts are monitored, if you say the wrong think - no grocery store for you! Over exaggeration? Maybe.. or maybe not. Just look at what’s going on in China.



Related: The Problem of Sub-Global Identities

The next stage in their mass surveillance and control efforts will likely involve the climate change agenda and Central Bank Digital Currencies (CBDCs).

Using the justification of “saving the planet from global warming so grandma doesn’t die!” to track the carbon output in our daily lives.

This would mean your vehicles, traveling, etc. CBDCs would allow the Deep State to view all of our spending, and possibly going so far as to shut off our ability to buy goods and services based upon whatever arbitrary decisions they make.

Of course they say this won’t happen with CBDCs, but when have we even known government bureaucrats to keep their word?

Another layer of data acquisition must also be discussed here - the advent of “smart” devices in every area of our lives is also a major concern.

From refrigerators to microwaves to beds to travel luggage to watches, and of course smart phones - all of these “smart” devices and the apps on them can be a huge security risk.

And even vehicles are also collecting massive amounts of data on us. Connecting your phone to your vehicles and using the apps on the giant dashboard screen only increases the problem.




Related: “Breakdown of Basic Rights”. We Are “The Resistance”: “Every Day We Should Fight for Peace”

We are killing ourselves with convenience culture.

Sometimes it’s best not to make the choice of what’s cool and hip and advances, but what’s simple.

Use wired headphones. Those invisible waves from wireless headphones are rotting your brain anyway.

Get a car model that’s a couple years older so all the much-too-fancy gizmos and gadgets aren’t on it. What do you need app in a car for, anyway? Or a self-driving one?

Don’t be a lazy shit. And I’ll never u